Palm PMG0501000P User Manual

User Guide  
Contents  
Your Palm® TreoPro smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Palm® TreoPro smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
C O N T E N T S  
iii  
Using Windows LiveTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
C O N T E N T S  
iv  
Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183  
Word Mobile® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239  
PowerPoint Mobile® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246  
Excel Mobile® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247  
Adobe® Reader® LE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261  
C O N T E N T S  
v
C O N T E N T S  
vi  
C O N T E N T S  
viii  
CHAPTER  
1
Welcome  
Congratulations on the purchase of your Palm® TreoPro  
smartphone.  
Benefits  
Make and receive phone calls  
Browse the web  
Manage your contacts, calendar,  
and task list  
Use a Bluetooth® headset (sold  
separately) for hands-free  
operation  
Receive and send corporate and  
personal email messages  
9
 
W E L C O M E  
1
Your Palm® TreoPro  
smartphone  
TIP LOOK HERE: Don’t miss the helpful tips  
and cross-references given in these boxes.  
Whats in the box?  
In one compact and indispensable device,  
you now have all of the following:  
All of the following items should be in the  
smartphone box:  
An advanced wireless smartphone  
A full suite of Windows Mobile®  
organizer applications: Contacts,  
Calendar, Notes, and Tasks  
Hardware  
Treo Pro smartphone  
Portable expansion capability (microSD  
or MMCmicro cards, sold separately)  
Rechargeable battery (1500 mAh)  
USB AC charger (with international  
adapters in some smartphone  
packages)  
High-speed data with GPRS/EDGE and  
UMTS (3G and HSDPA) support  
Wi-Fi capability  
USB cable  
A 2-megapixel digital camera  
GPS functionality  
Stereo headset  
Support for numerous mobile email  
solutions  
Documentation and software  
Getting Started, information on how to  
set up and begin to use your  
smartphone  
Text and multimedia messaging  
Windows Media® Player Mobile  
Microsoft Office Mobile® suite  
Palm warranty  
This guide helps you set up your  
smartphone and learn to use it.  
Safety and legal information  
Your smartphone contains links to the  
following:  
Y O U R P A L M ® T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E  
11  
                     
W E L C O M E  
1
Desktop synchronization software  
Data service plan: For web browsing and  
(ActiveSync® desktop software for  
Windows XP computers, Windows  
Mobile Device Center for Windows  
VistaTM computers)  
email.  
Additional data services: These may be  
required to send and receive multimedia  
messages. Check with your wireless  
service provider for information.  
User Guide (this guide) on the web  
Microsoft Office Outlook® 2007  
software trial download  
TIP When you sign up for data services with  
your wireless service provider, be sure to  
discuss what charges you incur if you go over  
the stated limit on your data plan.  
What do I need to  
get started?  
After you have the required plan and  
services, you must have your smartphone  
within range of your wireless service  
providers cellular coverage to use the  
phone, messaging, and web features. Data  
speeds vary based on network availability  
and capacity.  
As you work through the instructions in this  
guide, you need all the items that came in  
the smartphone box (see Whats in the  
box?).  
In addition, depending on how you want to  
use your smartphone, heres what you  
need to get from your wireless service  
provider:  
Finally, if you plan to synchronize personal  
information between your smartphone and  
a computer, you need access to that  
computer during setup.  
Service contract with an activated SIM  
card: For making and receiving calls, and  
sending and receiving text messages.  
W H A T D O  
I
N E E D T O G E T S T A R T E D ?  
12  
                   
W E L C O M E  
1
Online support from Palm: For  
up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting,  
and support information, go to  
Where can I learn  
more?  
For a quick introduction  
If you need more information  
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces  
you to many of your smartphone’s  
features. It is already installed on your  
smartphone, and you can open it from  
your Today screen by selecting Quick  
Tour.  
Books: Many books on Windows  
Mobile devices are available from local  
or online book retailers (look in the  
computer section).  
Customer service from your wireless  
service provider: For questions about  
your mobile account or features, contact  
your wireless service providers  
customer care.  
TIP If you remove the Quick Tour entry from  
your Today screen (see Using your Today  
screen), you can always open the Quick Tour  
by pressing Start, selecting Programs, and  
then selecting Quick Tour.  
While using your smartphone  
On-device Help: Your smartphone  
includes on-device Help that is specially  
formatted for your smartphone screen.  
To view the on-device help, press  
Start  
and select Help.  
W H E R E C A N  
I
L E A R N M O R E ?  
13  
                   
W E L C O M E  
1
W H E R E C A N  
I
L E A R N M O R E ?  
14  
CHAPTER  
2
Setting up  
You’re about to discover the many things about your  
smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have  
fun, too.  
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll  
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it  
uniquely yours. But first, follow these few easy steps to set up  
your smartphone and get it running.  
Benefits  
Know where your smartphone  
controls are located  
Start using your smartphone right  
away  
15  
   
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Palm® TreoPro smartphone overview  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Side button  
Left softkey  
Start  
Phone/Send  
Calendar  
Lanyard connector  
MicroUSB connector  
(sync and power connector)  
Front view  
1
11  
12  
2
3
4
10 3.5mm stereo headset jack  
11 Earpiece  
12 Touchscreen  
13 5-way navigator with Center button  
14 Right softkey  
15 OK  
16 End  
17 Messaging  
18 Microphone  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
5
6
7
8
TIP Be careful not to scratch or crush your  
smartphone screen. Do not store it in a place  
where other items might damage it.  
9
DID YOU KNOW  
?
By default, pressing and  
10  
18  
holding the Side button opens Camera (see  
Camera). You can change the function of the  
Side button (see Reassigning buttons).  
1
2
Charge indicator light (visible when  
smartphone is being charged)  
Volume  
P A L M ® T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W  
17  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Wi-Fi  
IMPORTANT The smartphone speaker  
IR (infrared) port  
Reset button (under back panel)  
Stylus  
includes a large magnet, so be sure not to  
store your smartphone near credit cards or  
other items that could be demagnetized.  
Camera lens  
Back view  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
To save power, when your  
smartphone screen turns off, the Wi-Fi feature  
turns off. Press Wi-Fi to turn this feature back  
on and quickly reconnect to a network. You  
can also set an option to leave the Wi-Fi  
feature on (see Customizing Wi-Fi settings).  
1
7
TIP To connect a lanyard (sold separately),  
remove the back panel, connect the lanyard,  
and replace the back panel.  
2
Top view  
3
4
1
2
5
6
1
2
Power  
Ringer switch (slide to turn off all sounds  
immediately)  
1
2
Speaker  
Expansion card (microSD) slot  
(under back panel)  
P A L M ® T R E O P R O S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W  
18  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Check with your wireless service provider  
for information.  
Inserting the SIM  
card and battery  
IMPORTANT Your smartphone responds  
only after you complete these steps. After  
the screen wakes up the first time, you can  
WARNING Use only batteries and chargers  
that are approved by your wireless service  
provider or Palm with your smartphone.  
Failure to use an approved battery or  
charger may increase the risk of your  
smartphone overheating, catching fire, or  
exploding, which may result in serious  
bodily injury, death, or property damage.  
Failure to use an approved battery or  
charger may also prevent your smartphone  
from turning on or charging and may void  
your smartphone warranty.  
turn it on and off by pressing Power  
.
1
With the back panel facing you, press  
the lower-right corner of the back panel  
with your right thumb to release the  
panel. Remove the panel.  
Your SIM card contains account  
information such as your phone number  
and voicemail access number. To use your  
smartphones phone, email, or web  
features, you need to insert a SIM card.  
If you don’t have a SIM card, contact your  
wireless service provider.  
To take advantage of the high-speed data  
connection available on your smartphone,  
you may need to have a 3G SIM card.  
I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y  
19  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
2
2
3
If the battery is installed, remove it.  
4
Align the metal contacts on the battery  
with the contacts of the battery  
compartment, and then press the  
battery into place.  
Slide your finger under the top of the  
battery (nearest the camera lens) and lift  
up.  
Hold the SIM card with its metal  
contacts facedown and its notch aligned  
with the notch of the cutout in the  
compartment, and slide the SIM card  
into the cutout.  
1
1
2
2
1
2
Battery contacts  
Smartphone contacts  
1
2
Card notch  
Compartment notch  
5
Slide the back panel back into place.  
Your smartphone screen turns on. It  
takes a few minutes for your  
smartphone to prepare for setup—you'll  
see the Palm® logo and a blank  
I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y  
20  
   
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Windows Mobile screen. You are ready  
to begin setup when text appears  
prompting you to tap the screen.  
Charging the battery  
Although the battery may come with a  
sufficient charge to complete the setup  
process, we recommend that after setup  
you charge your smartphone until the  
indicator light is solid green to give it a full  
charge.  
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on after  
you insert the battery, you need to connect it  
to the USB AC charger to charge it (see  
Charging the battery). If it still doesn’t start,  
perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft  
reset).  
See Maximizing battery life for tips on  
making your battery’s power last longer.  
6
7
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
finish the installation. If prompted, tap  
Reboot to complete setup.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure the  
battery is correctly inserted in your  
smartphone.  
If your SIM card is not already activated,  
follow the activation steps provided by  
your wireless service provider, or  
contact your wireless service provider  
directly for assistance.  
1
If you have international adapters in your  
smartphone package, prepare the USB  
AC charger by inserting the adapter that  
fits the wall outlet you’re going to use.  
2
3
Plug the USB AC charger into a wall  
outlet.  
Connect the charger cable to the  
bottom of your smartphone.  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
21  
             
S E T T I N G U P  
2
TIP You can also charge your smartphone  
battery by connecting your smartphone to  
your computer using the USB cable. Charging  
this way takes much more time than using the  
USB AC charger.  
*
When your smartphone is on (see Turning  
your smartphone on/off), the onscreen  
battery icon on the Today screen displays  
the charging status:  
Solid lightning bolt: The battery is  
being charged.  
Filled battery: The battery is fully  
charged and can be disconnected  
from the charging source.  
Partly filled battery: The shading  
indicates approximately how  
much power the battery has.  
*
Indicator light  
4
Check the indicator light to confirm that  
your smartphone is being charged.  
Exclamation point: Charge the  
battery immediately.  
Solid red: Your smartphone is being  
charged.  
Solid green: Your smartphone is fully  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If the battery is low, the  
charged.  
indicator light flashes red.  
TIP Tap the battery icon to see how much  
power the battery has.  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
22  
               
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Turn off the Wi-Fi feature (see Turning  
default option to connect only when the  
Wi-Fi button is pressed, or adjust Power  
Save Mode to maximize the battery  
*
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re  
not using it (see Entering basic  
Turn off the option to receive beamed  
information if you’re not using it (see  
*
Battery icon  
TIP To go to the Today screen so you can view  
the battery icon, press End if you are not on a  
phone call. If you’re on a call, press Start and  
select Today.  
Set your screen to turn off automatically  
after a shorter period of inactivity (see  
As with any mobile phone, if you are in  
an area with no wireless coverage, your  
smartphone nevertheless continues to  
search for a signal, which consumes  
power. Turn off your phone if you are  
your phone off). You can forward calls to  
a different number or let all calls be  
calls).  
Maximizing battery life  
Battery life depends on how you use your  
smartphone. You can maximize the life of  
your battery by following a few easy  
guidelines:  
If you set up an email account in the  
Messaging application, set the interval  
to automatically download email to  
every two hours or less frequently (see  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
23  
                     
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Turn off the voice command feature if  
Turn down the screen brightness (see  
If you synchronize with your corporate  
Exchange server using Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync®, increase the  
time interval between automatic  
synchronizations (see Setting the  
2
3
Press Center  
for more info).  
to turn off Keyguard  
Keep your battery away from direct  
sunlight and other sources of heat.  
Temperatures over 50 degrees Celsius  
(120 degrees Fahrenheit) can  
Use the number keys to enter the  
number you want to call.  
permanently reduce the capacity and  
life span of any lithium-ion battery.  
Making your first call  
1
Press End  
to display your Today  
screen.  
4
5
Press Phone/Send  
to dial.  
Press End to end the call.  
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L  
24  
             
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Adjusting call volume  
4
Look for your phone number directly  
below the title bar.  
When you’re on a call, press the Volume  
button on the side of your smartphone to  
adjust the call volume.  
*
*
*
Look here for your phone number  
5
Press OK  
.
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear on  
the Phone Settings screen, your network has  
not yet sent the number to the SIM card (this  
does not affect SIM card functionality). Turn  
your phone off, wait a few hours, and then  
turn on your phone and repeat these steps. If  
your phone number still does not appear,  
contact your wireless service provider for  
assistance.  
*
Volume  
What’s my number?  
1
Make sure your phone is on (see  
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select SIM Manager  
.
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L  
25  
       
S E T T I N G U P  
2
Using the My Treo  
application  
Setting up  
synchronization  
Use the My Treo application to register  
your smartphone and access the User  
Guide and online support. My Treo also  
provides an alternate starting point for  
setting up an email account, a Bluetooth®  
connection, or a Wi-Fi connection, and for  
launching the Quick Tour.  
After you’ve finished setting up your  
smartphone, we recommend that you set  
up a synchronization method to get the  
most out of your smartphone.  
Synchronizing means that information that  
you enter or update in one place—your  
smartphone, your computer, or your  
corporate server—is automatically updated  
Press Start  
and select My Treo.  
U S I N G T H E M Y T R E O A P P L I C A T I O N  
26  
             
CHAPTER  
3
Moving around on your  
smartphone  
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you  
figured out the streets? Learning to move around on your  
Palm® TreoPro smartphone is a similar experience. Most  
applications that work on your smartphone use the same set of  
controls. So once you learn how to use these controls, you’ll be  
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.  
Benefits  
Quickly move around and  
complete tasks in applications  
using one thumb on the 5-way  
navigator  
Access extra features with menus  
Find and open applications quickly  
27  
   
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
Navigating around  
the screen  
1
5
4
2
To navigate around the smartphone screen,  
you can use the 5-way navigator or you can  
tap items on the screen with the stylus. As  
you become familiar with your  
3
smartphone, you’ll find your own favorite  
way to scroll, highlight, and select items.  
1
2
3
4
5
Up  
Right  
Down  
Left  
Using the 5-way, press Right , Left  
,
Up , or Down  
screen. Press Center  
select items.  
to move around the  
to highlight and  
Center  
(flashes when you have voicemail)  
Scrolling through screens  
TIP Some third-party applications may not  
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must  
use the stylus instead.  
As on a computer, on your smartphone you  
scroll to move from field to field or page to  
page, or in some cases to highlight an item  
or option in a list. There are several  
methods of scrolling:  
DID YOU KNOW Custom navigation features  
?
are available when you browse the web using  
Internet Explorer Mobile (see Viewing a web  
page).  
Press the 5-way on the front of your  
smartphone. Press Right , Left  
,
TIP The arrow icons used in this guide to  
indicate directions on the 5-way are different  
from the onscreen scroll arrows and the  
arrows that indicate that a list is available (see  
Up , or Down  
to move to the next  
field, button, or action in that direction.  
Press and hold Option  
pressing Up or Down  
while  
to scroll  
one screen at a time. These keys work  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
29  
                           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
just like the Page Up and Page Down  
keys on your computer keyboard.  
When inside a list, press and hold  
Up or Down to rapidly scroll  
through the list.  
Tap an onscreen scroll arrow.  
TIP Can’t find the Option key? See Using the  
1
Press and hold Option  
while  
pressing Left or Right to jump to  
the top or bottom of the current  
document or entry.  
2
3
TIP When you are using applications such as  
Messaging, Internet Explorer Mobile, and  
Word Mobile, press and hold Option while  
pressing Left or Right on the 5-way to  
automatically go to the top and bottom of a  
screen.  
1
2
3
Scroll arrows  
Scroll bar with slider  
Scroll arrows  
When viewing a screen with tabs, such  
as when adding a contact, press  
Tap and drag the slider of an onscreen  
scroll bar.  
Down  
to scroll to the tabs, and then  
press Left or Right to move  
between tabs.  
Closing screens  
When inside a text field, press Right  
or Left to move to the next character,  
To accept the information you entered on a  
screen and to return to the previous  
screen—or to return to the previous screen  
and press Up  
or Down  
to move  
between lines.  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
30  
                     
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
without making any changes—do one of  
the following:  
TIP The best way to learn to use the 5-way is  
to experiment. Press the 5-way buttons, and  
as you do, follow the movement of the  
highlight around the screen. The behavior of  
the 5-way varies slightly in each application.  
Press OK  
.
Use the stylus to tap  
or  
in the  
upper-right corner of the screen. These  
buttons are not accessible using the  
5-way.  
The highlight can take one of two forms,  
depending on what is highlighted:  
When you close a screen, the application  
continues running in the background.  
Border: This rectangular border highlights  
items such as an onscreen button (such as  
OK, Dismiss, or Hide), a check box, an  
option, or a web link.  
TIP To close an app—as opposed to just a  
screen—press and hold OK or tap and hold  
OK on the screen (see Opening and closing  
TIP Can’t find the stylus? It slides out from the  
lower-left corner on the back of your  
smartphone.  
Light text on a dark background: This  
highlights items such as a phone number,  
an email address, text, or an item in a list.  
Highlighting and selecting items  
On most screens, one item—a button, a  
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by  
default. The highlight identifies which item  
is affected by your next action. Use the  
5-way to move the highlight from one item  
to another before opening or selecting it.  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
31  
                   
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
After highlighting an item with the 5-way,  
you can select or activate it by pressing  
performs a specific action, such as New or  
Edit. In some contexts, these keys may do  
nothing at all.  
Center  
or by tapping the item with the  
stylus.  
Highlighting text  
1
2
You can use the stylus to highlight text on  
the screen. Tap and drag the stylus across  
the text you want to highlight. To highlight  
a word, double-tap it. To highlight a  
paragraph, triple-tap it.  
TIP When text is highlighted, you can press  
Backspace to delete the highlighted text.  
Using the softkeys  
1
2
Left softkey: Press anywhere in this area to  
perform the task shown.  
Right softkey: Works the same way.  
The left and right softkeys give you quick  
access to tasks that you can do on the  
current screen. The task a softkey does  
varies from application to application and  
from screen to screen. You activate the  
task by tapping the softkey with the stylus  
or pressing it with your finger.  
Selecting menu items  
In many applications, a menu provides  
access to additional features. The menu is  
hidden until you press Menu (right softkey).  
To get the most out of your smartphone,  
its a good idea to familiarize yourself with  
the additional features available through  
the menus in various applications.  
The softkey is simply the name of the task  
on the screen. Softkeys appear in the  
lower-left and lower-right corners of the  
screen. In most cases the right softkey  
opens a menu, and the left softkey  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
32  
                   
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
1
Press Menu (right softkey) to display an  
application’s menu.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can select most menu  
items by pressing a key on the keyboard. To  
quickly access a menu item, press Menu  
(right softkey) followed by the underlined letter  
in the menu items name.  
Selecting options in a shortcut menu  
Most applications also provide access to  
context-sensitive shortcut menus—similar  
to the right-click menus on a Windows  
computer. The shortcut menu options vary  
based on the highlighted selection.  
2
3
Press Up  
menu item.  
or Down  
to highlight a  
1
Highlight the item whose shortcut  
menu you want to see.  
If an arrow appears to the right of a  
menu item, press Center or  
Right to display a submenu of  
2
Press and hold Center  
to open the  
shortcut menu.  
additional options for that item, and  
then press Up  
or Down  
to  
highlight a submenu item. To return to  
the main menu without making a  
selection, press Left  
.
4
Press Center to select the menu  
item, or press Left or Menu (right  
softkey) to close the menu and cancel  
your selection.  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
33  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
TIP You can also tap and hold the stylus on an  
item to open the shortcut menu.  
3
4
Press Up  
menu item.  
or Down  
to highlight a  
Press Center  
to select the menu  
item, or press Left to cancel your  
selection.  
Selecting options in a list  
To select from a list, do any of the  
following:  
Lists enable you to select from a range of  
options. You can identify whether a list is  
available when you select a field. If a  
rectangle appears around the field along  
with a downward-pointing arrow, a list is  
available. Lists are different from the  
menus described earlier in this section.  
Use the 5-way to highlight the field, and  
then press Center to display the  
items in the list. Press Up or  
Down to highlight the item you  
want, and then press Center  
make your selection.  
to  
Use your stylus to tap the arrow, and  
then tap the item in the list.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you highlight a field and  
don't see the downward-pointing arrow, press  
Center on the 5-way. If you see a field with a  
downward-pointing arrow but no rectangle,  
tap the arrow with the stylus to display the  
list.  
N A V I G A T I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
34  
                 
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
10 Backspace  
Press Left to exit the list and cancel your  
11 Return  
12 Shift  
13 Alt  
selection.  
Using the keyboard  
Understanding the keyboard backlight  
Your smartphone includes a keyboard  
backlight for low light conditions. The  
keyboard backlight activates automatically  
when the screen turns on. The backlight  
dims when the screen dims, and it turns  
off automatically when the screen turns off  
or when you are on a call or playing music  
in the background for longer than the time  
specified in Backlight Settings. You can set  
different time intervals depending on  
whether the smartphone is operating on  
battery power or is connected to an  
external power source. The backlight also  
turns off when an application’s  
1
2
3
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Start  
Phone/Send  
Calendar  
Option  
Shift/Search  
Space  
OK  
End  
Messaging  
power-saving features turn it off.  
TIP You can change the backlight shut-off  
interval. Press Start and select Settings.  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Backlight. Set the time interval on the Battery  
power tab and on the External power tab.  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
35  
               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters Entering numbers, punctuation, and  
symbols  
By default, the first letter of each sentence  
or field is capitalized and the remaining text Numbers, punctuation, and symbols  
you enter is lowercase. To enter other  
uppercase letters, do one of the following:  
appear above the letters on the keys. To  
enter these characters, do one of the  
following:  
Press Shift (  
a letter. You don’t need to press and  
hold Shift while entering a letter.  
or  
) and then enter  
1
2
Press Shift (  
or  
) twice to turn on  
Caps Lock and then enter a series of  
letters. When Caps Lock is on, this  
symbol appears at the bottom of the  
screen: . To turn off Caps Lock, press  
1
2
Symbol  
Letter  
Press Option  
and then press the key  
Shift (  
or  
) again.  
of the desired character. You don’t need  
to hold Option while pressing the key.  
TIP You can turn off the first-letter  
capitalization setting (see Setting input  
options).  
Press Option  
twice to turn on  
Option Lock and then press the  
desired keys to enter a series of  
characters. When Option Lock is on,  
this symbol appears at the bottom of  
the screen: . To turn off Option Lock,  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can also use the onscreen  
keyboard to enter letters, numbers, and other  
characters in applications that support this  
feature. Tap the keyboard icon in the center at  
the bottom of any screen where it appears.  
After opening the keyboard, you can set  
various input options by tapping the arrow to  
the right of the keyboard icon.  
press Option  
again.  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
36  
                               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
Entering passwords  
1
2
Press Alt  
character list.  
to display the alternate  
You can’t see your password as you enter  
it, so be careful. Be sure Caps Lock and  
Option Lock are not on unless you need  
them. For information on how to enter  
Narrow the list by pressing the key that  
corresponds to the character you want.  
For example, to enter an é, press e. See  
the table below for a list of  
corresponding characters.  
3
4
Press Up  
the desired character.  
Press Center to insert the character.  
or Down  
to highlight  
Entering other symbols and accented  
characters  
You can enter symbols and accented  
characters that don't appear on the keys by  
using the alternate characters list.  
TIP Some symbols, such as an underscore (_),  
do not correspond to a letter key. To enter  
these symbols, press Alt by itself and then  
select the symbol from the list.  
TIP The alternate characters are grouped  
according to their similarity to the  
Symbols and accented characters  
corresponding key. For example, the alternate  
character available for the R key is ®, and for  
the T key is ™. If you press the wrong key,  
press Backspace to return to the full list of  
alternate characters. You can then press  
another key.  
Press Alt  
to select…  
and press…  
a
á à ä â ã å æ  
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ  
ß
A
b or B  
c
ç ¢ ©  
C
e
Ç ¢ ©  
é è ë ê  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
37  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
Press Alt  
to select…  
Press Alt  
to select…  
and press…  
and press…  
E
É È Ë Ê  
0
°
f or F  
ƒ
1 ( + E)  
2 ( + R)  
3 ( + T)  
! ( + J)  
$ ( + H)  
; ( + K)  
? ( + N)  
1 ¼ ½  
i
í ì ï î  
2
I
Í Ì Ï Î  
3 ¾  
l or L  
£
¡
n
ñ
£ ¥ ¢  
: :-) :-( ;-)  
¿
N
Ñ
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ  
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ  
Press Alt  
characters:  
: _ • % = ÷ ^ $  
° ~ \ Ø µ |  
by itself to select these  
p or P  
r or R  
®
£ ¥ ¢ $ [ ] { } < > « » © ®  
s
ß š  
S
ß Š  
t or T  
u
ú ù ü û  
Ú Ù Ü Û  
x ¤  
U
x or X  
y
ý ÿ  
Y
Ý Ÿ  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
38  
 
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
TIP With the Start menu open, press the letter  
underlined in the applications name to open  
the app. For example, press H to open Help.  
Opening and closing  
applications  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can open apps by pressing  
and holding Option and then pressing Phone/  
Send, Start, OK, Calendar, or Messaging.  
You can change which app a button  
Opening applications on the Start menu  
1
2
Press Start  
menu.  
to open the Start  
combination opens (see Reassigning buttons).  
Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the  
application you want to use. To open a  
recently used application, highlight its  
icon at the top of the Start menu.  
Opening applications in Programs  
1
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
3
Press Center  
highlighted application.  
to open the  
2
Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the  
application you want to use.  
TIP In Programs, press a letter to jump to the  
first app that begins with that letter. For  
example, press C to jump to Calculator, press  
C again to jump to Camera, and so on.  
O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
39  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
3
4
Press Center  
highlighted application.  
to open the  
Closing applications  
Press OK  
to remove the current  
(Optional) Press OK  
to return to  
application from the screen.  
Programs and open another application.  
The current application continues to run  
in the background.  
Applications that you open stay open in the  
background even after you press OK to  
remove them. If you want to stop them,  
you must do it manually. That’s usually not  
necessary; but if you’re concerned about  
power usage, stop some or all applications.  
Switching among open applications  
1
2
Go to your Today screen.  
Tap the running programs  
icon in  
1
Press and hold OK  
to open Task  
the upper-right corner to open the Quick  
Menu.  
Manager.  
2
Do one of the following:  
3
Select the program you want to use.  
To close one or more individual  
applications: Check the boxes next to  
the applications and select Stop  
Selected.  
TIP You can also use the Quick Menu to close  
applications, open Task Manager, and check  
system memory.  
O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
40  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
To close all applications except the  
ones you specify: Check the boxes  
next to the applications you do not want  
to close, press Menu (right softkey),  
and select Stop All but Selected.  
TIP To remove an application from the  
Exclusive Programs list, press and hold OK to  
open Task Manager. Select the Exclusive tab,  
check the box next to the application name,  
and select Remove.  
To close all open applications: Select  
Stop All.  
Customizing the Quick Menu  
1
Press and hold OK  
to open Task  
Manager.  
TIP If an X appears in the upper-right corner of  
an application screen, you can tap and hold  
the X with the stylus to close the application.  
You can turn this feature on and off or change  
it so that simply tapping X closes an  
application. Press and hold OK to open Task  
Manager, select the Button tab and then  
select the option you want.  
2
To remove the Quick Menu from your  
Today screen, select the Button tab and  
uncheck the Enable Quick Menu on  
Today screen box.  
Defining exclusive programs  
You can mark an application as exclusive.  
An exclusive application remains open  
even if you stop individual or all  
applications.  
1
2
3
Press and hold OK  
Manager.  
to open Task  
3
Select the Others tab and select the  
sort method for programs in the Quick  
Menu.  
On the Running tab, tap and hold the  
app name with the stylus.  
Select Add Exclusive.  
O P E N I N G A N D C L O S I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
41  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Using your Today  
screen  
1
Title bar and status info: See What are  
all those icons?  
2
Wireless service indicator: Shows  
whether the Bluetooth® technology and  
Wi-Fi features are on or off. Also  
displays your wireless service provider  
name if the phone is on.  
The Today screen lets you see your current  
appointments and messages at a glance.  
You can also make a call, search the web,  
and manage your smartphone from your  
Today screen.  
3
Quick Tour: Select to open the Quick  
Tour, which introduces you to many of  
your smartphones features.  
To access your Today screen, press  
End  
.
TIP You can remove the Quick Tour entry from  
your Today screen. Open the Quick Tour and  
select Remove Quick Tour.  
TIP Don’t press End to access the Today  
screen if you’re on a call, because that hangs  
up the call. Instead, press Start and select  
Today.  
U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N  
42  
                 
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
4
Messaging status field: Shows the  
number of unread email, text, and  
multimedia messages. Email messages  
are listed by email account. Select an  
account or select SMS\MMS to open  
the corresponding Inbox.  
7
Running programs icon: Tap to open  
the Quick Menu, which shows all open  
applications so you can quickly switch  
between or close them.  
TIP You can select a picture for your Today  
screen background and select which items  
appear in the Today screen. See Today screen  
settings for details.  
5
6
Calendar status field: Shows  
upcoming appointments. Select this  
field to open the Calendar application.  
Web search field: Enter the web  
address or keyword you want to find,  
and press Center  
or Return  
to  
view a list of search results (data  
services connection required).  
U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N  
43  
           
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
3
U S I N G Y O U R T O D A Y S C R E E N  
44  
CHAPTER  
4
Your phone  
The Today screen and the Phone screen are the key locations  
for making and receiving calls.  
You can creatively manage multiple calls. For example, you can  
swap between calls, send text messages to ignored calls, and  
create conference calls.  
Benefits  
Stay in touch—you choose how  
Work in other applications when  
on an active call  
45  
     
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Turning your phone on  
Turning your  
When you turn on your phone, it connects  
to a mobile network so that you can make  
and receive phone calls and use other  
wireless services (if supported by the local  
network).  
smartphone on/off  
The term smartphone refers to the device  
and its physical aspects. The term phone  
refers to the wireless feature of your Palm®  
TreoPro smartphone that enables you to  
connect to your wireless service provider’s  
network so that you can make and receive  
calls and send and receive data.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use the phone,  
you must have an active SIM card from  
your wireless service provider inserted into  
your smartphone (see Inserting the SIM  
The phone and the screen of your  
smartphone can be turned off and on  
separately. This means you can wake up  
the screen to use just the organizer  
features of your device (Calendar,  
Contacts, Tasks, Notes, and so on) without  
turning on the phone. Also, when the  
screen is turned off, the phone can be on  
and ready for you to receive phone calls or  
messages.  
To turn on your phone, press and hold  
Power  
.
When your smartphone locates a signal,  
your wireless service providers name  
appears in the upper-left of the screen and  
the signal-strength  
icon appears at the  
top of the screen.  
When you are inside a coverage area, the  
signal-strength icon has bars in it. If  
you’re outside a coverage area, no bars  
appear in the signal-strength icon.  
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N / O F F  
47  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Turning your phone off  
Press and hold Power  
Waking up the screen and turning it off  
.
Wake up the screen and leave the phone  
turned off when you want to use only the  
organizer features of your smartphone, for  
example, when you’re on a plane and want  
to look at your calendar. You can also turn  
off the screen without turning off the  
wireless features on your smartphone.  
When your phone is off, the phone-off  
icon appears at the top of the screen and  
Phone off appears in the upper-left of the  
screen. Your phone is not connected to any  
mobile network. Although you can no  
longer use the phone, you can still use  
Microsoft Office Mobile® apps and all the  
organizer features of your smartphone.  
The screen turns off automatically after a  
preset period of inactivity. You can turn  
your screen off manually by pressing and  
holding End  
Power  
displayed and you are not on a call, you also  
turn the screen off manually by pressing  
or by pressing  
. If the Today screen is  
TIP When you turn off your phone using the  
Power button, this turns off all radios on your  
smartphone, which include the phone, the  
Bluetooth® wireless technology feature, and  
the Wi-Fi feature. This is sometimes referred  
to as airplane mode or flight mode. To turn off  
the phone or other wireless radios individually,  
use Comm Manager. Select your wireless  
service provider name on your Today screen,  
or tap the signal-strength icon on any screen  
and select Comm Manager.  
End  
.
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You cannot turn the screen off  
if you are on a call.  
To turn the screen back on, press  
Power  
or any of the following buttons  
on the front of your smartphone:  
Phone/Send  
, Messaging  
, Start  
, Calendar  
, or End  
.
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N / O F F  
48  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
TIP The first time you take your smartphone  
out of the box, you need to remove the  
battery and reinsert it to wake up the screen  
Making calls  
Dialing from the Today screen  
1
2
Press End  
screen.  
to open your Today  
When the screen is off but the phone is on,  
a screen saver appears showing the date  
and time as well as the following  
indicators:  
Using the keyboard, enter a phone  
number.  
NOTE Not all wireless service providers  
support the screen saver feature.  
One or more missed calls  
One or more unread text or  
multimedia messages  
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on  
during a period of inactivity. You can also turn  
off the screen saver feature (see Optimizing  
3
Press Phone/Send  
to dial.  
NOTE You do not need to press  
Option to enter numbers, *, or #. This  
makes it easy to respond to further dialing  
instructions. When dialing short numbers,  
however, the numbers may match the  
letters of a contact name. If this occurs,  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
49  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
press Option  
lookup.  
to avoid starting a contact BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some  
contacts (see Adding a contact,) or import  
them by synchronizing (see Synchronizing  
TIP If the numbers you are entering match a  
phone number you have for a contact, the  
contact name is displayed. Select the name to  
dial the associated number (see Dialing by  
contact name for more information).  
1
2
Press End  
screen.  
to open your Today  
Using the keyboard, begin entering any  
combination of letters from the  
Dialing with a speed dial  
contacts first and/or last name. If you  
use both first- and last-name letters,  
separate them by a space. You can type  
letters from the last name first.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some speed  
number).  
1
2
Press End  
screen.  
to open your Today  
Press and hold the key or keys that you  
assigned as a speed dial to the contact  
number you want to call. If you have  
assigned a two-digit speed dial to this  
number, press the first key and then  
press and hold the second key.  
Dialing by contact name  
To delete letters when correcting a  
misspelled name, press Backspace  
.
You can look up contacts quickly by  
entering just a few letters of a contact’s  
name directly from your Today screen.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
50  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Dialing using the onscreen keypad  
TIP If you press E, R, or any other key that  
displays both a letter and a number, you see  
onscreen not only matching names but the  
number as well. The numbers do not affect  
the process for dialing by contact name.  
The onscreen keypad is useful when you  
need to dial numbers that are expressed as  
letters and when you need large numbers  
that you can tap with your finger or the  
stylus.  
3
Matching contacts are displayed with a  
code for the type of number you last  
entered for that contact: “w” for work,  
“m” for mobile, and so on.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can paste numbers  
directly into the keypad. Copy a number from  
another application, switch to keypad, press  
Menu (right softkey), and then select Paste to  
paste the number.  
If the contact name appears with the  
code for the number you want to dial,  
highlight the name and press Phone/  
1
2
Press Phone/Send  
and then press  
Send  
to dial the number.  
Keypad (left softkey).  
If you want to dial a different number  
for a displayed contact, highlight the  
contact name and press Left or  
Right until the code you want  
Tap the onscreen keypad to enter the  
number.  
appears. Press Phone/Send  
to  
dial the number associated with the  
code.  
3
Press Phone/Send  
to dial.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
51  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Redialing a recently called number  
To dial the last number you called: Press  
Phone/Send twice.  
To select from your most recently dialed  
numbers: Press Phone/Send  
off, you don't have to turn it on. You don't  
have to press Option  
.
If you lock your smartphone and select  
Simple PIN as the password type, dial the  
emergency number by entering the  
,
number in the password field and pressing  
highlight the number or contact name you  
want to call, and then press Phone/  
Phone/Send  
.
Send  
to dial.  
If you select Strong alphanumeric as the  
password type, however, you must press  
Option  
twice before entering the  
number in the password field. See Locking  
Dialing from a web page or message  
Your smartphone recognizes most phone  
numbers that appear in web pages or in  
messages (text, email, or multimedia).  
1
Use the 5-way to highlight the phone  
number you want to dial in the web  
page or message.  
TIP You can manage information about a  
recently called number in several ways (see  
2
3
Verify or edit the number.  
Press Phone/Send  
to dial.  
Dialing your national emergency number  
You can dial your national emergency  
number (such as 911, 112, or 999) anytime.  
Just wake up the screen and enter the  
emergency number. If the phone is turned  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
52  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
If music is playing when a call arrives, the  
TIP If you can’t dial a phone number directly  
from a web page or a message, highlight the  
number, select Edit (right softkey), and then  
select Copy. Open the Keypad, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select Paste. Press  
Phone/Send to dial.  
smartphone rings softly. You can answer  
the phone as you normally would. The  
audio pauses during your call.  
To answer a call, do one of the following  
Press Accept (left softkey).  
Press Phone/Send  
TIP Select a phone number in a message,  
press Menu (right softkey), and then press  
Save to Contacts to create a new contact  
containing the highlighted information or edit  
an existing contact to include the highlighted  
information.  
.
If the headset is attached, press the  
headset button.  
To ignore a call and send it to voicemail, do  
one of the following:  
Press Ignore (right softkey).  
Receiving calls  
Press End  
.
If you want to answer calls, your phone  
must be on. This is different from having  
only the screen turned on (see Turning your  
phone on). When your phone is off, your  
calls go to voicemail.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can set your phone to  
automatically answer calls (see Setting your  
To silence the ringer while your  
smartphone is ringing, do one of the  
following:  
TIP See a picture of the person calling you!  
Learn how to assign a caller ID picture in  
To immediately silence all system  
sounds including the ringer, slide the  
Ringer switch to Sound Off . All  
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S  
53  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
sounds remain off until you slide the  
Ringer switch back to Sound On  
Listening to voicemail from the Today  
screen  
.
Press the Volume button.  
Press any letter key. (Don’t press Phone/  
Send  
OK  
, End  
, or the 5-way.)  
, Alt , Start  
,
When you silence the ringer, you can either  
answer the call or let it ring through to  
voicemail.  
Using voicemail  
When you have unretrieved voicemail  
messages, a voicemail  
the top of your screen and Center  
the 5-way flashes.  
icon appears at  
Setting up voicemail  
on  
1
2
Press End  
.
Press and hold 1  
on the keyboard to  
1
2
3
4
Press End  
Press and hold 1  
Enter your voicemail password.  
.
dial your wireless service providers  
voicemail system.  
.
3
Follow the voice prompts to set up your  
voicemail.  
Follow the voice prompts to listen to  
your messages.  
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L  
54  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
DID YOU KNOW When the voicemail icon  
appears at the top of the screen, you can tap  
this icon to retrieve your voicemail.  
?
What can I do during  
a call?  
TIP You can turn off the Center button  
voicemail notification. Press Start and select  
Settings. On the Personal tab, select Phone.  
Select the Beacon tab and uncheck the option  
to illuminate Center when voicemail arrives.  
Your smartphone offers many advanced  
telephone features, including call waiting,  
six-way conferencing, and call forwarding.  
These features depend on your service  
plan. Contact your wireless service  
provider for more information.  
Retrieving messages from a voicemail  
notification  
When you make or receive a call, info  
about the call appears on your Phone  
screen. If you move away from the Phone  
NOTE Not all service plans support  
voicemail notification. Check with your  
wireless service provider for more  
information.  
screen, press OK  
until you return  
there.  
When you have a new voicemail message,  
a notification screen appears.  
TIP From the Today screen, you can also return  
to the Phone screen by pressing Call Status  
(left softkey).  
To hear your message now, press  
Voicemail (left softkey).  
To retrieve your message later, press  
Dismiss (right softkey).  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
55  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
You can do any of the following on the  
Phone screen:  
To lock the screen during a call so you  
don’t accidentally activate any onscreen  
buttons or other items: Select Lock. To  
unlock the screen select Unlock.  
2
1
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can set the screen to be  
locked by default when you are on a call (see  
TIP When a call lasts longer than one minute,  
the screen dims. After two minutes, it dims  
more. Press any key except End to light up the  
screen.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can send and receive text  
1
2
Callers name and/or number  
Current duration of call  
messages during a call. This is a great way to  
stay connected with colleagues during a long  
call.  
Use the speakerphone: Select Speaker  
On. To turn off the speakerphone, select  
Speaker Off.  
Ending a call  
Do one of the following:  
Mute the microphone so you can’t be  
heard: Select Mute. To unmute the  
microphone, select Unmute.  
Press End  
.
Press the headset button (if the headset  
is attached and has a button on it).  
Some headsets do not have a button.  
Put the call on hold: Select Hold. To take  
the call off hold, select Unhold.  
Switching applications during a call  
Press Start and select the application.  
This is easiest when using the  
speakerphone or a headset.  
Jot down a note about your call: Select  
Note. To return to the Phone screen after  
you have finished writing the note, press  
OK  
.
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
56  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
You can open the Contacts application  
directly from the Phone screen by  
selecting Contacts.  
Saving phone numbers  
After you hang up a call, you can add the  
number of the person you were talking  
with to Contacts if its not already in your  
list. If an incoming call uses caller ID  
blocking, you cannot save the number.  
From any application, press Phone/  
Send  
To go to your Today screen, press  
Start and select Today.  
to return to your Phone screen.  
You can use many other applications on  
your smartphone, including the organizer  
and text message features, while holding a  
phone conversation. You cannot, however,  
make some data connections during an  
active call while connected to a GPRS  
network. If you’re connected to a GPRS  
network, you cannot browse the web or  
send and receive email or MMS messages  
while on a voice call. If you’re connected to  
a UMTS (3G or HSDPA) network, you can  
perform simultaneous voice and data  
functions. How can you tell which kind of  
1
2
On the prompt that appears after you  
hang up the call, press Yes (left softkey).  
Do one of the following:  
Create a new contact: Select <New  
Contact>.  
Add this number to an existing  
contact: Select the contact name.  
Decline adding the number: Press  
Cancel (right softkey).  
NOTE Some wireless service providers do  
not support simultaneous voice and data  
functions over an HSDPA network. Check  
with your wireless service provider for  
information.  
TIP You can turn off the Save to Contacts  
prompt. When the prompt appears, select Do  
not ask again.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
57  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
If you don’t add a number right away, follow Answering a second call (call waiting)  
these steps to add it later:  
When you’re on a call and you receive a  
second call, the call waiting notification  
appears if you have chosen to be notified  
can do either of the following:  
1
2
3
Press Phone/Send  
.
Highlight the number you want to save.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Save to Contacts.  
Send the new call to voicemail: Press  
Ignore (right softkey).  
4
Do one of the following:  
Create a new contact: Select <New  
Contact>.  
Place the current call on hold and  
answer the new call: Press Accept (left  
Add this number to an existing  
contact: Select the contact name.  
softkey) or press Phone/Send  
.
Working with two active calls  
Decline adding the number: Press  
Cancel (right softkey).  
When two calls are active, your Phone  
screen includes two call status sections,  
each representing one of the calls. You can  
do either of the following:  
Making a second call  
You can make a second call while your first  
call is still active:  
1
Place your first call on hold by selecting  
Hold.  
2
3
Press Smartdial (left softkey).  
Dial the second number you want to  
call. Or, if the number appears on the  
recent calls list, highlight the number.  
4
Press Phone/Send  
.
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
58  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Select Swap to move between callers  
by placing the current active call on hold  
and talking on the other line.  
Make the calls a conference call. See  
Making a conference call  
IMPORTANT You can join up to 5 calls into  
a 6-way conference call. The number of  
calls you can join in conference depends on  
your service plan. Additional charges may  
apply, and minutes in your mobile account  
may be deducted for each call. Please  
contact your wireless service provider for  
more information.  
Make more calls and add them to the  
conference call. The number of calls you  
can add to the conference depends on  
your service plan.  
3
(Optional) Extract a caller from the  
conference call to talk with them  
privately by pressing Menu (right  
softkey), selecting Private, and then  
selecting the phone number. The  
extracted call becomes the active call.  
1
Answer a second call (see Answering a  
second call (call waiting)), or put the first  
call on hold and make a second call (see  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Conference. This joins the two calls  
with you in a conference.  
Swap between the conference call and  
the private call by selecting Swap. To  
return the private call to the conference,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Conference.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
59  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
When all calls are forwarded, the call  
forwarding icon appears in the  
upper-right corner of the Phone screen.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone.  
On the Services tab, highlight Call  
Forwarding.  
4
5
Select Get Settings.  
Specify your call forwarding settings.  
Some of the settings may already be set  
by your wireless service provider to  
send your calls to voicemail.  
4
When you’re done, do one of the  
following:  
If you have not extracted a call, press  
End  
If you have extracted a call, press  
End twice to hang up all calls or  
once to hang up all calls.  
press End  
once to hang up the  
active call.  
Forwarding calls  
You can forward calls to another phone  
number. Please check with your wireless  
service provider about availability and  
pricing of forwarded calls; additional  
charges may apply.  
6
Press OK  
.
W H A T C A N  
I
D O D U R I N G  
A
C A L L ?  
60  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Send a text message to the number:  
Working with called  
numbers  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Send Text Message. Enter the  
message text and press Send (left  
softkey).  
You can redial a number you’ve recently  
number). You can also view call details,  
send a text message to a number, save a  
number to your contact list, and more.  
Create a note containing the phone  
number: Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Save to Notes.  
View more details about the number:  
Select the number to open the call. The  
first entry shows the length of your last  
call with this number. Use the other  
entries to call the number or send a text  
message.  
Working with recently called numbers  
1
Press Phone/Send  
.
TIP On the recent calls list, outgoing calls are  
designated by a right-pointing green arrow,  
and incoming calls are designated by a  
left-pointing yellow arrow. Missed calls are  
designated by a red exclamation point.  
TIP To filter the displayed information, press  
Menu (right softkey), select View, and then  
select whether you want to view all calls and  
contacts, all calls only, or speed dials only.  
2
Highlight the number you want and do  
one or more of the following:  
Save the phone number to a contact:  
W O R K I N G W I T H C A L L E D N U M B E R S  
61  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
3
With the call open, do either of the  
following:  
View all calls with this number,  
including their duration: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select View All  
Calls. If you select this option, you can  
delete all calls from this number by  
pressing Menu (right softkey) and  
selecting Delete All Calls.  
Delete the call from the recent calls  
list: Press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Delete Call. Select Yes to  
confirm the deletion.  
TIP You can also open the Call History list  
when you are on a call or when the Keypad is  
displayed.  
3
To filter the Call History list, select one  
of the following buttons:  
Viewing all of your calls  
Your Call History list contains the number  
for all incoming and outgoing calls.  
Display outgoing calls.  
1
2
Press Phone/Send  
.
Display incoming calls.  
Display missed calls.  
Display all calls.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Call History.  
W O R K I N G W I T H C A L L E D N U M B E R S  
62  
       
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
4
Highlight the number you want and do  
one or more of the following:  
Assigning a speed  
dial to a phone  
number  
Save the phone number to a contact:  
View a note associated with the  
phone number: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select View Note.  
You can assign a speed dial to any contact  
phone number. You can assign up to 99  
speed dials.  
Delete the call from the list: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Delete.  
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you can  
assign a speed dial to a contact phone  
number, you must create some contacts  
(see Adding a contact) or import them by  
Send a text message to the number:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Send Text Message. Enter the  
message text and press Send (left  
softkey).  
1
2
3
4
From your Today screen, press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
Delete the entire Call History List:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete All Calls. Select Yes to confirm  
the deletion.  
Select the contact to whom you want to  
assign a speed dial.  
Highlight the phone number to which  
you want to assign a speed dial.  
View timers for your most recent  
calls and for all calls: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Call Timers.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Add to Speed Dial.  
TIP To reset all call timers to zero, select  
Reset.  
A S S I G N I N G  
A
S P E E D D I A L T O  
A
P H O N E N U M B E R  
63  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
DID YOU KNOW You cannot assign 0 (zero) or 1  
?
as a speed dial. The number 0 is reserved for  
entering the + symbol in a phone number, and  
the number 1 is reserved for dialing your  
voicemail system.  
TIP You can also assign a speed dial to a  
contact from the recent calls list. Press  
Phone/Send to open the list, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select Speed Dial. Press  
Menu (right softkey), select New, and then  
select the contact to whom you want to  
assign a speed dial.  
5
6
If you want to change the name for this  
speed dial, select the Name list and  
enter a new name.  
To view a list of all your speed dials, press  
Select the Location list, and then select  
the speed dial you want to assign to this  
Phone/Send  
, press Menu (right  
softkey), and select Speed Dial.  
phone number. Press Up  
Down to scroll the list of available  
speed dials.  
or  
A S S I G N I N G  
A
S P E E D D I A L T O  
A
P H O N E N U M B E R  
64  
     
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
You have more than one of the  
conditions listed above. Tap the  
icon to view the notifications.  
What are all those  
icons?  
Your phone is on. The bars  
display the signal strength.  
The stronger the signal, the  
more bars that appear. If you are  
outside a coverage area, no bars  
appear.  
You can monitor the status of several items  
using icons at the top of your Today screen  
or your Phone screen:  
You missed an incoming call.  
Your phone is off.  
You have a voicemail message.  
A new multimedia message is  
being downloaded to your  
smartphone.  
The SIM card is locked. You need  
to enter a PIN or a PUK to unlock  
the SIM card (see Locking the  
A multimedia message could not  
be downloaded.  
A voice call is in progress.  
You have a new multimedia  
message.  
The speakerphone is on.  
You have a new text message.  
A call is on hold.  
NOTE You can turn on a setting  
to have a notification icon  
appear when you have a new  
The microphone is muted.  
The screen is locked.  
All calls are being forwarded.  
No SIM card is inserted or  
software is unable to recognize  
the SIM.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
65  
                                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
You are in a roaming coverage  
area. Additional fees may apply  
for calls or data transmission.  
Wireless Your phone is on. When you turn  
service off your phone, Phone Off  
provider appears instead.  
name  
Your smartphones Wi-Fi feature  
is turned on, but you are not  
connected to a Wi-Fi network.  
A call is in progress and your  
smartphone is connected to a  
Bluetooth headset or car kit.  
Your smartphone is connected to  
a Wi-Fi network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data.  
You have a reminder. If the  
reminder is not displayed on your  
Today screen, tap the icon to  
open the reminder.  
Your smartphone is connected to  
a Wi-Fi network and you are  
actively transmitting data.  
You have an alert from Microsoft.  
If the alert is not displayed on  
your Today screen, tap the icon  
to open the alert.  
ActiveSync synchronization is in  
progress.  
Your smartphone is connected to  
a computer or network, or  
Windows Mobile Device Center  
synchronization is in progress.  
Your GPS satellite data has  
Your phone is connected to a 3G  
UMTS network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
A data connection is not available  
or your phone is off.  
Your smartphones battery is low.  
Your smartphones battery is  
being charged.  
Your phone is on and a 3G UMTS  
data connection is active. You  
can make and receive calls and  
transmit data simultaneously.  
Your smartphone is connected to  
a power outlet and the battery is  
fully charged.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
66  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Your phone is connected to a  
HSDPA UMTS network, but you  
are not actively transmitting data.  
You can still make or receive  
calls.  
Your phone is on and an EDGE  
data connection is active. You  
can still make or receive calls,  
but the data transmission is  
automatically interrupted.  
Your phone is connected to a  
GPRS network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
NOTE In most cases, when your  
phone is connected to a UMTS  
network (either 3G or HSDPA)  
but you are not actively  
transmitting data, the 3G icon  
appears. The H icon may appear  
when your phone is connected  
to a HSDPA UMTS network, but  
you are not actively transmitting  
data.  
Your phone is on and a GPRS  
data connection is active. You  
can still make or receive calls,  
but the data transmission is  
automatically interrupted.  
Your phone is on and an HSDPA  
UMTS data connection is active.  
You can make and receive calls  
and transmit data  
simultaneously.  
Your phone is connected to an  
EDGE network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
67  
       
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Using a wired headset  
Using a phone  
headset  
You can connect a phone headset for  
hands-free operation. You can use either  
the headset that came with your  
smartphone or a compatible third-party  
headset.  
2
3
IMPORTANT If driving while using a  
smartphone is permitted in your area, we  
recommend using a headset or hands-free  
car kit (both sold separately). However, be  
aware that use of a headset that covers  
both ears impairs your ability to hear other  
sounds. Use of such a headset while  
operating a motor vehicle or riding a bicycle  
may create a serious hazard to you and/or  
others, and may be illegal. If you must use  
a stereo headset while driving, place a  
speaker in only one ear. Leave the other ear  
free to hear outside noises, and do so only  
if it is legal and you can do so safely.  
1
1
2
3
Speakers  
Microphone  
Headset button  
The headset button performs different  
actions depending on whats happening on  
the phone. Press the headset button once  
to perform any of the following tasks:  
Answer an incoming call  
Respond to call waiting  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
68  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Hang up a single active call or all calls on After you set up a connection with a  
a conference call if there is no extracted Bluetooth headset or hands-free car kit,  
call  
you can communicate with that device  
whenever it is within range and the  
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is  
turned on. The range varies greatly,  
depending on environmental factors. The  
maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet).  
Swap between calls if there is one  
active call and one call on hold  
NOTE Your smartphone works with  
headsets that have a 3.5mm connector  
(look for three colored bands on the plug).  
When in doubt, ask the third-party headset  
manufacturer if the product is compatible  
with your smartphone. If you hear a  
headset buzz or poor microphone  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you have both a compatible  
Bluetooth headset and a car kit, the one you  
connected to your smartphone last becomes  
the active device.  
performance, your headset may be  
incompatible with your smartphone.  
1
If necessary, prepare the device with  
which you want to connect to accept a  
new connection. Check the device’s  
documentation for details. Be sure to  
find out if the device has a predefined  
passkey that you need to enter on your  
smartphone in step 8.  
Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free  
device  
Your smartphone is also compatible with  
many headsets and car kits (sold  
separately) enabled with Bluetooth®  
wireless technology version 2.0 and earlier  
versions.  
2
3
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
For a list of compatible hands-free devices  
with Bluetooth wireless technology, go to  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth  
.
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
69  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
4
Select the Mode tab and check the Turn  
on Bluetooth box.  
6
Wait for your smartphone to search for  
devices and to display the device list.  
5
Select the Devices tab, and then select  
Add new device.  
7
8
Highlight the device with which you  
want to connect and press Next (right  
softkey). If the device you want does  
not appear, select Refresh.  
If prompted, enter a passkey between 1  
and 16 digits long and press Next (right  
softkey). For some headsets, the  
passkey is entered automatically. If you  
are not prompted for a passkey, skip to  
step 10.  
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices  
have a predefined passkey. If your  
hands-free device has a predefined  
passkey, you can find it in the  
documentation for that device. Other  
devices provide a screen where you enter  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
70  
   
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
a passkey that you make up. In either case, Using a Bluetooth hands-free device  
you must use the same passkey on both  
your smartphone and your hands-free  
device. We recommend that you use a  
passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to  
improve the security of your smartphone.  
The longer the passkey, the more difficult it  
is for the passkey to be deciphered.  
To learn how to set up and connect to  
Bluetooth devices, see Connecting to a  
Bluetooth® hands-free device.  
Here are tips for working with a Bluetooth  
hands-free device:  
To transfer a call from the handset to a  
Bluetooth hands-free device during a  
call, on the Phone screen, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Turn  
9
If the passkey is not predefined, enter  
the same passkey on the other  
Bluetooth device and press Finish (right  
softkey).  
Hands-free On. To transfer the call to  
the handset, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Turn Hands-free Off.  
10 (Optional) Press Advanced (right  
softkey) and make sure that the Hands  
Free box is checked. Press Save (right  
softkey).  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you’re using a Bluetooth  
hands-free device and it is within range, your  
smartphone automatically routes all calls to  
the hands-free device instead of to the  
earpiece on your smartphone.  
11 Press Done (left softkey).  
12 Press OK  
.
You can now communicate with this device  
whenever it is within range and the  
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is  
turned on. The range varies greatly,  
depending on environmental factors. The  
maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet).  
To transfer a call from a wired headset  
to a Bluetooth headset or car kit that is  
within range and with which you’ve  
previously set up a partnership  
(Bluetooth headset or car kit required,  
sold separately), unplug the wired  
headset and press the button on the  
Bluetooth headset or car kit.  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
71  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
To find out how to transfer your  
contacts from your smartphone to your  
4
Select the Event list, and then select  
the type of call for which you want to  
set the ringtone:  
Phone: Known Caller: An incoming call  
from someone in your Contacts list or  
Speed Dial list.  
Customizing phone  
settings  
Selecting ringtones and display notices  
You can set different tones for different  
types of incoming phone calls and  
notifications. You can download MP3,  
MIDI, AMR, WAV, and WMA ringtones  
directly to your smartphone (see  
page). You can also download ringtones to  
your computer and then email them to your  
phone.  
Phone: Missed call: A call you did not  
answer.  
1
2
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select Sounds &  
Notifications  
Select the Notifications tab.  
and select Settings.  
.
3
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
72  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Phone: Roaming: A call that comes in  
when you’re outside your home mobile  
network.  
7
Check the Vibrate when… boxes to  
turn the vibrate feature on/off based on  
the Ringer switch setting.  
8
9
Repeat steps 4–7 to select ringtones for  
other types of calls.  
Phone: Unknown Caller: An incoming  
call from someone identified by caller  
ID who is not in your Contacts list or  
Speed Dial list.  
Press OK  
.
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can add, preview, delete,  
Phone: Voice mail: A new voicemail.  
and send sounds on your smartphone. You  
can also set sounds for messaging  
notifications and calendar reminders. See  
5
6
If you selected Known Caller, Roaming,  
or Unknown Caller, select the ring type  
and the ringtone. Select the Play  
icon to preview the ringtone sound.  
Adjusting call and ringer volume  
If you selected Missed call or Voice  
mail, set the following options:  
Check the Play Sound box if you  
want to have a sound played when  
the event occurs.  
If you checked the Play Sound box,  
then select the sound for the selected  
type of call. You can also check the  
Repeat box to have the sound repeat.  
*
(Optional) Select the Play  
icon to  
preview the sound.  
Check the Display message on  
screen box to have a message  
displayed when the event occurs.  
*
Volume  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
73  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Call volume: While a call is in progress,  
Enabling TTY  
press Volume (on the side of your  
smartphone) to adjust the call volume.  
You can enable your smartphone for use  
with a TTY/TDD device. A TTY (also known  
as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that enables  
telephone communication for people who  
are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have  
speech or language disabilities.  
Ringer volume: When a call is not in  
progress and you are not playing music or a  
video, press Volume to adjust ringer  
volume.  
TIP To turn off the call or ringer volume  
completely, press and hold Volume until the  
minimum volume is reached. Release the  
button, wait two seconds, and then press  
Volume again.  
Your smartphone is compatible with select  
TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD  
machine, headset, or hands-free kit to your  
smartphone through the headset jack while  
in TTY/TDD mode. Please check with the  
manufacturer of your TTY device for  
connectivity information. Be sure that the  
TTY device supports digital wireless  
transmission.  
Assigning a caller ID ringtone  
1
On your Today screen, press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
2
3
Highlight the contacts name.  
NOTE Not all wireless service providers  
support the TTY feature on your  
smartphone. Check with your wireless  
service provider for information.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
4
5
6
Select Ring tone.  
Select a tone for this contact entry.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
smartphone is connected to a TTY/TDD  
device using the headset jack. When you  
enable TTY, all audio modes are disabled on  
your smartphone, including holding the  
smartphone up to your ear and listening.  
Press OK  
.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
74  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
4 Check the Answer incoming calls  
without pressing Talk after X rings  
box and select the number of rings.  
On the Personal tab, select TTY  
.
3
4
5
Check the Enable TTY support box.  
If an alert appears, press OK  
Press OK  
5
Press OK  
.
.
.
Adding contact numbers from new callers  
By default, you are prompted to add  
contact entries for numbers that are not  
already in your Contacts list. You can turn  
this feature on or off.  
Setting your phone to automatically  
answer calls  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the More tab.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
Select the Advanced tab and check or  
uncheck the Add new phone number  
to Contacts at end of call box.  
TIP On the Phone settings screen, press  
Down on the 5-way to move the highlight to  
the tab area, and then press Right until the  
More tab appears.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
75  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
4
Press OK  
.
5
6
(Optional) To change the content of the  
message, select the text in the box, and  
enter the text you want.  
Setting options for rejecting a call  
By default, when you reject an incoming  
call, the caller is sent to voicemail. You can  
change this setting so that, in addition to  
sending the caller to voicemail, a text  
message opens addressed to the caller,  
containing default text, that you can send  
right away. You can also change the default  
text of the message.  
Press OK  
.
Blocking calls  
You can block (bar) incoming or outgoing  
calls. Not all wireless service providers  
support the call barring features.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
Make sure that call barring is supported  
by your service plan. Check with your  
wireless service provider for more  
information.  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
Select the Advanced tab.  
To turn on the text message feature,  
check the Reject call with text  
message box.  
Get a call barring password from your  
wireless service provider.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
76  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
International: All outgoing international  
calls are blocked.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
On the Services tab, highlight Call  
Barring and select Get Settings.  
International except to home  
country: All outgoing international calls  
are blocked except to the country  
where the phone is based.  
4
Select the Block incoming calls list,  
and then select one of the options:  
All calls: All incoming calls are blocked.  
Off: No outgoing calls are blocked.  
When roaming: All incoming calls are  
blocked when roaming.  
6
7
Press OK  
Enter the call barring password and  
press OK  
.
.
Off: No incoming calls are blocked.  
Setting caller ID  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
On the Services tab, highlight Caller ID  
and select Get Settings.  
4
Select the appropriate option to provide  
your caller ID to Everyone or No one,  
or Only to contacts.  
5
Select the Block outgoing calls list,  
and then select one of the options:  
All calls: All outgoing calls are blocked.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
77  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
4
Select the appropriate option to receive  
a notification or not.  
5
Press OK  
.
Setting call waiting notification  
5
Press OK  
.
You can choose to be notified when you  
receive a call while you are on a call. You  
can choose to accept the call or not. See  
Changing your voicemail and text  
message service center number  
If your wireless service provider changes  
the number you call to retrieve voicemail  
messages, you can change the number on  
your smartphone. You can also change the  
number of your text message service  
center.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
On the Services tab, highlight Call  
Waiting and select Get Settings.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
On the Services tab, highlight Voice  
Mail and Text Messages and select  
Get Services.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
78  
       
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
4
Select the field for the number you want provider for more information and your  
to change, and enter the new number PIN2.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get your PIN2 from  
your wireless service provider. If you have  
entered your PIN2 incorrectly and your SIM  
card is locked, obtain your PUK2 from your  
wireless service provider.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
Select the More tab.  
Next to Fixed Dialing, select Settings.  
5
Press OK  
.
Check the Enable fixed Dialing box.  
Enabling fixed dialing  
Fixed dialing allows you to restrict your  
outgoing calls and messages to selected  
phone numbers included in your fixed  
dialing list. After the service is activated,  
you can call and send messages only to the  
phone numbers from the list.  
The list is protected by a PIN2 code. If you  
enter an incorrect PIN2 more times than  
allowed by your wireless service provider,  
the SIM card locks. After the SIM card  
locks, you need the PUK2 to unlock the  
SIM card. Contact your wireless service  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
79  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
6
Enter your PIN2 and press Done (left  
4
Select the Select your network type  
list, and then select one of the  
following:  
softkey). If your SIM card is locked,  
enter your PUK2 and press Done (left  
softkey).  
7
8
Press Menu (right softkey) to add,  
delete, or edit the phone numbers in the  
list.  
Press OK  
.
TIP If your wireless service provider changes  
the PIN2 code, you need to change it on your  
smartphone. Press Start and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone. Select the  
PIN2 tab, and then select Change PIN2.  
Auto: Automatically selects a network.  
GSM: Connects only to GSM networks.  
Manually selecting your wireless band  
UMTS: Connects only to UMTS (3G or  
HSDPA) networks.  
IMPORTANT The wireless band setting is  
preset for optimum performance. Do not  
change this setting unless instructed to do  
so by a representative from your wireless  
service provider.  
5
6
Select the Select your GSM/UMTS  
Band list, and then select either Auto or  
one of the bands listed. The band  
options differ depending on your  
wireless service provider.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Press OK  
.
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
Select the Band tab.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
80  
     
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
Manually selecting your network settings  
6
7
To change your preferred network,  
select Set Networks, check the box  
next to the networks you want, and  
select your order of preference.  
IMPORTANT The network settings are  
preset for optimum performance. Do not  
change these settings unless instructed to  
do so by a representative from your  
wireless service provider. The network  
settings options vary according to your  
wireless service provider.  
Press OK  
.
Selecting broadcast channel options  
Broadcast channel settings let you set  
options for incoming system messages  
from your wireless service provider.  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the Network tab.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
To switch to another network, select  
Find Network and select an available  
network.  
Select the More tab.  
Under Broadcast Channels, check the  
Enable box and select Settings.  
5
From the Network Selection list, select  
5
Check the Receive channel list box.  
an option:  
Automatic: The network connection is  
automatically made.  
Manual: Network connections are  
manually made. If you are manually  
selecting a network, select a network  
from the list of available networks.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
81  
       
Y O U R P H O N E  
4
6
7
Select the Language list, and then  
select the language in which you want  
to receive channel messages.  
Select the Select items to receive list,  
and then select the type of messages  
you want to receive. To create new  
items, select New, enter the item name  
and channel number, and press OK  
.
8
Press OK  
.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
82  
 
CHAPTER  
5
Synchronizing information  
Synchronizing means that information that has been entered or  
updated in one place—your Palm® TreoPro smartphone, your  
computer, or your corporate server—is automatically updated  
in the other. There’s no need to enter information twice. Some  
types of synchronization can happen on an automated  
schedule, so you don’t even have to think about it.  
After you get into the habit of synchronizing regularly, you’ll  
know what a powerful tool synchronization is for transferring,  
updating, and backing up large amounts of information on your  
smartphone.  
Benefits  
Quickly enter and update  
information on your computer and  
your smartphone  
Send photos and videos to your  
smartphone from your desktop  
computer  
Protect your information  
83  
   
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
desktop sync software on your computer  
to synchronize in one of several ways, or  
you may be able to synchronize wirelessly  
with an Exchange server. You can also  
maximize your sync options and sync with  
both an Exchange server and desktop sync  
software.  
Synchronization  
overview  
This chapter discusses using desktop sync  
software and other methods to synchronize  
your smartphone and your computer.  
Synchronizing with desktop sync  
software  
When you synchronize, info you enter on  
your smartphone, your computer, or your  
corporate server is automatically updated  
in the other location. There’s no need to  
enter the info twice. This is true whether  
you sync with your computer using  
desktop synchronization software (see  
The sync application on your smartphone is  
called ActiveSync. The name of the  
desktop sync software on your computer  
depends on your computers operating  
system.  
Windows XP: The desktop sync software  
synchronization) or wirelessly with your  
companys Exchange server using  
is called ActiveSync® desktop software.  
Windows Vista: The desktop sync  
software is called Windows Mobile Device  
Center.  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see  
You install the software by connecting your  
smartphone to your computer. You must  
install this software even if you have  
already installed a previous version of  
desktop sync software. See for  
instructions.  
How do I  
synchronize?  
There are a number of ways to make  
synchronization occur. You can install  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N O V E R V I E W  
85  
                     
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
After you install desktop sync software,  
you can synchronize by connecting your  
smartphone to your computer using any of  
the following:  
What can I  
synchronize?  
If you have Microsoft Office Outlook® 2003  
or later installed on your computer, you can  
synchronize information in these  
applications:  
Bluetooth® wireless technology: See  
Synchronizing wirelessly with the server  
You can set up your smartphone to  
synchronize email and other information  
wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server  
2007 or Exchange Server 2003 using  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see  
choose this method, synchronization takes  
place automatically after setup.  
The information in these applications  
synchronizes with Outlook by default  
whether you use desktop sync software or  
wireless synchronization with Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync.  
NOTE If you decide to sync wirelessly, you  
don’t have to install the desktop sync  
software, but we strongly recommend that  
you do. You need the desktop sync  
software to synchronize pictures, videos,  
music files, and other info directly with  
your computer.  
W H A T C A N  
I
S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?  
86  
               
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
You can remove applications or add others  
to the list of applications that synchronize.  
For example, you can change settings to  
synchronize Word, Excel, PowerPoint,  
OneNote, and PDF files, as well as  
pictures, music, videos, and other types of  
sync). If you want to synchronize music or  
other files that appear in the Windows  
Media Player Mobile library on your  
Mobile), you need Windows Media Player  
10 or later on your computer.  
TIP If you don’t have Outlook installed on your  
computer, you can download a trial version of  
Outlook 2007. On your smartphone, press  
Start and select Settings. Select the System  
tab, select PC Setup, and then select Set up  
my PC. Connect your smartphone to your  
computer using the USB cable. On the screen  
that appears on your computer, select the link  
to download a trial version of Outlook 2007.  
If you set up synchronization with desktop  
sync software, information in the Favorites  
application is synchronized by default as  
well.  
TIP If you don’t have Windows Media Player  
installed on your computer, you can download  
it for free from microsoft.com.  
DID YOU KNOW Synchronizing Favorites gives  
?
you an easy way to get favorites from the web  
browser on your computer into the web  
browser on your smartphone. Just add them  
to the folder called Mobile Favorites, which  
shows up in your computer's browser. When  
you sync, they become available on your  
smartphone as well. Backup copies of any  
favorites that you add on the smartphone  
browser are also stored in the Mobile  
Favorites folder.  
If you want to synchronize with a personal  
information manager (PIM) other than  
Microsoft Office Outlook, you must install a  
third-party solution. Contact the PIMs  
vendor to learn if software is available for  
your smartphone.  
W H A T C A N  
I
S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?  
87  
           
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
This table lists the types of info you can  
synchronize and the methods to use.  
Info type  
Method  
Where to learn more  
Outlook Contacts, Desktop sync software  
Calendar, Tasks  
Outlook Email  
(sync with computer) or  
Exchange ActiveSync  
(direct sync with server)  
Desktop sync software or Setting up your computer for  
Exchange ActiveSync  
Word, Excel,  
PowerPoint,  
OneNote, PDF  
files  
Desktop sync software  
Music, video, and Desktop sync software  
picture files that  
are in your  
and Windows Media  
Player  
Windows Media  
Player Mobile  
library  
W H A T C A N  
I
S Y N C H R O N I Z E ?  
88  
 
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
Info type  
Method  
Where to learn more  
Music, picture,  
and video files  
that are not in  
your Windows  
Media Player  
Mobile library  
Desktop sync software  
library files (Windows Vista)  
Outlook Notes  
Desktop sync software  
Desktop sync software  
Files to be  
transferred to an  
expansion card  
System requirements  
Setting up your  
computer for  
synchronization  
Your computer must meet the following  
minimum system requirements:  
Windows XP Service Pack 2 or  
Windows Vista (later versions may also  
be supported)  
Before you can synchronize with your  
computer, you must have the current  
version of the desktop sync software  
installed.  
32MB of available memory (RAM)  
170MB of free hard disk space  
Available USB port  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
89  
     
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
USB cable (included with your  
smartphone)  
In setup mode, you can do the following:  
Install the desktop sync software.  
Adobe Flash Player (required to run the  
installation program)  
Download a trial version of Outlook  
2007.  
Download a copy of this User Guide to  
your computer.  
TIP If you do not have Adobe Flash Player on  
your computer, you can download it for free  
Visit Palm support online.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing  
the software on a computer at work, make  
sure your company allows you to install  
new software. Contact your companys  
IT department for help.  
Installing the desktop sync software  
NOTE If you’re transferring info from a  
previous Windows Mobile® device or from  
a Palm OS® by ACCESS device, you can  
learn more about how to move content,  
such as pictures, music, and files, to your  
smartphone by going to palm.com/  
1
Close any applications that are currently  
running on your computer, including  
those running in the background. Your  
computer must have all its resources  
available to install the software.  
You need the USB cable that came with  
your smartphone to install the desktop  
sync software. The cable connection  
between your smartphone and your  
computer can operate in two modes: setup  
mode and sync mode. The first time you  
connect your smartphone to your  
computer, the connection is automatically  
set to setup mode, so that you can  
complete installation.  
2
Plug the USB cable into an available  
USB port on your computer or into a  
powered USB hub connected to your  
computer.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
90  
             
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
When you connect your smartphone to  
your computer in setup mode, an  
application checks to see if your  
computer has the current version of the  
desktop sync software installed.  
TIP For best performance, plug your USB  
cable directly into a USB port on your  
computer. If your computer has USB ports on  
both the front and back, we suggest using the  
back port. If you use a USB hub, make sure it’s  
a powered hub.  
If your computer has the current version  
of the software installed, the mode  
switches to sync mode, and you are  
ready to sync. You can sync now by  
clicking Sync your PC and Treo, or  
simply reconnect your smartphone and  
your computer to sync in the future (see  
3
Connect the USB cable to your  
smartphone by inserting it into the  
microUSB connector on the bottom of  
the smartphone.  
If your computer doesn’t have the  
current version of the sync software  
installed, go to the next step.  
4
On your computer, select Install sync  
software on your PC and follow the  
installation instructions that appear on  
both your computer and your  
smartphone. If prompted on a Windows  
Vista computer, click Continue.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
91  
       
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
Switching between setup mode and sync  
mode  
TIP Your smartphone is being charged when it  
is connected to your computer using the USB  
cable. If you never want to sync through this  
connection, but only charge your smartphone,  
you need to turn off setup mode. When the  
Setup screen appears on your computer, on  
your smartphone, press Cancel (right softkey),  
and then press Exit (right softkey).  
After the first time you connect your  
smartphone to your computer, the  
connection switches from setup mode to  
sync mode. In sync mode, your  
smartphone synchronizes with your  
computer every time you connect them  
using the USB cable, provided you have the  
current version of the desktop sync  
software installed on your computer.  
5
After you complete installation, the  
mode switches to sync mode, and you  
are ready to sync. You can sync now by  
clicking Sync your PC and Treo, or  
simply reconnect your smartphone and  
your computer to sync in the future (see  
The connection stays in sync mode unless  
you manually switch it to setup mode. For  
example, you may be using sync mode but  
decide you want to download the trial  
version of Outlook 2007, so you need to  
switch to setup mode. After you finish  
working in setup mode, the connection  
automatically switches back to sync  
Desktop software installation also creates  
a folder for your smartphone on your  
computer. When your smartphone is  
connected to your computer, opening My  
Computer or Windows Explorer (Windows  
XP) or Computer (Windows Vista) displays  
an icon representing your smartphone.  
Double-clicking this icon displays folders  
containing items you synchronized, such as  
music files, pictures, and videos.  
mode—you don’t need to do anything.  
IMPORTANT Even if you are in sync  
mode, synchronization cannot take place  
unless you have the desktop sync software  
installed on your computer. If you did not  
install the software during initial setup but  
want to synchronize, switch to setup mode  
so that you can install the software.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
92  
       
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
1
2
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
Change which applications synchronize.  
In ActiveSync desktop software on a  
Windows XP computer, enter settings  
to synchronize wirelessly with Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007.  
Select the System tab, and then select  
PC Setup  
Select Set up my PC.  
Press OK  
.
3
4
5
.
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can also change which  
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer to run Setup.  
applications synchronize (see Changing which  
applications sync) and enter settings to  
synchronize wirelessly (see Setting up  
wireless synchronization) in the ActiveSync  
app on your smartphone. Whether you enter  
changes on your smartphone or on your  
computer, the changes are transferred to the  
other location the next time you synchronize.  
Using the desktop sync software  
After you install the desktop sync software,  
synchronization happens by default  
anytime you connect your smartphone to  
your computer, as described in  
can also open the desktop sync software  
window on your computer to perform the  
following tasks:  
To open the desktop sync software, do one  
of the following:  
Windows XP: To open the ActiveSync  
desktop software window, double-click the  
ActiveSync  
icon in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your computer screen.  
Install applications from your computer  
an expansion card inserted into the  
expansion card slot on your smartphone  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
93  
           
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
whether changes you made on the  
computer or on the smartphone need to be  
synchronized.  
TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in  
the taskbar, click Start > Programs >  
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the  
ActiveSync window.  
Synchronizing  
TIP You can enter a setting to have the  
ActiveSync window open automatically when  
you connect your computer and your  
smartphone. In the ActiveSync window, select  
File > Connection Settings, and check the  
Open ActiveSync when my device  
connects box.  
NOTE If you synchronize more than one  
device with the same computer, each  
device must have a unique name. To create  
a custom device name for your  
smartphone, press Start  
and select  
Settings. Select the System tab, and then  
select About . Select the Device ID tab  
and enter a name and description.  
Windows Vista: To open Windows Mobile  
Device Center, click Start > All Programs  
> Windows Mobile Device Center.  
1
Plug the USB cable into an available  
USB port or into a powered USB hub on  
your computer.  
Synchronizing using  
the USB cable  
2
Connect the USB cable to your  
smartphone by inserting it into the  
microUSB connector on the bottom of  
the smartphone.  
After you install the desktop sync software  
every time you connect your smartphone  
to your computer, the desktop sync  
software automatically turns on and checks  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G U S I N G T H E U S B C A B L E  
94  
       
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
If you don’t see the correct icon, make  
sure the desktop sync software that  
came with your smartphone is  
running on your computer.  
If you have any problems  
synchronizing, see Synchronization for  
troubleshooting suggestions.  
TIP Your smartphone contains Sprite Backup, a  
backup and restore application that backs up  
information that is not synchronized with  
Outlook. This app also preserves your  
information and settings if your smartphone is  
ever lost or stolen, and it protects your info  
during a hard reset. To access this app, press  
Start, select Programs, and then select  
Sprite Backup.  
3
Check for synchronization progress:  
Setting up wireless  
synchronization  
Windows XP: Look for the animated  
ActiveSync  
icon at the top of your  
smartphone screen and the ActiveSync  
icon in the taskbar on your  
computer.  
Does your company use Microsoft Outlook  
as its email solution? Does your company  
also use Microsoft Exchange Server 2003  
or 2007 as its email server? If so, you may  
be able to wirelessly synchronize the email  
and other Outlook info on your smartphone  
Windows Vista: Look for the animated  
connection  
icon at the top of your  
smartphone screen.  
S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
95  
             
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
and the same info stored on the Exchange  
server using Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync.  
Server account. Work with your system  
administrator to gather the following info,  
and then follow the steps in this section to  
set up an account:  
If you are using Exchange Server 2007, or  
Exchange Server 2003 that has been  
upgraded to Service Pack 2, you may be  
able to take advantage of the additional  
features of Microsoft Direct Push.  
Microsoft Direct Push is a two-way  
wireless delivery method that keeps your  
Outlook information always up-to-date and  
provides more efficient communication  
between the server and your smartphone.  
It includes features like Global Address  
List, Tasks Over The Air (OTA), and  
IP-based push updating of Calendar and  
Messaging.  
Mail server address and domain name.  
The username and password you use to  
access your corporate mail server.  
Security connection: Does your server  
use an encrypted (SSL) connection?  
Security measure: Is it OK to store your  
corporate email password on your  
smartphone?  
TIP If you installed ActiveSync desktop  
software on a Windows XP computer, you  
may have already set up your smartphone to  
synchronize wirelessly with the server. To  
check, press Start, select Programs, and  
then select ActiveSync. Press Menu (right  
softkey). If Configure Server appears instead  
of Add Server Source, wireless sync is already  
set up, and you can skip this procedure.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Because your desktop copy of  
Outlook also syncs with the server, whatever  
is synchronized to the server from your  
smartphone also shows up in Outlook on your  
computer; and whatever you enter or change  
in Outlook on your computer syncs to the  
server and then shows up on your  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
smartphone.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Add Server Source.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To synchronize  
wirelessly, you need to set up an Exchange  
S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
96  
         
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
4
Enter the email address you use to  
access email from your corporate  
Exchange server. Check the box to have  
the setup process get your Exchange  
server settings from the Internet.  
TIP The Exchange server settings are case-  
sensitive. Be sure to enter uppercase and  
lowercase letters properly.  
7
Check the Save password box.  
5
6
Press Next (right softkey).  
Enter the username and password you  
use to access your corporate mail  
server, and enter the Exchange server  
domain.  
TIP If you found out from your system  
administrator that it is not OK to store your  
corporate email password on your  
smartphone, don’t check the Save password  
box; you must synchronize manually (see  
8
9
Press Next (right softkey).  
If prompted, enter the server address.  
Check the This server requires an  
encrypted (SSL) connection box if  
your server uses an encrypted  
connection.  
NOTE You can’t see your password as you  
enter it, so be careful. Be sure Caps Lock  
and Option Lock are not on unless you  
need them. For info on how to enter  
S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
97  
   
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
10 Press Next (right softkey) and check the 12 Press Finish (left softkey).  
boxes for the types of information you  
want to synchronize with the Exchange  
server.  
Synchronization with your Exchange  
server begins automatically. A status  
bar appears onscreen indicating sync  
progress.  
You can set a schedule for synchronization  
to take place anytime info is updated on  
either your smartphone or the server or at  
synchronization to take place only when  
you initiate it manually (see Initiating a  
Setting the synchronization schedule  
11 (Optional) Highlight an item and select  
Settings to change the synchronization  
settings for that type of information.  
Settings are not available for all items.  
You can set a synchronization schedule in  
either of the following situations:  
If you use Microsoft Exchange Server  
2007, or Microsoft Exchange Server 2003  
with Service Pack 2: By default, wireless  
sync takes place anytime info is updated  
on either your smartphone or the server  
using Microsoft Direct Push. To save  
battery life, however, you can set  
TIP To automatically download more of an  
incoming email message than the default  
setting, select E-mail in step 11 and select a  
higher number from the Download size limit  
list. If you don’t increase this setting, you can  
manually download the rest of the message at  
your convenience.  
synchronization to take place at intervals  
that you specify.  
TIP To set the rules for fixing sync conflicts,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Advanced.  
S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
98  
               
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
If you use Microsoft Exchange Server  
2003 that is not upgraded to Service  
Pack 2: By default, wireless sync does not  
take place automatically. Set a  
synchronization schedule to have sync take  
place either anytime info is updated on  
your smartphone or the server, or at certain  
intervals.  
Off-peak times: Sets the frequency for  
low-traffic time periods such as late at  
night.  
Use above settings when roaming:  
Sets the frequency while you are  
roaming outside your wireless service  
providers network. You should keep  
this box checked to ensure that wireless  
sync works properly.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
Send/receive when I click Send: Sets  
whether items are sent as soon as you  
select Send in the Messaging  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Schedule.  
application, or whether they are held  
until the next synchronization.  
5
Press OK  
.
Initiating a wireless sync manually  
If you want to control exactly when a  
wireless sync takes place, or if it is not OK  
to store your corporate email password on  
your smartphone, you can initiate sync  
manually.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
1
To set up manual sync, follow the  
preceding procedure, Setting the  
synchronization schedule. In the Peak  
times and Off-peak times lists, select  
Manually.  
Peak times: Sets the frequency for  
high-traffic time periods such as when  
you are at work or when email volume  
is high.  
S E T T I N G U P W I R E L E S S S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
99  
             
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
2
To initiate a manual sync, press  
Start and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
Press Sync (left softkey).  
1
Do one of the following:  
Windows XP: On your computer,  
3
4
.
right-click the ActiveSync  
the taskbar in the lower-right corner of  
the screen, and select Connection  
Settings.  
icon in  
Windows Vista: Click Start > All  
Programs > Windows Mobile Device  
Center. Select Connect without  
setting up your device, and then  
select Connection settings.  
Other ways to  
synchronize  
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth  
connection  
2
Check the Allow connections for one  
of the following box and select  
Bluetooth.  
You can synchronize your computer and  
smartphone using Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
3
4
5
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
computer is equipped with Bluetooth  
wireless technology. You may need to go to  
your computer manufacturer’s website to  
download required software. Check the  
documentation that came with your  
computer for information.  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth  
.
Select the Mode tab and check the Turn  
on Bluetooth box.  
6
7
8
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Connect via Bluetooth.  
O T H E R W A Y S T O S Y N C H R O N I Z E  
100  
                 
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
9
If this is the first time you’re making a  
Bluetooth connection to this computer,  
follow the onscreen prompts to set up a  
Bluetooth partnership with this  
with Bluetooth® wireless technology for  
more information on partnerships.  
1
Set up your computer to receive  
infrared beams. See ActiveSync Help on  
your computer for details.  
2
3
Point the IR port directly on your  
smartphone at your computers IR port.  
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Programs.  
10 Select Sync.  
4
5
Select ActiveSync  
.
11 When synchronization has finished,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Disconnect Bluetooth.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Connect via IR.  
6
Select Sync.  
Synchronizing over an infrared  
connection  
Synchronizing with multiple computers  
You can set up your smartphone to  
synchronize with up to two computers as  
well as with Exchange Server 2003 or 2007.  
When synchronizing with multiple  
computers, the items that you synchronize  
appear on all the computers.  
If your computer has an IR (infrared) port,  
you can synchronize with your computer  
wirelessly using the IR port on your  
smartphone.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
Make sure your computer is equipped  
with an IR port.  
For example, if you set up to sync your  
smartphone with two computers named  
C1 and C2, when you sync Contacts and  
Calendar on your smartphone with both  
computers, you get the following results:  
Turn on the feature to receive beamed  
information on your smartphone (see  
The contacts and calendar appointments  
that were on C1 are now also on C2.  
O T H E R W A Y S T O S Y N C H R O N I Z E  
101  
           
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
The contacts and calendar appointments  
that were on C2 are now also on C1.  
The contacts and calendar  
appointments from both computers are  
on your smartphone.  
NOTE Microsoft Office Outlook® email can  
synchronize with only one computer.  
Changing which  
applications sync  
4
Do any of the following:  
Check the box next to any items you  
want to synchronize. If you cannot  
check a box, you might have to  
uncheck a box for the same  
You must select sync options if you want to  
synchronize notes, pictures, and other  
types of files.  
information type elsewhere in the list.  
Uncheck the box next to any items  
you want to stop synchronizing.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
TIP To end the sync relationship between your  
smartphone and a computer so that items are  
no longer synchronized with that computer,  
select the computer name on the ActiveSync  
screen on your smartphone, and then select  
Delete.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
C H A N G I N G W H I C H A P P L I C A T I O N S S Y N C  
102  
       
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
Highlight an item and select Settings  
to customize the settings for that  
item. Settings are not available for all  
items.  
Stopping  
synchronization  
For detailed information on synchronizing  
Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, and  
PowerPoint presentations, see  
If you ever need to manually stop a  
synchronization thats in progress, follow  
these steps:  
For detailed information on synchronizing  
pictures, videos, and music files, see  
music. For information on changing email  
1
2
3
Press Start  
Select ActiveSync  
Press Stop (left softkey).  
and select Programs.  
.
S T O P P I N G S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
103  
   
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
5
S T O P P I N G S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
104  
CHAPTER  
6
Your email  
You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch.  
Now your Palm® TreoPro smartphone brings you a new level  
of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed  
of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues  
anywhere you can access your wireless service providers data  
network.  
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create  
Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your  
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit  
at your convenience.  
Benefits  
Receive photos, sound files, Word  
and Excel files, and more  
Save messages from your  
computer to view at a convenient  
time  
Attach and send files of almost any  
type  
105  
   
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
2007, or Exchange Server 2003 with  
Service Pack 2.  
Setting up email  
Entering settings for an email account  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
You can use the Messaging application on  
your smartphone to access the many kinds  
of email you may use: corporate, ISP, and  
web-based (like Gmail and Yahoo! Mail).  
Before you can send and receive email on  
your smartphone, you need to decide  
which type of email account you want to  
access. The setup process is different for  
each email account type, so it is very  
important that you select the correct type  
to send and receive email.  
Before you use your smartphone to  
send or receive messages, consult your  
wireless service provider for pricing and  
availability of email services and data  
rate plans.  
Make sure your phone is on and you’re  
inside a coverage area before you send  
or receive messages.  
If you want delivery of Microsoft Office  
Outlook® email using Microsoft Direct  
Push, make sure that your IT  
organization uses Exchange Server  
Email account type Type of email you can access How to set up  
POP/IMAP  
You can obtain email from an  
ISP or Internet email account  
such as AOL, or from a small  
account in the Messaging  
application: Common email  
business or corporate Internet providers or Setting up a POP/  
email account.  
IMAP account in the Inbox  
application: Other email  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
107  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Email account type Type of email you can access How to set up  
Microsoft Exchange You can retrieve corporate  
Server  
email using a Microsoft  
Exchange server. You can  
access email wirelessly if your  
company is using Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync®.  
You may need to check with  
your IT organization to ensure  
that Exchange ActiveSync® is  
supported and to obtain the  
configuration settings.  
Hotmail  
You can use Windows Live to  
access mail from your  
.
web-based Hotmail account.  
NOTE Windows Live is not  
supported by all wireless  
service providers.  
Free web-based  
email  
You can access mail from  
Yahoo! and other free  
web-based systems.  
Access the email website  
directly using your  
smartphone’s web browser.  
Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the  
Messaging application: Common email  
providers  
DID YOU KNOW Some web-based email  
?
providers such as Yahoo! and Gmail allow you  
to configure your email account so that you  
can access it from the Messaging application  
on your smartphone instead of from your web  
browser. Check the provider’s website for  
information.  
Follow this procedure if you have a  
common email provider, for example, AOL,  
EarthLink, or Yahoo!. If you are setting up  
the Messaging application to work with  
your corporate email account, or you have a  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
108  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
less common email provider, see Setting  
your password each time you access  
this account, do not check this box.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Checking the Save password  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your email  
provider or system administrator for your  
account username and password if you  
don’t know them.  
box makes it easier to check your email,  
because you don’t have to enter your  
password each time. Leaving the box  
unchecked keeps your email more secure,  
because no one can download messages  
without entering your password.  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select Setup E-mail.  
5
6
Press Next (right softkey).  
Enter the email address that you want  
to set up, and enter your password for  
this account.  
If the setup process finds your account  
settings, press Next (right softkey).  
If a screen appears displaying an option  
to try to get email settings automatically  
from the Internet, see Setting up a POP/  
Other email providers and continue with  
step 5 of that procedure.  
7
Enter your name and, if you want,  
change your account display name to  
something meaningful. For example, if  
this is your work email account, you can  
change the display name to “Work” or  
your companys name.  
4
If you want your password entered  
automatically, check the Save  
password box. If you want to enter  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
109  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
TIP To maximize battery life and minimize data  
charges, set a less frequent interval for  
sending and receiving email.  
Review all download settings: Select  
this option to change download  
information.  
10 Press Finish (right softkey). If  
prompted, select OK to download  
messages for this account now.  
8
9
Press Next (right softkey).  
(Optional) Select either of the following:  
Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the  
Inbox application: Other email providers  
You can set up an account in the  
Messaging application to send and receive  
email messages using an email account  
that you have with an Internet service  
provider (ISP), an email account that you  
access using a VPN server connection  
(such as a work account; see Connecting to  
a VPN), or any other IMAP or POP email  
account.  
Automatic Send/Receive: Set the time  
interval for automatically sending and  
receiving email, from every 5 minutes  
to once a day. If you do not want to  
automatically download messages,  
select Manually.  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
110  
     
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Work with your  
email provider or system administrator to  
gather the following info:  
4 If you want your password entered  
automatically, check the Save  
password box. If you want to enter  
your password each time you access  
this account, do not check this box.  
Account type (POP3 or IMAP).  
Mail server name for receiving mail.  
Your username and password.  
Any special security requirements.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Checking the Save password  
box makes it easier to check your email,  
because you don’t have to enter your  
password each time. Leaving the box  
unchecked keeps your email more secure,  
because no one can download messages  
without entering your password.  
Password security: Find out whether it’s  
OK to store your corporate email  
password on your smartphone.  
Mail server name for sending mail.  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
5
If a screen appears with a message that  
the setup process has found your  
and continue with step 6 of that  
procedure.  
Select Setup E-mail.  
Enter the email address that you want  
to set up, and enter your password for  
this account.  
If the following screen appears, check  
the box if you want the setup process to  
try to get your account settings from  
the Internet.  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
111  
   
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Internet e-mail: Select this option if you  
access email from any type of email  
account except a corporate account that  
uses an Exchange server.  
Exchange server: Select this option if  
you access email from a corporate  
email account using an Exchange  
server.  
Custom domain: Select this option if  
the part of your email address after the  
@ symbol is not the same as your email  
provider name. For example, select this  
option if your email address is  
“user@mycompany.com” but your  
actual email provider is “live.com.” If  
you select this option, press Next (right  
softkey) and enter your actual email  
provider domain name.  
6
7
Press Next (right softkey).  
If you did not check the box in step 5 or  
the setup process does not find account  
settings, press Next (right softkey).  
8
If prompted, select one of the following  
as your email provider:  
9
Press Next (right softkey).  
10 Enter your name and, if you want,  
change your account display name to  
something meaningful. For example, if  
this is your work email account, you can  
change the display name to “Work” or  
your companys name.  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
112  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
14 Press Next (right softkey).  
15 Enter your account username and  
password.  
16 If you want your password entered  
automatically, check the Save  
password box. If you want to enter  
your password each time you access  
this account, do not check this box.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Checking the Save password  
11 Press Next (right softkey).  
box makes it easier to check your email,  
because you don’t have to enter your  
password each time. Leaving the box  
unchecked keeps your email more secure,  
because no one can download messages  
without entering your password.  
12 Enter the name of the incoming mail  
server.  
TIP If you found out from your system  
administrator that it is not OK to store your  
corporate email password on your  
smartphone, don’t check the Save password  
box.  
17 Press Next (right softkey).  
18 Enter the name of the outgoing (SMTP)  
mail server, set whether the server  
requires authentication, and set  
whether the server requires you to use  
your account and password to send  
email.  
13 Select the Account type list, and then  
select POP3 or IMAP4.  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
113  
   
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
21 (Optional) Select either of the following:  
19 Select Advanced Server Settings, set  
SSL requirements for incoming and  
outgoing email, and select the type of  
connection to use for sending and  
receiving email.  
Automatic Send/Receive: Set the time  
interval for automatically sending and  
receiving email, from every 5 minutes  
to once a day. If you do not want to  
automatically download messages,  
select Manually.  
TIP To maximize battery life and minimize data  
charges, set a less frequent interval for  
sending and receiving email.  
Review all download settings: Select  
this option to change download  
information.  
20 Press Done (left softkey). On the  
outgoing mail server screen, press  
Next (right softkey).  
S E T T I N G U P E M A I L  
114  
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
22 Press Finish (right softkey). If  
prompted, select OK to download  
messages for this account now.  
Sending and  
receiving messages  
DID YOU KNOW On the Accounts tab in  
?
Selecting which email account to use  
Messaging Options, an asterisk appears next  
to the account you most recently accessed.  
If you set up more than one email account  
on your smartphone (see Setting up email),  
you can select the account you want to use  
to view or send messages in one of two  
ways:  
Editing and deleting accounts  
NOTE To delete an Outlook Email account,  
use the ActiveSync application, not the  
Messaging application. To delete a Hotmail  
account you set up using Windows Live,  
use the Windows Live application.  
By default, when you open the  
Messaging application, a list of all of  
your email accounts appears. Select the  
account you want.  
If you turn off the option to display the  
email settings), when you open the  
Inbox application, the last account you  
were using is displayed. Press Right  
or Left to cycle through your  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
3
Do one of the following:  
To delete an account: Highlight the  
account you want, press and hold  
accounts until the name of the account  
you want appears in the title bar.  
Center  
, and then select Delete.  
To edit an account:, Select the  
account, select the account feature you  
want to edit, and go through the  
screens to change the settings you  
want to edit.  
TIP Also press Right or Left to switch to a  
different account after you are finished  
working in the first account you selected.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S  
115  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Creating and sending an email message  
If the recipients name and mobile  
number are not in your Contacts list,  
enter the full mobile number or email  
address.  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Select the account you want to use to  
send a message.  
Separate addresses with  
semicolons (;). Enter a semicolon by  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New.  
pressing Option  
Need to enter an underscore? Press  
Alt and select the character. Its  
+ K.  
Enter the recipients email address:  
the second character in the list.  
TIP To display the Cc and Bcc address fields,  
navigate to the To field and press Up on the  
5-way.  
5
To confirm that addresses you enter are  
valid, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Check Names. An alert appears  
if any names or address you’ve entered  
are not valid.  
Enter the first letters of the recipients  
first or last name, the first and last  
initials separated by a space, or the  
email address. If a match is found in  
your Contacts list, select the name.  
6
7
Select Subject and enter a title for the  
message.  
Press Down  
to go to the body of the  
If the recipients name is in an online  
address book, you can find the name  
message. Enter your message, or press  
Menu (right softkey) and select My  
Text. Select the phrase you want. To  
add a new My Text phrase, select Edit  
My Text Messages in the list.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S  
116  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
8
(Optional) To attach an item to the  
message, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Insert. Select the type of  
item you want to attach, and then select  
the file or record a voice note.  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Save to Drafts if you need to finish  
composing your message later.  
TIP To save memory on your smartphone, turn  
off the option to save sent messages in the  
Saved folder. In the Inbox, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select  
the Message tab and uncheck the Keep  
copies of sent items in Sent folder box.  
TIP You can send an email message with a file  
attached from directly within other  
applications on your smartphone; see Sending  
Receiving email messages  
How you receive email messages depends  
on the type of account you are using and  
how you synchronize:  
9
(Optional) Press Menu (right softkey)  
and do one or both of the following:  
Select Spell Check. When the spell  
If you synchronize wirelessly with your  
Exchange server using Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync, new email  
messages are sent to your smartphone  
when they appear on the server,  
according to the schedule you set up  
schedule), or when you manually initiate  
check is complete, press OK  
.
Select Message Options. Select the  
Priority list, select a priority setting  
for the message, and press OK  
.
TIP You can use the Message Options screen  
to select a language for the message. For  
certain types of email accounts, you can also  
set a security level and a permission level.  
10 Press Send (left softkey).  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S  
117  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
For all other types of accounts,  
including ISP accounts and accounts  
you access using a VPN server  
TIP If you sync email with Microsoft Exchange  
Server 2003 or 2007, you can synchronize  
messages in subfolders you create. In the  
Inbox, press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Manage Folders. Folders containing  
subfolders display a +. Select the + to view  
the subfolders. Check the box to the left of  
any subfolder you want to sync.  
connection (typically a work account;  
retrieval depends on the option you  
chose from the Automatic Send/  
Receive list during account setup (see  
Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the  
Messaging application: Common email  
email providers), as follows:  
TIP If you synchronize email with Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2007, and you receive a  
message containing a link to a document on  
SharePoint or an internal file server, you can  
view the document by selecting the link.  
If you chose a time interval: Your  
smartphone automatically checks for  
and downloads new messages  
according to that interval.  
If you use desktop sync software to  
synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer, messages in Outlook on your  
computer are transferred to your  
smartphone when you connect your  
computer and your smartphone (see  
Connecting your smartphone to your  
computer).  
If you chose Manually: Follow these  
steps to send and receive messages:  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Select the account for which you want  
to send and receive messages.  
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Send/Receive to synchronize your  
smartphone with your email server.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S  
118  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
TIP Partially downloaded messages appear in  
the message list with a partial envelope icon  
to the left of the subject. To view the full  
message, either press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Download Message, or open the  
message and select Get the rest of this  
message. The full message is downloaded  
the next time you manually or automatically  
retrieve messages.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can receive and open  
attachments in a number of different formats,  
including PDF. PDF file attachments open in  
Adobe Reader LE on your smartphone (see  
Adobe® Reader® LE).  
TIP To store attachments on an expansion  
card, insert the card into your smartphone’s  
expansion card slot, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select  
Storage and check the When available, use  
this storage card to store attachments box.  
DID YOU KNOW You can view messages sent  
?
as HTML with the HTML formatting intact.  
Opening attachments  
If you are synchronizing with Outlook on  
your computer and want to download  
attachments automatically, do the  
following:  
Unread messages containing attachments  
display this icon  
for partially  
downloaded messages and this icon  
for fully downloaded messages. To open an  
attachment, do one of the following:  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
For fully downloaded messages: Open  
the message and select the attachment  
name.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
4
5
Select E-mail, and then select  
Settings.  
For partially downloaded messages:  
Open the message and select Get the rest  
of this message. After the message has  
been downloaded, select the attachment  
name to open it.  
Check the Include file attachments  
box.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G M E S S A G E S  
119  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
6
7
(Optional) To automatically download  
5
Press Next twice, and then select  
either Get full copy of messages and  
When getting full copy, get  
attachments or Entire message,  
depending on the option displayed.  
attachments up to a certain size only,  
check the Only if smaller than box and  
enter the maximum attachment size.  
Press OK  
.
To automatically download attachments  
from an IMAP4 email account (typically an  
ISP account) or an account that you access  
using a VPN server connection (typically a  
do the following:  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Embedded images and objects  
cannot be received as attachments, unless  
you have an IMAP4 email account with TNEF  
disabled. Note that TNEF must be enabled to  
receive meeting requests.  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Do one of the following:  
Working with email  
messages  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
Adding a contact from an email message  
If the message list for a specific  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
You can add a contact name or email  
address to your Contacts list directly from  
the To, cc, or bcc field of an email  
message. You can select the name or  
address from either an outgoing or an  
incoming message, and you can either  
create a new contact or add the  
3
4
On the Accounts tab, select the IMAP4  
account name.  
Press Next (right softkey) until you  
reach Server information, and then  
select Options.  
information to an existing contact.  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
120  
         
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
1
In an open message, highlight the name  
or address of the contact you want to  
add.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
When you enter or edit a  
contact phone number from a message, you  
can insert one or more two-second pauses by  
pressing Menu (right softkey) and selecting  
Insert Pause. You can also insert an indefinite  
pause that allows you to respond to dialing  
instructions by pressing Menu (right softkey)  
and selecting Insert Wait.  
2
3
4
Press Center  
.
Press Save (left softkey).  
Select <New Contact> to create a new  
contact entry for this name or address,  
or select an existing contact to add the  
name or address to that entry.  
Adding an online address book  
Many email servers, including servers  
running Microsoft Exchange Server, can  
verify names with an online address book,  
also called a directory service or a Global  
Address List (GAL). After you create and  
enable an email account, the Messaging  
application checks your contacts list and  
then the directory service to verify names  
that you enter in the To, cc, and bcc fields.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:  
5
6
Enter or edit the contact information.  
Ask your system administrator for the  
name of the directory service and the  
server, and whether authentication is  
required for accessing an online address  
book.  
Press Save (left softkey).  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
121  
             
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
If your company is using Exchange  
8
9
(Optional) Check the Check name  
against this server box to enable this  
directory service.  
Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003  
upgraded to Service Pack 2, you must  
first synchronize with the Exchange  
server to enable the GAL to find a  
contact.  
Select OK.  
TIP To delete a directory service, highlight it,  
press and hold Center on the 5-way, and then  
select Delete.  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Do one of the following:  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
Using an online address book  
You can access contact information, such  
as an email address or phone number, from  
your organizations online address book or  
GAL. To access a GAL, make sure you are  
accessing either Exchange Server 2007 or  
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service  
Pack 2. This feature is useful only if you  
know the exact name as it appears in the  
directory.  
If the message list for a specific  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
3
4
Select the Address tab.  
Select the address book you want to  
check for email addresses, and then  
select Add.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can use the Global  
5
6
7
Enter the name of the directory service.  
Enter the server name.  
Address List to find a contact. In Contacts,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Company Directory. When sending a  
meeting request, select Attendees, press  
Menu (right softkey), and select Company  
Directory.  
If your server requires authentication,  
check the box and enter your username  
and password.  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
122  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Add access to an  
online address book to your smartphone  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Select the account containing the  
message you want to find.  
3
Begin typing the word or phrase you  
want to find. This can appear in any of  
the address fields or the subject field.  
The list display changes to show only  
those messages containing the letters  
you have entered.  
1
2
In a new message, select the To field.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Add Recipient.  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Company Directory.  
Enter the contact name as it appears in  
the directory and press Find (left  
softkey). You must spell the contact  
name correctly.  
4
5
Continue entering letters to narrow the  
display until the message you want  
appears.  
Select the message to open it.  
TIP When you sync with Outlook on your  
computer, disable your online address books  
to avoid errors. Press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Tools > Options. Select Address,  
select each online address book, and uncheck  
the Check name against this server box. Be  
sure to turn this option back on if you  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you synchronize with  
Microsoft Outlook 2007, you can also find  
messages stored on your mail server.  
Replying to a message  
1
Open the message to which you want  
to reply.  
synchronize other email accounts.  
2
3
4
Press Reply (left softkey).  
Finding messages  
Enter any text you want to add.  
You can find messages containing a  
specific word or phrase. The find feature  
searches names, email addresses, and  
subject lines.  
(Optional) Select Edit sender’s  
message to edit the original senders  
message text that you include in your  
reply.  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
123  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
5
Press Send (left softkey).  
To delete a message you are reading:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete.  
DID YOU KNOW If you reply to a message sent  
as HTML, the reply is sent in HTML also.  
?
To delete messages from the message list:  
TIP To reply to both the sender and all other  
addressees, open the message, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select Reply > Reply All.  
1
Highlight the message(s) you want to  
delete. To highlight multiple consecutive  
messages, tap and drag the stylus  
across the messages in the list.  
Forwarding a message  
2
3
Press Delete (left softkey).  
1
2
3
4
Open the message you want to  
forward.  
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Reply > Forward.  
To delete all messages at once:  
1
Press Menu (left softkey) and select  
Tools > Clear “[account name].”  
Address the message and enter any  
text you want to add.  
2
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
(Optional) Select Edit sender’s  
message to edit the original senders  
message text that you include in your  
reply.  
Messages you delete are moved to the  
Deleted Items folder. To remove these  
items from your smartphone completely,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Empty Deleted Items.  
5
Press Send (left softkey).  
Deleting messages  
Sorting your messages  
You can delete a message you are reading,  
or you can delete one or more messages  
from the message list.  
You can sort the messages in any folder.  
1
Go to the Inbox or other folder you want  
to sort.  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
124  
             
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Sort By.  
Press and  
hold...  
To...  
Select Message Type, From (sender),  
Received (date received), or Subject.  
L
Fully download a partially  
downloaded message  
S
Synchronize your  
Using email shortcuts  
smartphone with the server  
to get and send new  
messages  
You can perform common email tasks by  
pressing and holding certain keys on the  
keyboard. Highlight or open the message  
you want, and then press and hold any of  
the following:  
Adding a signature to your outgoing  
messages  
Press and  
hold...  
You can use a different signature with each  
email account.  
To...  
H
A
View all email shortcuts  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
The default signature text for  
Reply to the sender of a  
message and all other  
addressees  
all accounts is “Sent from my Treo  
smartphone.”  
R
K
Reply to the sender only  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Mark a message read or  
unread  
Do one of the following:  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
F
Flag a message for follow up  
M
Move a message between  
folders  
O
D
Forward a message  
Delete a message  
W O R K I N G W I T H E M A I L M E S S A G E S  
125  
     
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
If the message list for a specific  
7
8
Highlight the text in the box at the  
bottom of the screen, and enter the  
signature text you want to use.  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
Press OK  
.
3
4
On the Accounts tab, select  
Signatures.  
Customizing your  
email settings  
Select the account for which you want  
to create a signature.  
When you customize settings for an email  
account, the options you choose apply to  
that account only.  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Do one of the following:  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
5
6
Check the Use signature with this  
account box to add this signature to  
new messages you create with this  
account.  
If the message list for a specific  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
(Optional) Check the Use when  
replying and forwarding box to add  
this signature to messages you reply to  
or forward with this account.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
126  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
3
On the Accounts tab, highlight the  
account you want and set any of the  
following options:  
TIP If the Display account picker when  
opening Messaging box is unchecked,  
repeatedly press Right or Left on the 5-way  
after you open the Messaging application to  
cycle through your accounts.  
4
Select the Message tab and set any of  
the following options:  
Security: Set whether you receive a  
warning message before you open a  
URL or file link that is not on your  
smartphone.  
Display account picker when opening  
Messaging: Set whether a list of your  
email accounts appears when you open  
the Messaging application, allowing you  
to select the one you want to use. If the  
box is unchecked, the Messaging  
application opens to the last account  
you used.  
When replying to e-mail, include  
body: Set whether the body of a  
message you received appears in your  
response to that message.  
Keep copies of sent items in Sent  
folder: Set whether messages you  
send are stored in the Sent folder.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
127  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Warn when deleting messages in the  
Check names using these address  
books: Set which directory services  
you want to check for email addresses.  
message list: Set whether a  
confirmation message appears when  
you delete one or more messages from  
the message list.  
Add: Enables you to add directory  
services to the list of online address  
books.  
After deleting or moving a message:  
Set what you want to see after you  
delete or move an email message you  
are reading: the account Inbox or the  
next message.  
6
Select the Storage tab and set any of  
the following options:  
5
Select the Address tab and set any of  
the following options:  
In Contacts, get e-mail addresses  
from: Set whether you want to check  
Contacts in addition to any directory  
services for email addresses.  
When available, use this storage card  
to store attachments: Set whether you  
want to automatically store email  
attachments on an expansion card (sold  
separately). You must have a card  
inserted in your smartphones  
expansion card slot to select this option.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
128  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Empty deleted items: Select  
2
Do one of the following:  
Immediately to have the Deleted folder  
emptied anytime you delete a message.  
Select On connect/disconnect to have  
the folder deleted anytime you open or  
quit the Messaging application. Select  
Manually to manually empty the  
Deleted folder.  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
If the message list for a specific  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
TIP If you choose to manually empty the  
Deleted folder, you delete messages from this  
folder in the same way that you delete any  
other messages (see Deleting messages).  
3
4
Select your Outlook email account.  
TIP If you select the account name and  
nothing happens, the Messaging application is  
currently synchronizing messages for that  
account. Wait until synchronization stops, and  
select the name again.  
7
Press OK  
.
Changing email download settings:  
Outlook email accounts  
Select any of the following options:  
You can customize the download options  
for an Outlook email account you  
synchronize with your computer or with an  
Exchange server.  
NOTE To change options for other types of  
email accounts, see Changing email  
1
Press Messaging  
.
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
129  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Download the past: Sets the number  
of days’ worth of email to be retrieved  
for each automatic or manual sync.  
exceeds the maximum size, you must  
download it manually (see Opening  
Message format: Sets the format for  
sending and receiving messages. If you  
select HTML, messages sent to you as  
HTML are received with their formatting  
intact. If you select Plain Text, all  
5
(Optional) Select Advanced, and then  
select any of the following options:  
messages are received as plain text.  
Download size limit: Sets the size of  
an incoming message that is  
automatically downloaded. For any  
message that exceeds this size, you  
must manually download the rest of the  
message. Selecting a higher limit  
means that more of your messages are  
fully downloaded, but message retrieval  
might take longer. You can also choose  
to download message headers only,  
regardless of size.  
Encrypt all outgoing e-mail  
messages: Sets whether outgoing  
messages should be encrypted for extra  
security. Encryption helps prevent  
eavesdropping, which occurs when a  
hacker intercepts and reads your email  
messages.  
Include file attachments: Sets  
whether to download attached files with  
a message.  
Sign all outgoing e-mail messages:  
Sets whether messages should be  
given a digital signature as an extra  
security measure. A signature helps  
prevent impersonation and tampering.  
Only if smaller than: Sets the  
maximum size of attachments that can  
be downloaded. If an attachment  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
130  
           
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Choose Certificate: Sets the certificate  
If the message list for a specific  
to use as a digital signature.  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
My e-mail addresses: Sets the  
addresses to which the security  
measures should be applied.  
3
4
Select the email account you want.  
6
Press OK  
.
TIP If you select the account name and  
nothing happens, the Messaging application is  
currently synchronizing messages for that  
account. Wait until synchronization stops, and  
select the name again.  
Changing email download settings: Other  
email accounts  
You can customize the download options  
for each email account that you have with  
an Internet service provider (ISP) or that  
you access using a VPN server connection  
(typically a work account).  
Select Send/Receive Schedule.  
NOTE To change options for a Microsoft  
Office Outlook E-mail account, see  
1
2
Press Messaging  
.
Do one of the following:  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
5
Select either of the following:  
Automatic Send/Receive: Sets the  
time interval for automatically  
downloading email, from every  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
131  
         
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
5 minutes to once a day. If you do not  
want to automatically download  
messages, select Manually.  
Send/receive when I click Send: Sets  
whether you can manually send and  
receive messages, in addition to  
automatically downloading them.  
Download messages: Sets the number  
of days’ worth of email to be retrieved  
for each automatic or manual retrieval.  
Use automatic send/receive schedule  
when roaming: Sets whether  
automatic downloading takes place  
when you are roaming. This may result  
in higher connection charges than  
downloading while in your home  
network.  
TIP To save memory, limit the number of  
emails that are downloaded to your  
smartphone by selecting a larger time interval  
for automatically downloading messages or a  
smaller time interval for how many days’  
worth of messages are downloaded.  
When deleting messages: Sets  
whether messages should be deleted  
from the mail server when you delete  
them on your smartphone, or whether  
messages you delete on your  
smartphone should remain on the  
server.  
6
Select Advanced Settings, and then  
select any of the following:  
7
8
Press Done (left softkey) twice.  
Select Download Size Settings.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
132  
     
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
9
Select either of the following:  
means more of your messages will be  
fully downloaded, but message retrieval  
might take longer. You can also choose  
to download message headers only,  
regardless of size.  
10 Press Done (left softkey).  
Selecting which folders sync: Outlook  
email accounts  
When you synchronize Outlook email  
either using the sync cable or wirelessly  
with an Exchange server, messages in the  
following folders sync by default: Inbox,  
Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Deleted Items.  
You can set other folders to sync, or turn  
off sync for certain folders.  
Message format: Sets the format for  
sending and receiving messages. If you  
select HTML, messages sent to you as  
HTML are received with their formatting  
intact. If you select Plain Text, all  
messages are received as plain text.  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select your Outlook email account.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Messages sent to you as plain  
text are always received as plain text, even if  
you select HTML.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Manage Folders.  
Message download limit: Sets the  
size of an incoming message that is  
automatically downloaded. For any  
message that exceeds this size, you  
must manually download the rest of the  
message. Selecting a higher limit  
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R E M A I L S E T T I N G S  
133  
         
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
Working with  
meeting invitations  
You can receive meeting invitations on your  
smartphone in the same way that you  
receive email messages.  
NOTE Use the Calendar application to  
create meeting invitations on your  
4
5
6
Check the box next to any folder name  
to sync that folder. Uncheck the box to  
remove that folder from sync. If the  
folder name does not have a box next to  
it, the folder syncs by default and you  
cannot turn off sync for that folder.  
Here are the key features of meeting  
invitations:  
Meeting invitations appear on your  
smartphone in the Messaging  
application, not in the Calendar  
application.  
(Optional) If a + appears next to a folder  
name, that folder contains subfolders.  
Tap the + to display the subfolders, and  
check or uncheck the box next to any  
subfolder name to include or remove it  
from sync.  
From within the Messaging application,  
you can accept, decline, or tentatively  
accept a meeting invitation.  
Press OK  
.
If you accept an invitation, the meeting  
shows up as an appointment in the  
Calendar application.  
W O R K I N G W I T H M E E T I N G I N V I T A T I O N S  
134  
         
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
You can reply to and forward meeting  
invitations in the same way as email  
messages.  
Sending email  
messages from  
within another  
application  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select the account you want.  
Select a meeting invitation to open it.  
Meeting invitations are displayed with  
this icon:  
.
You can send files such as pictures, videos,  
and ringtones as attachments to email  
4
Do one of the following:  
To accept the invitation: Press  
Accept (left softkey), select whether to  
edit (include comments with) your  
response, and then select OK.  
You can send certain files as attachments  
from within the application where the file is  
created or stored. For example, if you take  
a picture with the camera on your  
smartphone, you can select an option to  
send the picture as an attachment to an  
email message. You can also use this  
feature with videos and sound files. For  
details, see the chapter on the specific  
application.  
To decline or tentatively accept the  
invitation: Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Decline or Tentative.  
You can also use menu items to propose a  
new time, reply to the sender, and flag the  
invitation for follow-up.  
TIP If you receive an updated meeting  
invitation, you can again choose to accept,  
decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a  
meeting cancellation, you don’t need to do  
anything.  
S E N D I N G E M A I L M E S S A G E S F R O M W I T H I N A N O T H E R A P P L I C A T I O N  
135  
       
Y O U R E M A I L  
6
S E N D I N G E M A I L M E S S A G E S F R O M W I T H I N A N O T H E R A P P L I C A T I O N  
136  
CHAPTER  
7
Your text and multimedia  
messages  
If you need to get a short message to a friend or a co-worker  
fast, send a text message from your Palm® TreoPro  
smartphone to their mobile phone or email address.  
If you need more than text to express yourself, use multimedia  
messaging to give your message extra impact by adding a  
photo, video, or sound file.  
Benefits  
Enjoy quick communication  
Share pictures and videos  
Use text messaging to chat with  
friends  
Be as simple or as creative as you  
want  
137  
   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
Sending and  
receiving text and  
multimedia  
Before you use your smartphone to  
send or receive messages, consult your  
wireless service provider for pricing and  
availability of text messaging services.  
Make sure that your phone is on and  
that you’re inside a coverage area (see  
messages  
You can use the Messaging application to  
send and receive brief text messages  
(SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select SMS\MMS.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New > SMS.  
Creating and sending a text message  
4
Enter the recipients name, mobile  
phone number, or email address:  
Each text message can have up to 160  
characters. You can send a message of  
more than 160 characters, but the  
message may be split into several  
messages. If you send a text message to  
an email address, the email address is  
deducted from the 160-character count.  
DID YOU KNOW You can send and receive text  
?
messages even while you are on a phone call.  
This is easiest when using a hands-free  
headset or the speakerphone.  
Enter the first letters of the recipients  
first or last name, the first and last  
initials separated by a space, or the  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
139  
                   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
email address. If a match is found in  
your Contacts list, select the name.  
TIP To add a new My Text phrase, select Edit  
My Text Messages in the list.  
If the recipients name is in an online  
address book, you can find the name  
TIP Some symbols can’t be used in text  
messages. Invalid characters are automatically  
replaced by the Messaging application.  
If the recipients name and mobile  
number are not in your Contacts list,  
enter the full mobile number or email  
address.  
7
(Optional) To attach a file to the  
message, press Menu (right softkey),  
select Insert, and then select the file  
type you want to insert.  
Separate addresses with  
semicolons (;). Enter a semicolon by  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
A vCard is a Contact entry. A  
vCalendar is a Calendar appointment or a task.  
If you attach a file to a text  
pressing Option  
Need to enter an underscore? Press  
Alt and select the character. It’s  
+ K.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
message, you can convert it to a multimedia  
message. Press Menu (right softkey), select  
Advanced Composer, and then see Creating  
instructions.  
the second character in the list.  
5
6
To confirm that addresses you enter are  
valid, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Check Names. An alert appears  
if any names or address you’ve entered  
are not valid.  
8
9
(Optional) Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Spell Check.  
Enter your message, or press Menu  
(right softkey), select My Text, and then  
select a predefined phrase you want to  
insert.  
(Optional) To receive a notification that  
the message has been delivered, press  
Menu (right softkey), select Message  
Options, and check the Request  
message delivery notification box.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
140  
             
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
10 Press Send (left softkey).  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Save to Drafts if you need to finish  
composing your message later.  
Previewing a text message with an  
attached file  
When you attach a file to a text message,  
you can preview the message and view  
detailed information about the attached file.  
If you are sending the message to a  
contact, you can also view information  
about the contact.  
To view detailed information about the  
message, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Show > Message Detail.  
To view detailed information about a  
recipient who is in your Contacts list,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Show > Contact Details.  
1
Create a text message and attach a file  
message).  
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Preview.  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) when you have  
a contacts details displayed to see several  
other options, like permanently blocking future  
messages from this contact.  
Do either of the following. Press OK  
when you have finished.  
4
To view detailed information about the  
attached file, press Contents (left  
softkey), and then press Properties (left  
softkey).  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
141  
         
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
IMPORTANT If your smartphone is  
enrolled with a Yona server, you cannot  
send and receive multimedia messages  
from your smartphone.  
TIP If the file is a picture or video, press EXIF  
(left softkey) to view additional information  
about the file.  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) when you are  
viewing a messages contents to see several  
other options, like saving the attached file with  
a new name.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
Before you use your smartphone to  
send or receive messages, consult your  
wireless service provider for pricing and  
availability of multimedia messaging  
services.  
5
Press OK  
twice to return to the  
message.  
Creating and sending a multimedia  
message  
Make sure that your phone is on and  
that you’re inside a coverage area (see  
Multimedia messages consist of pictures,  
videos, text, and sounds presented as one  
or more slides. You can include any of the  
following items:  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select SMS\MMS.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New > MMS.  
Ringtones: MIDI  
4
Enter the recipients mobile phone  
number or email address:  
Sound clips: AMR, WAV  
Pictures: JPG, GIF, BMP  
Videos: 3GPP, 3GPP2, MPEG4  
Outgoing multimedia messages can be up  
to 300KB by default, but your wireless  
service provider may have a different  
maximum message size.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
142  
                     
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Separate addresses with  
semicolons (;). Enter a semicolon by  
pressing Option  
Need to enter an underscore? Press  
Alt and select the character. Its  
+ K.  
the second character in the list.  
TIP To display the Cc and Bcc address fields,  
navigate to the To field and press Up on the  
5-way.  
Enter the first letters of the recipients  
first or last name, the first and last  
initials separated by a space, or the  
email address. If a match is found in  
your Contacts list, select the name.  
5
6
Select Subject and enter a title for the  
message.  
Select one or more of the following:  
Insert picture/video: Enables you to  
insert a picture or video. You can take a  
new picture or video with the built-in  
camera or insert an existing item.  
If the recipients name is in an online  
address book, you can find the name  
Insert text here: Enables you to enter a  
text caption or message for the slide  
you inserted. You can also tap any of the  
following icons:  
If you have recently called or sent a  
message to the recipient, press  
Menu (right softkey), select Add  
Recipient > From Call History, and  
then select the recipient.  
Insert an emoticon.  
If the recipients name and mobile  
number are not in your Contacts list,  
enter the full mobile number or email  
address.  
Insert a web favorite.  
Insert a predefined phrase.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
143  
         
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Insert a Contacts entry.  
repeat step 7 to add another slide in this  
message.  
Insert a Calendar appointment  
or task.  
TIP If you add more than one slide to a  
message, tap the arrows in the lower right  
corner of the screen to scroll among the  
slides. To delete a slide, scroll to the slide you  
want, press Menu (right softkey), and select  
Slides > Delete Slide.  
Press Done (left softkey) when you  
have finished.  
TIP On the text entry screen, select menu  
items for text size and color, and for the  
background color.  
8
(Optional) To add a vCard (Contacts  
entry), vCalendar (Calendar  
appointment or task), or other file type  
to a message, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Attachment. Press  
Menu (right softkey) again and select  
the type of file you want to add.  
Insert audio: Enables you to record a  
message, such as a voice caption for a  
picture, or insert an existing sound, such  
as a ringtone. To record a new sound,  
tap the record  
icon in the lower-left  
corner of the screen, select Record,  
and record the sound. Select Add when  
you have finished recording.  
TIP To remove an attachment, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Attachment.  
Highlight an attachment, press Menu (right  
softkey), and select Delete. To remove all  
attachments, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Delete All.  
TIP To remove an inserted item, press Menu  
(right softkey), select Remove, and then  
select the item you want to remove.  
9
To change the background color for the  
message, press Menu (right softkey),  
select Options, select Background,  
and then select the color you want.  
7
(Optional) Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Slides > Insert Slide and  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
144  
                   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
10 To change the positioning of text and  
graphics in the message, press Menu  
(right softkey), select Options, and then  
select Text Layout. Select the  
1
On the message compose screen,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Slides > Organize Slides.  
positioning that you want, and press  
Done (left softkey).  
11 Press Send (left softkey).  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can send a special type of  
multimedia message, called a VoiceMail, that  
contains just an audio clip you record. Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select New >  
VoiceMail. Record the clip, address the  
message, and press Send (left softkey).  
2
Do any of the following:  
TIP You can send your message as a text  
message. This may save on data charges, but  
you may lose some formatting, and the  
message text may be truncated. Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Send via SMS.  
Move a slide: Highlight the slide, press  
Menu (right softkey), and select Move  
Forward or Move Backward.  
Change display time for slides: Tap a  
black arrow beneath a slide to increase  
or decrease the duration. The minimum  
duration is two seconds.  
TIP To save your message as a template for  
future messages, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Template > Save as Template.  
Insert slides: Press Insert (left softkey).  
Organizing slides within a multimedia  
message  
Remove slides: Press Menu (right  
If your message contains more than one  
slide, you can change the order of the  
slides and change the duration for each  
slide during playback.  
softkey) and select Delete.  
3
Press OK  
.
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
145  
           
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Setting options for an outgoing  
multimedia message  
6
Select any of the following:  
Delivery: Sets whether to send the  
message now or after a certain time  
interval. For example, if you are  
currently roaming, you might want to  
wait to send messages until you are in  
your home network to save data  
charges.  
You can set send options for a single  
multimedia message. You can also set  
options for all multimedia messages you  
send and receive (see Customizing  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Expiration: Sets how long messages  
remain available to be sent if the  
recipients phone or email address is not  
available when you originally send the  
message. For example, if your  
messages generally contain information  
that will not be useful to recipients after  
an hour, you can set the validity for one  
hour. Select Maximum to allow  
Select SMS\MMS.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New > MMS.  
4
5
Select Custom to create your own  
message, or select a template.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options > Send Options.  
messages to remain available for the  
maximum period of time permitted by  
your wireless service provider.  
Priority: Sets High, Medium, or Low  
priority.  
Category: Sets the message type.  
Some recipients may block certain  
types of messages or allow only certain  
types of messages.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
146  
       
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Delivery/Read report: Sets whether  
Reply (left softkey): Opens the message  
you want to receive confirmation that  
in chat view so you can view its full  
the message has been delivered or has contents and reply to the sender (see  
been read.  
Menu (right softkey) > Delete: Deletes  
the new message.  
TIP To set the options you select as the default  
for all outgoing multimedia messages, press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Set as  
default. To restore the original default  
settings, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Restore factory default.  
Menu (right softkey) > Call sender: Dials  
the senders phone number.  
Menu (right softkey) > Save as read: Puts  
the message in your SMS\MMS Inbox as  
read.  
7
Press Done (left softkey).  
Menu (right softkey) > Dismiss:  
Dismisses the notification and puts the  
message in your SMS\MMS Inbox as  
unread.  
Receiving text messages  
When your phone is on and you are in a  
wireless coverage area, you automatically  
receive new text messages.  
If you have multiple messages, the  
notification includes the number of  
messages.  
When a new message notification appears,  
select one of the following options:  
Receiving multimedia messages  
You can set your smartphone to  
automatically download new multimedia  
messages or to notify you that messages  
are ready to download.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
147  
                 
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
When a new message notification appears, Viewing a text message  
select one of the following options:  
To open a text message, do one of the  
following:  
Press Messaging  
and select  
SMS\MMS. From the Inbox, select the  
message you want to view.  
From a notification, select Reply. The  
message opens in chat view so you can  
view its full contents and reply to the  
sender (see Using Messaging to chat).  
Hide (left softkey): Dismisses the  
notification.Menu (right softkey) > View:  
Opens the message in chat view so you  
can view its full contents and reply to the  
Viewing a multimedia message  
1
To open a multimedia message, do one  
of the following:  
Menu (right softkey) > Dismiss:  
Dismisses the notification and puts the  
message in your SMS\MMS Inbox as  
unread.  
Press Messaging  
and select  
SMS\MMS. From the Inbox, select  
the message you want to view.  
If you have multiple messages, the  
notification includes the number of  
messages.  
From a notification, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select View. The  
message opens in chat view  
displaying the sender and subject (see  
2
Select the message in chat view to view  
the full message with any inserted  
images or files.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
148  
             
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
3
With the message open, do any of the  
following:  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) when you have  
a contacts details displayed to see several  
other options, like permanently blocking future  
messages from this contact.  
View detailed information about the  
attached file: Press Contents (left  
softkey), and then press Properties (left  
softkey).  
TIP Press Menu (right softkey) when you are  
viewing a messages contents to see several  
other options, like saving the attached file with  
a new name.  
Forward the message: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Forward.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
When viewing a multimedia  
Reply to the message: Press Menu  
(right softkey), select Reply, and then  
select a reply method: MMS, SMS, or  
VoiceMail.  
message containing multiple slides, you can  
press Right on the 5-way to move to the next  
slide, or press Left on the 5-way to move to  
the previous slide.  
View detailed information about the  
message: Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Show > Message Detail.  
4
Press OK  
.
Using Messaging to chat  
View detailed information about a  
recipient who is in your Contacts list:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Show > Contact Details.  
When you exchange more than one  
message with a single contact, the  
messages you exchange with that person  
are grouped into a chat session. When you  
select a chat session from your message  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
149  
               
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
list, the upper part of the screen displays all  
messages you’ve exchanged with this  
contact, and the lower part provides a text  
entry area.  
6
7
If an incoming message has a file  
attached, it appears in the chat list with  
this icon:  
. Select the message to  
open it and view the attachment.  
To close the chat session and return to  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
the account Inbox, press OK  
.
Select SMS\MMS.  
NOTE In the Inbox, all messages from a  
chat session are displayed as one item: a  
single conversation. To view individual  
messages within the conversation, select it  
to reopen the chat session.  
To start a new chat or continue an  
existing chat, select the message to  
which you want to reply. The message  
opens in chat view.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
While chat view remains open,  
any new messages you receive from your chat  
partner appear directly on the screen, and you  
do not get a new message notification.  
Using links in messages  
When you receive a text message that  
contains a telephone number, email  
address, or URL, you can dial the number,  
send an email message, or go to the web  
page immediately. Your smartphone  
automatically opens the appropriate  
application from the link.  
4
5
Enter your message. You can use any of  
the menu commands described in  
Press Send (left softkey).  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
150  
       
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
1
2
Open a message in the Inbox or another  
folder.  
Use the 5-way to select the phone  
number, email address, or URL (appears  
as underlined blue text).  
3
For phone numbers, confirm or change  
the number and press Call (left softkey).  
If you receive a multimedia message that  
contains a phone number, email address,  
or URL, tap the item to open a menu of  
actions you can perform.  
4
5
Enter or edit the contact information.  
Press Save (left softkey).  
Adding a contact from a message  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
When you enter or edit a  
You can add a contact name, phone  
contact phone number from a message, you  
can insert one or more pauses by pressing  
Menu (right softkey) and selecting Insert  
Pause. You can also insert an indefinite pause  
that allows you to respond to dialing  
number, or email address to your Contacts  
list directly from a received message. You  
can either create a new contact or add the  
information to an existing contact.  
instructions by pressing Menu (right softkey)  
and selecting Insert Wait.  
1
In an open message or chat session,  
select the name, phone number, or  
address of the contact you want to add.  
Sorting your messages  
2
3
Select Yes.  
You can sort the messages in any folder.  
Select <New Contact> to create a new  
contact entry for this name or address,  
or select an existing contact to add the  
name or address to that entry.  
1
Go to the Inbox or other folder you want  
to sort.  
S E N D I N G A N D R E C E I V I N G T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
151  
   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Sort By.  
Messages you delete are moved to the  
Deleted Items folder. To remove these  
items from your smartphone completely,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Empty Deleted Items.  
Select Message Type, From (sender),  
Received (date received), or Subject.  
Deleting messages  
1
Go to the Inbox or other folder  
containing the message you want to  
delete.  
Setting message  
preferences  
2
Do one of the following:  
To delete one message, highlight it.  
You can set options for both text and  
multimedia messages in the Messaging  
application. You can set options for all  
messages and for multimedia messages  
only.  
NOTE If you highlight a conversation  
containing multiple messages, all of the  
chat messages are marked for deletion.  
To delete multiple consecutive  
messages, tap and drag with the  
stylus to highlight all the messages  
you want to delete.  
You can also set send options for a single  
text message (see Creating and sending a  
text message) and for a single multimedia  
To delete all messages at once, press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Tools  
> Clear “SMS\MMS” and skip to  
step 4.  
Customizing settings for text and  
multimedia messages  
3
4
Press Delete (left softkey).  
1
Press Messaging  
.
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
S E T T I N G M E S S A G E P R E F E R E N C E S  
152  
               
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
2
Do one of the following:  
Use Unicode when necessary:  
Automatically converts a message to  
Unicode language if the receiving  
device requires it.  
If the account list is displayed: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
5
Press OK  
.
If the message list for a specific  
account is displayed: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools >  
Options.  
Customizing additional multimedia  
message settings  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you want to enter  
new server information or change existing  
server information in step 6 below, obtain  
the following from your wireless service  
provider or your multimedia message  
service center:  
3
4
Select SMS\MMS.  
Select either or both of the following:  
Server name  
Gateway  
Port number  
Server address  
Connection method  
Maximum size of outgoing messages  
WAP version  
Request delivery notifications:  
Indicates whether you want to receive a  
confirmation when a message is  
delivered.  
1
2
3
Press Messaging  
.
Select SMS\MMS.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
MMS Options.  
S E T T I N G M E S S A G E P R E F E R E N C E S  
153  
     
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
4
On the Preferences tab, select any of  
the following:  
Allow read report: Sets whether you  
want to receive confirmation that the  
message has been read.  
Retrieval mode: Sets whether  
multimedia messages are downloaded  
automatically both when you are in your  
home network and are roaming,  
messages are downloaded when you  
are in your home network only, or you  
receive a prompt to download  
multimedia messages manually.  
5
6
Select the Blacklist tab to view names  
and phone numbers that you have  
blacklisted. To remove an entry from the  
blacklist, tap and hold on the entry with  
the stylus and select Delete.  
Save sent messages: Specifies that  
sent multimedia messages are to be  
saved in the Saved folder on your  
smartphone.  
Select the Servers tab and do one of  
the following. Press Done (left softkey)  
when you have finished.  
TIP To free up storage space on your  
smartphone, uncheck this option.  
View or edit existing server  
information: Select the server name.  
Reject all messages: Indicates that all  
incoming messages are to be rejected.  
Enter new server information: Select  
New. To enter or edit server  
information, use the information you  
obtained from your wireless service  
provider or multimedia message service  
center.  
Allow delivery report: Sets whether  
you want to receive confirmation that  
the message has been delivered.  
S E T T I N G M E S S A G E P R E F E R E N C E S  
154  
           
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
storage, greater message security, and  
easier filing of messages.  
TIP To see all of the server options, tap and  
drag the scroll bar with the stylus.  
Windows Live Messenger: Enables you to  
see whos online and exchange instant  
messages (IM). Make calls to phones and  
computers (including video calls) and  
exchange pictures and other files.  
Set a server as the default for  
sending multimedia messages  
Highlight the server name and select  
Set As Default.  
7
Press OK  
.
Using Live Search  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Windows Live  
.
Using Windows  
LiveTM  
In the search bar at the top of the  
screen, enter the text you want to find.  
4
5
Press Center  
.
NOTE Windows LiveTM is not supported by  
all wireless service providers.  
Select the item you want from the  
search results. If the item you want  
does not appear, select More to see  
more results.  
Windows Live is a set of services that  
combines online search features, email,  
and instant messaging:  
Setting up Windows Live Mail  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must have an  
existing Windows Live, MSN, or Hotmail  
account to use Windows Live Mail. If you  
do not have an account, use the web  
browser on your smartphone to go to  
hotmail.com, and follow the steps you find  
there to set up an account.  
Live Search: Enables you to search for text  
on the web directly from your smartphone.  
Windows Live Mail: The next generation  
of the Hotmail web-based email  
application. Windows Live Mail offers more  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
155  
                 
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Windows Live  
.
Select Sign in to Windows Live.  
6
7
Press Next (left softkey).  
Check the Live Search bar box to have  
the Live Search bar appear on your  
Today screen. Check the Windows Live  
services box to have Windows Live  
Email and Windows Live Messenger  
appear on your Today screen.  
4
5
The first time you sign into Windows  
Live, press Accept (left softkey).  
Enter your Windows Live, MSN, or  
Hotmail email address and password.  
Leave the Save password box checked if  
you want to have your password  
entered automatically.  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
156  
 
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
8
9
Press Next (left softkey).  
Sync e-mail: Sets whether you want to  
download your Windows Live Mail  
messages to your smartphone (see  
Select any of the following:  
10 Press Next (left softkey).  
Synchronization of Windows Live email  
and contacts (if selected) takes place.  
11 After synchronization has finished,  
press Done (left softkey). Your most  
recently received email message is  
displayed.  
Using Windows Live Mail  
Store Windows Live contacts in your  
mobile phone’s contact list: Sets  
whether you want your Windows Live  
contacts to appear in Contacts. If you  
do not check this box, only your  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that your  
phone is on and that you’re inside a  
Windows Live email messages are  
synchronized with your smartphone.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Windows Live  
.
Merge duplicate contacts: Sets  
whether you want to merge any  
To synchronize email, contact, and/or  
Windows Live Messenger information,  
do the following:  
synchronized Windows Live contact  
with any duplicate contact thats already  
in Contacts, so that there is only one  
entry for this contact. If you leave the  
box unchecked, two entries appear for  
any duplicate entry in Contacts.  
Press Down  
to the field directly beneath the Live  
Search bar.  
to move the highlight  
Press Right or Left until Sync  
appears.  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
157  
 
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Press Center  
. Information is  
Using Windows Live Messenger  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
synchronized for any of the  
applications you selected during  
setup.  
You must have an existing Windows  
Live, MSN, or Hotmail account to use  
Windows Live Messenger. If you do not  
have an account, use the web browser  
on your smartphone to go to  
4
To read your email, do the following:  
With the same field highlighted, press  
Right or Left until Windows  
Live Hotmail appears.  
hotmail.com, and follow the steps to set  
up an account.  
Press Center  
. The Messaging  
application opens, displaying your  
Windows Live Hotmail Inbox. You can  
view, send, and work with messages  
in your Windows Live Hotmail  
account in the same way as with  
messages for any other account.  
Make sure that your phone is on and  
that you’re inside a coverage area (see  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Messenger  
.
Press Sign in (left softkey).  
If you have not already set up a  
Windows Live Mail account on your  
Live Mail), the first time you sign into  
Windows Live Messenger, press  
Accept (left softkey).  
DID YOU KNOW You can also access your  
?
Windows Live Hotmail Inbox by opening the  
Messaging application and selecting your  
Windows Live Hotmail email account.  
TIP You can set an option to have messages  
pushed to Windows Live Mail on your  
smartphone as they arrive on the server. Open  
Windows Live, press Menu (right softkey),  
and select Options. Select Sync schedule,  
select the Sync frequency list, and then  
select As items arrive.  
5
6
If prompted, enter your Windows Live,  
MSN, or Hotmail email address and  
password.  
To send an instant message to a contact  
who is online, highlight the contact  
name and press Send IM (left softkey).  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
158  
   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
Highlight the text entry bar and enter  
your message text.  
Press Voice clip (left softkey) and  
record a voice note by speaking  
clearly with your smartphone held up  
facing you.  
8
9
(Optional) To add an emoticon to your  
message, press Menu (right softkey),  
select Add emoticon, and then select  
the emoticon you want.  
TIP If the contact you want is offline, send an  
email message instead. Highlight the contact  
name and press Send e-mail (left softkey).  
Enter a subject and body text for the email  
message and press Send (left softkey).  
(Optional) To send a picture or other file,  
press Menu (right softkey), select  
Send, and then select the type of file  
you want to send. Capture or select the  
picture or other file you want.  
10 (Optional) To exchange messages with  
more than one person, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Options >  
Add participant. Select the participant  
you want to add.  
7
Do one of the following:  
11 To end the messaging session, press  
Menu (right softkey) and select End  
conversation. If you are exchanging  
messages with more than one person,  
select End all conversations to stop all  
the sessions at once.  
*
*
Text entry bar  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
159  
   
Y O U R T E X T A N D M U L T I M E D I A M E S S A G E S  
7
TIP From the Messenger contacts list screen,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select options  
to add, block, or remove a contact; change  
your status to Busy, Away, and so on; add a  
display picture or personal message; and  
more.  
U S I N G W I N D O W S L I V E T M  
160  
CHAPTER  
8
Your connections to the web  
and wireless devices  
You use the web for so many things: finding driving directions,  
getting news, buying gifts, checking web-based email. With your  
wireless service providers network and your smartphones web  
browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere you go.  
The Bluetooth® wireless technology on your Palm® TreoPro®  
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a  
number of devices. You can also use your smartphone to connect  
your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or your  
favorite photos. Or use the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a public,  
work, or home network.  
Benefits  
Carry the web with you  
Connect your computer to the  
Internet through your smartphone  
Enjoy cable-free connectivity:  
Connect to Bluetooth headsets  
and car kits  
Choose the method of connecting  
to the Internet thats most  
convenient for you  
161  
             
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:  
Browsing the web  
Be sure to subscribe to data services  
from your wireless service provider.  
This is necessary for browsing the web.  
Internet Explorer Mobile provides quick and  
easy access to web pages. You can view  
most sites on your smartphone that you  
can view on your computer, including those  
with security and advanced features, such  
as JavaScript and frames.  
Make sure your phone is on and that  
you’re inside a coverage area (see  
Viewing a web page  
Internet Explorer Mobile supports  
JavaScript, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL),  
and cookies, but does not support plug-ins  
(Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WML script,  
and so on) or Java applets.  
By default, Internet Explorer Mobile scales  
web page content to fit your smartphone  
screen so that you can view most of the  
information without scrolling left or right.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can also start a web  
TIP For additional information on features  
supported by Internet Explorer Mobile, visit  
search from your Today screen by selecting  
the Web search field, entering the item you  
want to find, and pressing Center on the  
5-way.  
DID YOU KNOW The Security certificates and  
?
128-bit SSL strong encryption enable you to  
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,  
banking, and email. Remember, some secure  
sites also require a specific browser and may  
not work with Internet Explorer Mobile. Ask  
the organization for an alternate web address  
(URL) that is compatible with Internet Explorer  
Mobile.  
1
Press Start  
Explorer.  
and select Internet  
TIP If your Today screen is displayed, press  
Internet (right softkey) to open Internet  
Explorer Mobile.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
163  
                           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
2
Highlight the address line, enter the  
address of the web page you want to  
Fit To Screen: Maintains a layout similar  
to what you see on a desktop computer,  
but it makes items smaller and arranges  
the content so that you can see most of  
it without scrolling horizontally.  
view, and press Center  
. To return to  
a recently viewed page, select the  
address line list, and then select the  
web address.  
Desktop: Keeps the same layout and  
size as on a desktop computer, which  
requires both horizontal and vertical  
scrolling.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you browse to a secure web  
page, the lock icon in the address line appears  
closed instead of open.  
Full Screen: Hides the status and  
navigation areas and fills the entire  
screen with the web page. To exit full  
screen mode, press the right softkey, or  
tap and hold anywhere on the screen  
and uncheck Full Screen.  
Show Pictures: Shows or hides  
pictures on web pages. Hiding pictures  
speeds up the time it takes to load  
pages.  
4
Press OK  
Mobile.  
to close Internet Explorer  
3
Press Menu (right softkey), select  
View, and then select one of the  
following:  
One Column: Arranges web pages into  
one column that is as wide as the  
screen, so that you don’t have to scroll  
horizontally.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
164  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Navigating web pages  
email application on your smartphone  
before you can use this feature (see Your  
email).  
Here are some tips on viewing web pages  
and moving around in them:  
Shrink the web page to fit on the screen:  
Press Menu (right softkey), select View >  
Zoom Out. To return to normal view, press  
Zoom In (left softkey).  
View the previous page: Press Back (left  
softkey) or Backspace  
.
Move forward through viewed pages  
after having moved back to a previous  
page: Press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Forward.  
Adjust text size: Press Menu (right  
softkey), select View > Zoom Level, and  
then select the size you want.  
Go to your home page: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Home.  
View page properties: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Tools > Properties.  
Refresh a page: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Refresh.  
View items in a list: Select the list and  
scroll using Up  
or Down  
.
Scroll through the page in One Column  
Cycle between list items: Press Left or  
View or Default View: Press Up  
or  
Right , and then press Center  
to  
Down . In Desktop View, press Up  
,
select a list item.  
Down , Left , or Right to scroll in all  
directions.  
Interact with a form: Press Center  
to  
interact with the form, and then press  
Follow a link: Press Up  
highlight the link, and then press  
Center to go to the selected page. You  
or Down  
to  
Center  
again to stop interacting with  
the form.  
can also tap the link on the screen with the  
stylus.  
Send a link: Press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Tools > Send Link. Select the  
option you want to use to send the link:  
SMS\MMS (text message), MMS  
Send email from a web page: Select the  
address link. You need to configure an  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
165  
                       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
(multimedia message), or an email  
account.  
3
4
(Optional) Select Name and enter a  
different description.  
(Optional) Select Create in, and then  
select the folder where you want to  
create the favorite.  
Creating a favorite  
Favorites let you bookmark a web page so  
that you can instantly access it without  
entering the web address.  
5
Select Add.  
TIP To delete a favorite or folder, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Favorites. Select the  
Add/Delete tab, highlight the item you want  
to delete, and select Delete. Select Yes to  
confirm deletion and press OK.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN First, create the  
folders where you want to store your  
favorites first. After you create a favorite,  
you can’t move it to another folder (see  
Viewing a favorite  
1
2
Go to the page you want to mark as  
a favorite.  
1
Press Start  
and select Internet  
Explorer.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Add to Favorites.  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Favorites.  
TIP When you first open Internet Explorer,  
press Favorites (left softkey) to view your  
favorites.  
3
Select the page you want to view in the  
list.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
166  
           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Organizing your favorites  
To download any other type of file:  
Select the link to the file  
You can create folders to organize your  
favorites. For example, you can store travel  
links in one folder, stock links in another,  
and business links in a third folder.  
3
4
(Optional) To have the file open  
automatically after being downloaded,  
check the Open file after download  
box.  
1
Press Start  
and select Internet  
Explorer.  
Do one of the following:  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Favorites.  
To save the file with its current name  
to the default location (My  
Documents or My Pictures): Select  
Yes.  
3
4
5
Select the Add/Delete tab.  
Select New Folder.  
To save the file with a different name  
or to a different location: Select Save  
As and enter any of the following:  
Enter a name for this folder and select  
Add.  
6
Press OK  
.
Select Name and enter a new name  
for the file.  
Downloading files and images from a web  
page  
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder where you want to save the  
file.  
You can download files that are usable on  
your smartphone, such as new  
Select the Location list, and then  
select where you want to store  
the file: Main memory or Storage  
card. The Storage card option appears  
only if you have an expansion card  
(sold separately) inserted into your  
smartphone.  
applications, MIDI ringtones, or pictures.  
1
Go to the page that contains the link to  
the file you want to download.  
2
Do one of the following:  
To download a picture: Tap and hold  
on the image with the stylus, and select  
Save Image.  
Select Save.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
167  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Copying text from a web page  
1
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > History.  
You can copy text from a web page and  
paste it in other applications.  
(Optional) Tap the Show list in the  
upper-left and select how you want to  
sort the History list.  
1
2
3
Use the stylus to highlight the text you  
want to copy.  
3
Select the web page you want to view.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Copy.  
Customizing your Internet Explorer  
Mobile settings  
Go to the application in which you want  
to paste and position the cursor where  
you want to paste the text.  
1
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Options.  
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
2
On the General tab, set any of the  
following options:  
Edit > Paste.  
TIP If Internet Explorer Mobile does not  
recognize a phone number as dialable, you  
can copy the phone number (as text) and  
paste it into the phone Keypad.  
TIP You can copy the text from the entire web  
page. With the cursor anywhere on the page,  
press and hold Center on the 5-way and  
select Select All Text. Press and hold Center  
again and select Copy.  
Returning to recently viewed pages  
Home page: Sets the page that  
appears when you open Internet  
Explorer Mobile. To set the home page,  
first navigate to that page in Internet  
The History list stores the addresses of the  
pages you visited recently.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
168  
                 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Explorer Mobile, access this settings  
screen again, and select Use Current.  
To select the original home page, select  
Use Default.  
4
Select the Security tab and set any of  
the following options:  
Allow cookies: Sets whether your  
smartphone accepts cookies (small files  
containing info about your identity and  
preferences). The page sends the file  
and stores it on your smartphone.  
Default character set: Sets the  
character set for the web pages you  
view.  
3
Select the Memory tab and set any of  
the following options:  
Clear Cookies: Deletes any cookies  
stored on your smartphone.  
Save links to pages visited in the  
past: Sets how many days of activity  
the History list stores.  
Warn when changing to a page that  
is not secure: Sets whether a message  
appears when you switch from a secure  
page to one that is not secure.  
Clear History: Empties the History list.  
Warn when page content is blocked  
due to security settings: Sets whether  
a message appears when you attempt  
to open a page that does not meet the  
Delete Files: Removes web files that  
you previously viewed or synchronized  
with your computer.  
B R O W S I N G T H E W E B  
169  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
security standards associated with your  
smartphone.  
Protocol (RTSP) website containing the  
content you want to view.  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
5
Press OK  
.
Select Streaming Media  
Press Connect (left softkey).  
.
Working with  
streaming content  
Enter the address of the RTSP website  
containing the media you want to view.  
5
Press Connect (left softkey).  
When you select a link to view streaming  
content in your smartphones web  
browser, the Streaming Media app works  
in the background to display the content.  
You can also access streaming media by  
entering a web address in the Streaming  
Media app itself.  
Viewing streaming content  
Do any of the following while viewing the  
content:  
Begin playback: Tap  
.
Pause playback: Tap  
.
Rewind: Tap  
.
Connecting to streaming content  
Fast forward: Tap  
.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:  
Zoom in or out: Press Up  
on the 5-way.  
or Down  
Be sure to subscribe to data services  
from your wireless service provider.  
Mute the sound: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Mute.  
Make sure your phone is on and that  
you’re inside a coverage area (see  
View the content on the full screen:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Full  
screen.  
Make sure you know the web address  
(URL) of the Real Time Streaming  
W O R K I N G W I T H S T R E A M I N G C O N T E N T  
170  
         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
View content properties: Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Properties.  
amount of content in each chunk, but  
you may have to wait longer for each  
chunk to be streamed.  
Customizing Streaming Media  
Do not show ‘Connect to Internet’  
message: Specifies whether you want  
to be alerted if you attempt to connect  
to a streaming media site when your  
smartphone is not connected to the  
Internet. If this box is checked, your  
smartphone automatically connects to  
the Internet if it is not already  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Streaming Media  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
4
On the Playback tab, select any of the  
following options:  
connected.  
5
Select the Networks tab, and then  
select any of the following options:  
Media Buffer: Content is streamed in  
chunks of several seconds each. The  
interval you select specifies how many  
seconds’ worth of content are sent in  
each chunk. Selecting a higher number  
means that you can view a longer  
Connect via: Specifies the method you  
want to use to connect to the streaming  
website: your wireless service provider  
W O R K I N G W I T H S T R E A M I N G C O N T E N T  
171  
 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
connection (ISP), your work network, or Using WorldMate  
another type of network connection.  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
UDP port range: Specifies the lowest  
and highest port numbers for the  
network to use when searching for UDP  
ports for streaming media.  
Select WorldMate  
.
Press Next (left softkey).  
The first time you open the app, press  
Accept (left softkey).  
6
Press OK  
.
5
Enter your email address, and then  
enter it again to confirm.  
Getting online travel  
information and tools  
With WorldMate, you can gain access to  
your travel itinerary details, global weather  
forecasts, world clocks, currency, clothing  
size and measurement converters, a tip  
and tax calculator, and more.  
6
Make up and enter a password of your  
choice. This does not need to be your  
email account password.  
Downloading the WorldMate application  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Get WorldMate  
.
7
8
Press Submit (left softkey).  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
download and install the software.  
Select the city nearest to your home  
city.  
9
Press Next (left softkey).  
G E T T I N G O N L I N E T R A V E L I N F O R M A T I O N A N D T O O L S  
172  
         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
10 Select an option to access a WorldMate  
Determining your  
GPS location  
feature: Weather Center, Flight  
Center, My Itinerary, Travel Tools, or  
Converters.  
QuickGPS can speed up the process of  
determining your GPS position by  
downloading the latest satellite information  
over your smartphone’s Internet  
connection.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select QuickGPS  
.
Press Center  
to download satellite  
information.  
NOTE For each feature, some options are  
available to WorldMate Professional  
subscribers only. WorldMate Professional  
is a paid service. To subscribe, select Go  
Pro.  
TIP From any screen, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Options to set the interval  
for automatically updating weather and other  
information, set the temperature display  
format, and set whether to automatically  
preview your itinerary.  
To customize QuickQPS, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Options. You can  
choose whether to be notified when your  
GPS satellite information expires, whether  
D E T E R M I N I N G Y O U R G P S L O C A T I O N  
173  
     
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
to automatically download new satellite  
information, and whether to perform an  
automatic download when your  
smartphone is connected to your computer  
using the USB cable.  
Why use a Wi-Fi connection?  
A Wi-Fi connection is especially helpful in  
the following situations:  
You’re outside a coverage area and you  
want to access the web.  
Your your wireless service providers  
plan incurs additional charges for data  
services and you want to minimize data  
service charges by using a Wi-Fi  
connection instead.  
Connecting to a Wi-Fi  
network  
You’re inside a coverage area, but  
outside your wireless service providers  
UMTS (3G or HSDPA) coverage area. (A  
Wi-Fi connection may provide faster  
throughput than a GPRS or EDGE data  
connection.)  
Many environments, such as corporate  
offices, coffee shops, airports, and libraries,  
offer access to a Wi-Fi network. A Wi-Fi  
network is a wireless local area network  
(WLAN) based on the 802.11 standard.  
When you’re within range of an accessible  
Wi-Fi network, you can use your  
You want to maintain a web connection  
while talking on the phone.  
smartphones Wi-Fi feature to connect to  
that network and access the web.  
Are there different types of Wi-Fi  
networks?  
KEY TERM Wi-Fi access point Also called a  
hotspot. A network device with an antenna  
that provides wireless connections to a larger  
network.  
There are two types of Wi-Fi networks:  
Open networks: These networks  
broadcast their name (SSID) and do not  
require you to enter a password or other  
settings. To learn how to connect to an  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
174  
       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
When Wi-Fi is on, your Today screen  
displays Wi-Fi: On.  
Secure networks: These networks may  
broadcast their name, but at the very least,  
they require you to enter a password that  
you get from an administrator (who may  
be, for example, the librarian or the person  
behind the counter at the coffee shop). You  
may also have to get other network  
TIP By default, when your screen turns off, the  
Wi-Fi feature turns off to save power. Wi-Fi  
does not turn back on automatically when  
your screen turns back on. You can adjust the  
Wi-Fi settings to keep Wi-Fi on all the time.  
settings from the system administrator. To  
learn how to connect to a secure network,  
Connecting to an open network  
You can connect to an open network or to a  
secure network for which you already set  
up a connection. If you have access to  
multiple Wi-Fi networks, you can select the  
network to which you want to connect.  
If you’ve already set up a connection to a  
secure network and want to reconnect to  
it, follow the steps in Connecting to an  
NOTE The WEP (wired equivalent privacy)  
encryption method is enabled by default  
and may interfere with your ability to  
connect to a network that broadcasts its  
to learn how to disable WEP encryption.  
Turning the Wi-Fi feature on and off  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
To turn Wi-Fi on, press Wi-Fi  
the side of your smartphone near the  
stylus slot).  
(on  
1
Press Wi-Fi  
(on the side of your  
smartphone near the stylus slot). What  
happens next depends on the state of  
Wi-Fi before you pressed the button:  
To turn Wi-Fi off, press and hold  
Wi-Fi  
.
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
175  
     
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Wi-Fi was already on: Your  
smartphone scans for available  
TIP Narrow the list of networks that appear on  
the Configure Wireless Networks screen by  
selecting Networks to access and then  
selecting Only access points or Only  
computer-to-computer.  
networks and automatically connects  
when possible. If your smartphone does  
not automatically connect and the  
Configure Wireless Networks screen  
appears, highlight the network you  
want, and press Connect (left softkey).  
Some locations, such as airports or coffee  
shops, provide an open network but charge  
a fee to use it. After you connect your  
smartphone to the network, you need to  
open Internet Explorer Mobile and register  
with the Wi-Fi service provider before you  
can check email or browse the web.  
Wi-Fi was off: A notification appears  
listing three available networks. If the  
network you want appears, highlight it  
and press OK (left softkey) to connect. If  
the network you want does not appear,  
select Show all networks, highlight the  
network you want, and press Connect  
(left softkey).  
Connecting to a secure network  
To set up a connection to a secure network  
for the first time, do the following:  
TIP To dismiss the notification without  
1
Press Wi-Fi  
(on the side of your  
connecting to a network, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Dismiss. To turn off the  
notification feature, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Don’t show this message again.  
You can turn the feature back on later (see  
smartphone near the stylus slot). What  
happens next depends on the state of  
Wi-Fi before you pressed the button:  
Wi-Fi was already on: Your  
smartphone scans for available  
networks and automatically connects  
when possible. If your smartphone does  
not automatically connect and the  
2
When the connection message  
appears, press Dismiss (right softkey).  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
176  
     
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Configure Wireless Networks screen  
appears, highlight the network you  
want, and press Connect (left softkey).  
2
Enter the following settings and press  
Next (right softkey):  
Wi-Fi was off: A notification appears  
listing three available networks. If the  
network you want appears, highlight it  
and press OK (left softkey) to connect. If  
the network you want does not appear,  
select Show all networks to open the  
Configure Wireless Networks screen,  
highlight the network you want, and  
press Connect (left softkey).  
Network name: Specifies the SSID  
provided by the system administrator.  
NOTE As you continue with this  
procedure, some screen are not displayed,  
and you can skip those steps.  
Connects to: Sets whether this  
connection connects to the Internet or  
to Work. (You may need to select Work  
to access a corporate intranet.)  
This is a hidden network: Sets  
whether the network broadcasts its  
name. Check this box to connect to  
hidden networks now and in the future.  
This is a device-to-device (ad-hoc)  
connection: Leave this box unchecked  
to connect to a Wi-Fi access point  
(network). Check this box if you’re  
connecting to another device.  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
177  
 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
3
Enter the following settings and press  
password is also known as a  
Next (right softkey):  
preshared key (PSK).  
WPA2: Indicates that the network  
provides government-grade security  
with an AES encryption algorithm.  
WPA2-PSK: Indicates that the  
network is a WPA2 network that  
requires a preshared key (password).  
Data Encryption: Sets the encryption  
method. (The options in this list vary  
based on your Authentication setting.)  
Disabled: Turns data encryption off.  
Authentication: Sets the method used  
to identify devices that connect to the  
network:  
WEP: Turns on the Wired Equivalent  
Privacy encryption method.  
TKIP: Turns on the Temporal Key  
Integrity Protocol encryption method.  
This method is often used to encrypt  
WPA and WPA-PSK connections.  
Open: Indicates that the network  
uses open authentication.  
Shared: Indicates that the network  
uses shared authentication.  
AES: Turns on the Advanced  
Encryption Standard protocol. (This  
method is often used to encrypt  
WPA and WPA-PSK connections.)  
WPA: Indicates that the network is a  
WPA network that uses 802.1x  
protocols.  
WPA-PSK: Indicates that the network  
is a WPA network that requires a  
password that is shared between the  
network and your smartphone. This  
The key is automatically provided:  
Indicates whether you need to specify  
the network key and key index provided  
by your system administrator, or  
whether the network provides this  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
178  
             
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
information. The availability of these  
Disconnecting from a network  
options varies based on your  
Authentication and Data Encryption  
settings.  
To disconnect from a Wi-Fi network, do  
one of the following:  
To save any settings you entered, so  
that your smartphone automatically  
connects to this network the next time  
you are within range and the Wi-Fi  
feature is turned on, press and hold  
4
Enter the following settings and press  
Finish (right softkey):  
Wi-Fi  
to turn off the Wi-Fi feature.  
To remove the network settings from  
memory, so that your smartphone does  
not automatically connect to this  
network the next time you are within  
range and the Wi-Fi feature is turned on,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Remove Settings.  
Use IEEE 802.1x network access  
control: Lets you set these parameters  
if required by the network.  
Customizing Wi-Fi settings  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Wi-Fi Prefs . The Main and  
and select Settings.  
EAP type: Specifies the Extensible  
Authentication Protocol type.  
Advanced tabs show the status of the  
Wi-Fi feature and display information  
about an active Wi-Fi connection.  
5
Press OK  
.
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
179  
           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
3
Select the Power Mode tab and set any  
of the following:  
automatically connects to that  
network.  
Always On: Leaves the Wi-Fi feature  
on, and your smartphone searches for  
available networks whenever the  
screen is awake. If a network to which  
you previously connected is available,  
your smartphone automatically  
connects to that network. When this  
mode is enabled, you can prevent  
your smartphone from searching for  
networks by pressing and holding  
Wi-Fi  
off.  
to turn the Wi-Fi feature  
Power Save Mode: Adjusts power  
consumption between maximizing  
network connection performance and  
maximizing battery life.  
4
Select the LEAP tab and do any of the  
following:  
Connection: Sets when the Wi-Fi  
feature is on and when your  
smartphone attempts to search for  
networks.  
On button press: Leaves the Wi-Fi  
feature off until you press Wi-Fi  
to turn it on. After you turn the Wi-Fi  
feature on, your smartphone searches  
for available networks. If a network to  
which you previously connected is  
available, your smartphone  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
180  
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Create a new LEAP entry: Select New.  
User: Specifies your username for this  
A LEAP entry is a security feature that  
protects the WEP key.  
Wi-Fi network.  
Password: Specifies the password  
associated with the username you  
specified on this screen.  
Modify an existing entry: Highlight the  
entry and select Modify. Enter the new  
information.  
Server: Specifies the name of the  
Internet Information Server (IIS) that  
stores the security certificate  
Delete an entry: Highlight the entry  
and select Delete.  
information for this Wi-Fi network.  
5
Select the Enroll tab and set any of the  
following:  
Retrieve Certificate: Obtains a  
certificate based on the information  
your entered.  
NOTE Ask your network administrator for  
the username, password, and server name  
for the Wi-Fi network you want to access.  
6
Press OK  
.
Customizing advanced Wi-Fi settings  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Wi-Fi  
and select Settings.  
.
3
On the Wireless tab, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Advanced.  
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
181  
 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Customizing network adapter settings  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Wi-Fi  
and select Settings.  
.
3
Select the Network Adapters tab and  
set any of the following:  
4
Select either of the following:  
Turn on available network  
notification: Sets whether a list of  
networks appears when you turn on the  
Wi-Fi feature.  
Turn off Wi-Fi if not connected in:  
Sets the time interval for turning off the  
Wi-Fi feature if your smartphone does  
not connect to a network.  
My network card connects to: Sets  
the default network connection type for  
your smartphone: Work or The  
Internet.  
5
6
Press Save (right softkey).  
Press OK  
.
C O N N E C T I N G T O  
A
W I - F I N E T W O R K  
182  
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
Tap an adapter to modify settings:  
Connecting to  
devices with  
Lets you edit network adapter  
information. Select the adapter you  
want, and then select either of the  
following tabs:  
Bluetooth®  
wireless technology  
With the Bluetooth® wireless technology  
on your smartphone, you can connect to a  
number of Bluetooth devices such as a  
headset or hands-free car kit, as well as to  
other phones, handhelds, or piconets.  
When you connect to another device, you  
create a partnership (also referred to by  
terms such as trusted pair, trusted device,  
or pairing) with that device. If your  
computer is enabled with Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can also  
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone  
as a wireless modem.  
IP Address: Sets whether the server  
assigns an IP address, or whether you  
enter a specific IP address.  
Name Servers: Lets you enter the  
addresses of primary and alternate  
DNS and WINS servers.  
4
Press OK  
.
C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
183  
           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
in this section to add other devices to your  
trusted device list, such as your computer.  
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for  
example, your smartphone and a hands-free  
device—that can connect because each  
device finds the same passkey on the other  
device. After you form a partnership with a  
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to  
connect with that device again.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Check your battery level before  
establishing a Bluetooth connection. If the  
battery level is low, you can’t make a  
Bluetooth connection.  
KEY TERM Piconet An ad-hoc network of  
devices that uses Bluetooth wireless  
technology to connect one master device with  
up two seven active slave devices.  
Entering basic Bluetooth settings  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth.  
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices  
that you trust to communicate with your  
smartphone. When communicating with  
trusted devices, your smartphone skips the  
discovery process and creates a secure link  
as long as the device is within range.  
Bluetooth range is up to 10 meters  
3
Select the Mode tab and check the Turn  
on Bluetooth box.  
(30 feet) in ideal conditions. Performance  
and range are affected by physical  
obstacles, radio interference from nearby  
electronic equipment, and other factors.  
When you configure a headset (see  
device), the headset is automatically added  
to your trusted device list. Follow the steps  
C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
184  
           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
3
4
5
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth.  
DID YOU KNOW You can also turn the  
?
Bluetooth feature on and off from your Today  
screen. Select your wireless service provider  
name or Phone off to open Comm Manager,  
select Bluetooth, and then press Exit (left  
softkey).  
Select the Mode tab and check the Turn  
on Bluetooth box.  
Select the Devices tab, and then select  
Add new device.  
4
Check or uncheck the Make the device  
visible to other devices box.  
Check this box to allow Bluetooth  
devices that are not on your Trusted  
Device list to request a connection with  
your device. Your device remains  
accessible to other devices until you  
uncheck the box.  
Requesting a connection with another  
Bluetooth device  
6
Wait for your smartphone to search for  
devices and to display the device list.  
1
If necessary, prepare the device with  
which you want to connect to accept a  
new connection. Check the devices  
documentation for details. Be sure to  
find out if the device has a predefined  
passkey that you need to enter on your  
smartphone in step 8.  
2
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
185  
       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
7
8
Highlight the device with which you  
want to connect and press Next (right  
softkey). If the device you want does  
not appear, select Refresh.  
the Bluetooth feature on your  
smartphone is turned on. The range  
varies greatly depending on  
environmental factors. The maximum is  
about 10 meters (30 feet).  
Enter an alphanumeric passkey  
between 1 and 16 characters long and  
press Next (right softkey).  
TIP To delete the established partnership with  
a device, go to the Bluetooth Settings screen  
and select the Devices tab. Highlight the  
connection you want to remove, press and  
hold Center on the 5-way, and then select  
Delete. Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
The deleted device can no longer  
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices  
have a predefined passkey. If your device  
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in  
the documentation for that device. Other  
devices provide a screen where you enter  
a passkey that you make up. In either case,  
you must use the same passkey on both  
your smartphone and the other device. We  
recommend that where possible, you  
make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric  
characters (letters and numerals only) to  
improve the security of your smartphone.  
The longer the passkey, the more difficult it  
is for the passkey to be deciphered.  
automatically connect with your smartphone.  
Accepting a connection from another  
Bluetooth device  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth.  
3
4
Select the Mode tab and check the Turn  
on Bluetooth box.  
9
If the passkey is not built-in, enter the  
same passkey on the other Bluetooth  
device.  
If you have already set up a partnership  
with the transmitting device, your  
smartphone is ready to receive the info.  
10 Press Done (left softkey).  
If you haven’t set up a connection,  
check the Make this device visible to  
other devices box to let the device find  
You can now communicate with this  
device whenever it is within range and  
C O N N E C T I N G T O D E V I C E S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
186  
     
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
your smartphone and request a  
connection.  
You can set up Internet Connection Sharing  
in one of two ways:  
5
6
When prompted to add this device,  
select Yes.  
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer using the USB cable.  
Enter the same passkey on your  
smartphone and on the Bluetooth  
device.  
If your computer is enabled with  
Bluetooth wireless technology, set up  
your smartphone as a wireless modem  
using the built-in Bluetooth technology.  
7
(Optional) To give the partnership a  
more meaningful name, select Display  
Name and enter a new name.  
Setting up a USB Internet Connection  
Sharing connection  
8
9
Press Finish (right softkey).  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you have a  
Windows XP computer and you  
When your smartphone is receiving  
info, a notification tells you that a  
transmission is in progress. To stop the  
transmission, press Cancel (right  
softkey). To close the notification, press  
Hide (left softkey).  
synchronize your smartphone with  
ActiveSync® desktop software on your  
computer using the USB cable, you must  
disable the ActiveSync USB connection.  
Open the ActiveSync window on your  
computer, select File > Connection  
Settings, and uncheck the Allow USB  
connections box.  
Using your device as  
a wireless modem  
1
2
3
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer using the USB cable.  
Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is the  
feature that converts your smartphone into  
a modem so that you can access the  
Internet from your computer.  
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Internet Sharing  
.
U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S  
A
W I R E L E S S M O D E M  
187  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
4
Select the PC Connection list, and then  
select USB.  
3
You should see an icon representing  
your smartphone. Double-click this icon  
to make sure that “Network Access  
Point” or something similar appears in  
the list of Bluetooth services.  
5
6
Press Connect (left softkey).  
On your computer, open your web  
browser to confirm that you can  
connect to the Internet.  
TIP Don’t see your smartphone icon or the list  
of services? Check the documentation  
included with your computer, or contact your  
computer manufacturer for help. Different  
computer models use different terminology  
for the Bluetooth connection features.  
Creating a Bluetooth Internet Connection  
Sharing connection  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN  
Make sure your smartphone is visible  
4
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Programs.  
Create a partnership between your  
smartphone and your computer. We  
recommend that you initiate the  
partnership from your smartphone (see  
5
6
Select Internet Sharing  
.
Select the PC Connection list, and then  
select Bluetooth PAN.  
NOTE Keep the default setting on the  
Network Connection list.  
1
2
On your computer, double-click the icon  
to open the Bluetooth connections  
window. Check the documentation  
included with your computer for  
instructions.  
7
8
Press Connect (left softkey) and follow  
the wizard to set up Internet Sharing.  
On your computer, follow the steps to  
accept or enable a Bluetooth PAN  
connection with your smartphone.  
Check the documentation included with  
your computer for instructions.  
Select the option to view devices within  
range.  
U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S  
A
W I R E L E S S M O D E M  
188  
 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
9
After you have connected, on your  
computer, open your web browser to  
confirm that you can connect to the  
Internet.  
U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S  
A
W I R E L E S S M O D E M  
189  
 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
8
U S I N G Y O U R D E V I C E A S  
A
W I R E L E S S M O D E M  
190  
CHAPTER  
9
Your photos, videos, and  
music  
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family,  
pets, and your most recent vacation?  
Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?  
Your Palm® TreoPro smartphone solves both problems. You  
can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—  
videos, too. And theres no need to carry an expensive MP3  
player, because you can play music on your smartphone.  
Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion  
card (sold separately) and then listen through your stereo  
headphones.  
Benefits  
Never be far from your favorite  
people, places, and songs  
Avoid having to use a separate  
photo viewer, MP3, CD, or  
mini-disc player  
Arrange your photos, videos, and  
songs  
191  
   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
For information about installing desktop  
sync software and about synchronizing  
with your computer, see Installing the  
Synchronizing your  
pictures, videos, and  
music  
Windows XP  
NOTE We strongly recommend using  
Windows Media Player for synchronizing  
music files.  
You can synchronize pictures, videos, and  
music files between your smartphone and  
your computer so that changes you make  
show up on both your computer and your  
smartphone. How synchronization happens  
depends on two conditions:  
Do the following to synchronize pictures,  
videos, and music files that you originally  
captured on or copied to your  
smartphone.  
Operating system: Do you use Windows  
XP or Windows Vista®?  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on the option to  
Sync direction: Are you transferring files  
from your smartphone to your computer, or  
from your computer to your smartphone?  
1
2
Sync normally as you would with the  
desktop sync software.  
NOTE The following procedures do not  
apply to Windows Media Player. To sync  
files that are in a Windows Media Player  
library on either your smartphone or your  
To find synchronized pictures, videos,  
and music on your computer, go here:  
C:\Documents and  
Settings\<Username>\My  
Documents\Treo My Documents. This  
folder has subfolders for My Music, My  
Pictures, and My Videos.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R P I C T U R E S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
193  
           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Do the following to synchronize pictures,  
videos, and music files that originate on  
your computer.  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB cable.  
NOTE Most ActiveSync desktop software  
options are available only when your  
smartphone is connected to your  
computer.  
2
On your computer, double-click the  
ActiveSync®  
icon in the taskbar in  
3
4
Under Information Type, double-click  
Files to view a list of all synchronized  
files.  
the lower-right corner of your computer  
screen to open the ActiveSync desktop  
software window.  
TIP If Files doesn’t appear under Information  
Type, open the Tools menu and select  
Options. Make sure the Files box is checked.  
TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in  
the taskbar, click Start > Programs >  
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the  
ActiveSync window.  
Do either of the following:  
To copy a file from your computer to  
your smartphone, click Add, browse  
to and highlight the file, and then click  
Open.  
To delete a file from the Treo My  
Documents folder on your computer  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R P I C T U R E S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
194  
     
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
and from your smartphone, highlight  
3
Select Connect without setting up  
the file name and click Remove.  
your device.  
4
5
Select Pictures, Music and Video.  
NOTE If you receive an error while  
synchronizing files, make sure that all of  
the files you’re trying to sync are closed on  
both your computer and your smartphone.  
Select X new pictures/video clips are  
available for import.  
To synchronize pictures, videos, and music  
files that originate on your computer, use  
Windows Media Player (see Synchronizing  
TIP If a Treo My Documents sync folder has  
been created on your computer, you can also  
synchronize by dragging files into the  
appropriate subfolder under that folder.  
Camera  
Windows Vista  
NOTE We strongly recommend using  
Windows Media Player for synchronizing  
music files.  
Your smartphone comes with an  
easy-to-use, built-in, 2-megapixel camera  
with up to 8x digital zoom. You can use the  
camera to take and view pictures and  
videos and send them to your friends and  
family. To add a personal touch to your  
smartphone, use your pictures as your  
Today screen background and as caller ID  
images, or use your videos to create video  
ringtones.  
Do the following to synchronize pictures,  
videos, and music files that you originally  
captured on or copied to your  
smartphone.  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer using the USB cable.  
You can receive and view pictures and  
videos, and send pictures and videos as  
attachments or multimedia messages (see  
2
On your computer, click Start > All  
Programs > Windows Mobile Device  
Center.  
C A M E R A  
195  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
picture to a contact (see Adding a contact).  
You can also move pictures and videos to a  
computer by synchronizing your  
Sports: Captures a sequence of  
3, 5, 7, or 10 still images with a  
single button press.  
smartphone with your computer.  
Burst: Captures a sequence of  
up to 30 still images while the  
Center button is being held  
down.  
Selecting camera modes  
By default, the camera on your smartphone  
is in picture  
mode, to capture standard  
still images (see Taking a picture). You can  
change modes to any of the following:  
To switch camera modes, do the following:  
1
2
Press and hold the Side button.  
Video: Captures video clips.  
Press Left or Right until the icon  
for the mode you want appears in the  
upper-left corner of the screen.  
MMS video: Captures video  
clips suitable for sending as  
attachments to multimedia  
messages.  
*
Contacts picture: Captures still  
images and immediately gives  
you the option to assign them to  
a contact.  
Panorama: Captures a  
sequence of still images  
continuously and allows you to  
combine them into a panoramic  
view.  
*
Mode icon  
C A M E R A  
196  
 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Taking a picture  
TIP If you see the Video or MMS Video icon in  
the upper-left corner of the screen, press Left  
or Right on the 5-way until one of the camera  
icons appears.  
By default, pictures are stored in the My  
Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you  
want to store your pictures on an  
expansion card, you can change where  
Camera settings). For information on  
accessing your pictures on your Windows  
XP computer, see Windows XP.  
2
3
Aim your smartphone as you would any  
camera to frame your subject in the  
smartphone screen.  
(Optional) If the onscreen controls are  
not displayed, press Up  
to display  
DID YOU KNOW Pictures are captured and  
?
the controls and tap the screen with the  
stylus to open the Quick Settings. Tap  
any of the following settings repeatedly  
to toggle among the options for that  
item:  
stored in 16-bit color, JPG format. Resolution  
settings range from a low end of QQVGA (120  
x 160 pixels) to a high end of 2 megapixels  
(1600 x 1200 pixels). You can change the  
default setting. See Customizing your Camera  
settings for details.  
1
Press and hold the Side button.  
Resolution: Sets the image quality.  
C A M E R A  
197  
         
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
White balance: Specifies the light  
conditions.  
4
5
(Optional) In all modes except picture  
mode, with the controls displayed,  
press Up  
or Down  
to change the  
Brightness: Sets the brightness level.  
zoom level. The zoom indicator appears  
on the left side of the screen.  
TIP When the Quick Settings are open, press  
Left or Right on the 5-way to adjust the  
brightness setting. If you use the stylus, tap  
the + or - icon to increase or decrease the  
brightness setting.  
Do the following for the mode you are  
using:  
Picture or Contacts picture: Press  
Center  
to capture the picture or  
start the self-timer.  
Storage: Specifies whether to save the  
picture to your smartphone or to an  
expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone. The  
expansion card option appears only if  
you have an expansion card inserted  
into your smartphone.  
Panorama: Press Center  
picture you want to take.  
for each  
Sports: Press and hold Center  
following the movement of your  
subject.  
while  
Burst: Press and hold Center  
while  
the camera takes consecutive shots.  
Self-timer: Lets you set a self-timer  
with a delay of 2 seconds or 10  
seconds.  
6
Hold your smartphone still until the  
picture renders. After the picture has  
been captured, it appears on the Review  
screen. Select one of the following:  
Go back to the Camera screen to  
take another picture.  
TIP You can set additional options for the  
Delete the picture.  
C A M E R A  
198  
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Send the picture as an attachment videos are stored. For information on  
to a multimedia or email  
message.  
accessing your videos on your computer,  
View the picture in the Pictures &  
Videos application (see Pictures &  
Videos).  
1
2
Press and hold the Side button.  
Press Left or Right until the video  
or MMS video  
icon appears in  
the upper-left corner of the screen.  
NOTE In Contacts picture mode only, a  
prompt appears asking if you want to  
assign the picture to a contact. Select Yes,  
and then select a contact from the list or  
press New (left softkey) to create a new  
contact for the picture.  
3
4
Adjust the position of your smartphone  
until you see the subject you want to  
record on the screen.  
(Optional) If the onscreen controls are  
not displayed, press Up  
to display  
the controls and tap the screen to open  
the Quick Settings. Tap any of the  
following settings repeatedly to toggle  
among the options for that item:  
TIP Check the Don’t show again box to turn  
off the prompt. If you turn the prompt off, you  
can’t save a picture to contacts. To turn the  
Resolution: Sets the image quality.  
White balance: Specifies the light  
conditions.  
Recording a video  
Brightness: Sets the brightness level.  
Videos can be any length, provided you  
have enough storage space available. By  
default, videos are stored in the My  
Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you  
want to store your videos on an expansion  
card (sold separately), see Customizing  
your Camera settings to change where  
TIP When the Quick Settings are open, press  
Left or Right on the 5-way to adjust the  
brightness setting. If you use the stylus, first  
tap the + or - icon to specify whether you  
want to increase or decrease the brightness  
setting.  
C A M E R A  
199  
         
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Storage: Specifies whether to save the  
video to your smartphone or to an  
expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone. The  
expansion card option appears only if  
you have an expansion card inserted  
into your smartphone.  
7
8
When you’re finished recording, press  
Center to stop recording.  
After the video has been captured, it  
appears on the Review screen. Select  
one of the following icons:  
Go back to the Camera screen to  
capture another video.  
Delete the video.  
TIP You can set additional options for the  
Send the video as an attachment  
to a multimedia or email  
message.  
View the video in Windows Media  
Customizing your Camera settings  
1
2
3
Press and hold the Side button.  
Tap the Menu icon.  
On the Capture Settings tab, set any of  
the following options. Not all options  
appear in all camera modes.  
5
6
(Optional) With the controls displayed,  
press Up or Down to change the  
zoom level. The zoom indicator appears  
on the left side of the screen.  
Effect: Sets a special effect such as  
grayscale or sepia.  
Time Stamp (camera, sports, and  
burst modes only0: Sets whether the  
Press Center  
to start recording.  
C A M E R A  
200  
       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
date and time are displayed on your  
captured pictures.  
4
Select the Advanced tab and set any of  
the following options. Not all options  
appear in all camera modes.  
Direction (panorama mode only):  
Sets the direction in which images are  
to be combined into a panorama.  
Capture Format: Sets the format you  
want for captured still images.  
Shutter Sound: Sets whether the  
camera makes a sound when you press  
Stitch Count (panorama mode only):  
Sets the number of pictures that you  
want to be combined.  
Center  
.
Grid (camera mode only): Sets  
whether an onscreen grid appears to  
help position the subjects of still  
pictures.  
Capture Speed (sports and burst  
modes only): Sets the speed for  
capturing still pictures.  
Snapshots (sports mode only): Sets  
Keep Backlight: Sets whether to turn  
the backlight on or off when using the  
camera. This overrides your smartphone  
backlight settings when you are using  
the camera.  
the number of shots to be captured  
with each press of Center  
.
Quality: Sets the JPG image quality for  
still pictures.  
Metering Mode: Sets whether the  
camera measures the amount of light  
around the center of the image or the  
average amount of light around the  
entire image to determine the best  
exposure value.  
Review Duration: Sets the time length  
that a captured picture or image is  
displayed before it is automatically  
saved and you return to the Camera  
screen. Select No Limit if you don’t  
want a time limit. Select No Review if  
you want captured items to be saved  
immediately.  
Storage: Sets whether to save items to  
your smartphone or to an expansion  
card (sold separately).  
C A M E R A  
201  
   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Flicker Adjustment: Sets the rate to  
Right or Left to increase or  
reduce flicker on the camera screen.  
decrease the value.  
Record with Audio (video and MMS  
video modes only): Sets whether to  
include audio when recording.  
Show Reminder (Contacts picture  
mode only): Sets whether an alert  
appears asking whether you want to  
assign the captured picture to a contact.  
Prefix: Sets whether to include the date  
or the date and time as the prefix in  
captured item file names. When Default  
is selected, the prefix for pictures is  
IMAGE and the prefix for videos is  
VIDEO.  
5
Press OK  
.
Pictures & Videos  
NOTE If you save pictures to an expansion  
card (sold separately), you cannot select a  
prefix. Pictures saved to a card are always  
given the IMAGE prefix.  
Viewing a picture  
In addition to viewing the pictures you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view pictures captured on many popular  
digital cameras or downloaded from the  
Internet. Your smartphone supports the  
following picture formats:  
Counter: Resets the file-naming  
counter back to 1.  
Recording Limit (video mode only):  
Sets whether there is a maximum size  
or length for recorded videos.  
1
JPG  
PNG  
BMP  
GIF  
Image Properties: Adjusts properties  
such as contrast, saturation, hue, and  
sharpness for capture images. After you  
select the property you want, press  
Press Start  
Videos.  
and select Pictures &  
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
202  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
2
If your pictures are not displayed in  
Thumbnail View, tap the Show list in  
the upper-left corner, select My  
Documents, and then select My  
Pictures.  
Documents, and then select My  
Videos.  
3
4
Select the video you want to view. For  
more info on viewing videos, see  
3
4
Select the picture you want to view.  
Press OK  
to return to Thumbnail  
Press OK  
to return to Thumbnail  
View.  
View.  
TIP To view pictures or videos in a different  
folder, tap the Show list in the upper-left, and  
then select the album you want to view.  
Viewing a video  
In addition to viewing the videos you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view videos captured on many popular  
digital cameras or streamed from  
websites. Your smartphone supports and  
streams the following types of video files:  
Viewing a slide show  
1
Press Start  
and select Pictures &  
Videos.  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Play Slide Show. The slide show plays  
automatically.  
1
MPEG-4  
3GPP2  
3
Press Center  
to display the slide  
3GPP  
show toolbar, which you can use to  
Rotate , Play , Pause , Reverse  
WMV, WMA, AVI  
RTSP Streaming  
, Forward , and Stop  
show.  
the slide  
Press Start  
and select Pictures &  
Videos.  
2
If your pictures are not displayed in  
Thumbnail View, tap the Show list in  
the upper-left corner, select My  
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
203  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Sending a picture or video  
TIP You can also beam an item to a nearby  
device. Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Beam.  
You can send a picture or video to other  
picture-enabled mobile smartphone  
devices or to an email address as an  
attachment.  
TIP If you have set up Windows Live on your  
smartphone (see Using Windows LiveTM), you  
can send a picture to the web storage space  
of your Windows Live account. From there,  
you can share the picture with other web  
users. Highlight the picture, press Menu (right  
softkey), and select Send to your space.  
You cannot send copyrighted pictures or  
videos that appear with a lock icon in  
Thumbnail View.  
1
2
3
Highlight the picture or video you want  
to send.  
Creating a caller ID picture  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Send.  
You can add a picture to a contact entry  
when you create the entry (see Adding a  
contact). Follow these steps if you want to  
add a picture to an existing contact, or to  
replace an existing contact’s picture.  
Select the option you want to use to  
send the picture or video: an email  
account, a multimedia message (MMS),  
or a voice multimedia message  
(VoiceMail).  
1
2
3
Highlight the picture you want to use as  
a caller ID picture.  
4
When the Messaging application opens,  
address and send the message  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Save to Contact.  
Select the contact to whom you want to  
assign the picture, or press New (left  
softkey) to create a new contact to  
whom you want to assign the picture.  
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
204  
           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Organizing pictures and videos  
1
2
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select the folder you want to view.  
You can move or copy pictures and videos  
to other folders or between your  
smartphone and an expansion card.  
Tap the Sort By list in the upper-right  
and select the sort method: Name,  
Date, or Size.  
1
Highlight the picture or video you want  
to move or copy.  
Using a picture as the Today screen  
background  
2
Do one of the following:  
Move the picture or video: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Edit >  
Cut.  
1
2
Highlight the picture you want to use.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Set as Today Background.  
Copy the picture or video: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Copy.  
3
4
Select the Transparency level list and  
select the appropriate level. Use a  
higher percentage for a more  
transparent picture and a lower  
percentage for a more opaque picture.  
TIP To create a new location for storing the  
picture or video, press Menu (right softkey)  
and select Edit > New Folder.  
Press OK  
to return to Thumbnail  
View.  
3
4
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select the location where you want to  
place the picture or video.  
Editing a picture  
For more extensive edits, download your  
picture or video to your computer and edit  
it in your favorite graphics program. Then  
sync the picture or video back to your  
smartphone.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Paste.  
You can also view a specific folder or  
expansion card and arrange the pictures  
and videos by name, date, or size.  
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
205  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
1
2
Select the picture you want to edit.  
Deleting a picture or video  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
1
2
3
Highlight the picture or video you want  
to delete.  
3
Do any of the following:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete.  
To rotate the picture 90 degrees,  
press Rotate (left softkey).  
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
To crop the picture, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Crop. Tap and drag  
the stylus to highlight the area to  
crop. Tap inside the box to crop the  
picture.  
Renaming a picture or video  
1
2
3
4
Highlight the picture or video you want  
to rename.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Properties.  
To adjust the brightness and contrast  
levels of the picture, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select  
Enter a new name for the picture or  
video.  
AutoCorrect.  
Press OK  
to return to Thumbnail  
To undo an edit, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Undo.  
View.  
To cancel all unsaved edits you made  
to the picture, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Revert to Saved.  
Customizing picture playback settings  
1
Press Start  
and select Pictures &  
Videos.  
4
To save your edited picture, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Save As. Enter  
a new name for the picture and press  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Options.  
OK  
.
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
206  
           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
3
On the General tab, set any of the  
following options:  
4
Select the Slide Show tab, and set any  
of the following options:  
Use this picture size: Sets the size of  
pictures you send with the Messaging  
application.  
During slide shows, optimize for  
viewing: Sets whether pictures are  
optimized for portrait or landscape  
format during slide shows.  
When rotating a picture, rotate 90  
degrees: Sets the direction in which  
pictures rotate.  
Play screensaver when connected to  
my PC and idle for 2 minutes: Sets  
whether the pictures in your My  
Pictures folder are used as a  
screensaver when your smartphone is  
connected to your computer and  
ActiveSync® desktop software is not  
running.  
5
Press OK  
to return to  
Thumbnail View.  
P I C T U R E S  
&
V I D E O S  
207  
       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
video thumbnail after synchronizing the  
files.  
Windows Media  
Player Mobile  
You can listen to these music, audio, and  
video files through the speaker on the back  
of your smartphone or through stereo  
headphones.  
Windows Media Player Mobile can play  
music, audio, and video files that are  
stored on your smartphone or on an  
expansion card (sold separately) in any of  
the following file formats:  
Synchronizing Windows Media Player  
library files  
Use the Sync feature in the desktop  
version of Windows Media Player to  
transfer digital music, audio, video, and  
playlist files between your computer and  
an expansion card or your smartphone.  
Using the Sync feature ensures that the  
files are transferred correctly.  
WMA  
WMV  
MP3  
3GP  
AAC  
AAC+  
MPEG-4  
TIP For tips on using the desktop version of  
Windows Media Player, go to the Help menu  
in Windows Media Player on your computer.  
DID YOU KNOW You can also download  
animated GIF files and view them in Internet  
Explorer Mobile.  
?
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:  
Be sure you have Windows Media  
Player 10 or later installed on your  
computer. On a Windows XP computer,  
Windows Media Player 10 must be  
installed on your computer before you  
IMPORTANT You must have QuickTime  
Player version 6.5 or later installed on your  
computer to play videos recorded by your  
smartphone. You can download the videos  
from an expansion card or you can click the  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
208  
                                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
install ActiveSync desktop software.  
You can install ActiveSync desktop  
software from your smartphone. (If you  
are having trouble, see My video and  
music files won’t sync.) If you need to  
install Windows Media Player, you can  
download it for free from  
Customize the playlists that will be  
synchronized box.  
Windows Media Player 11: Select the  
arrow below the Library tab, and then  
select the type of item you want to  
synchronize: pictures, music, or videos.  
Select the arrow below the Sync tab,  
and then select Treo > Set Up Sync.  
Check the Sync this device  
NOTE Windows Media Player 11 is already  
installed on Windows Vista computers.  
automatically box. To sync with an  
expansion card, select the arrow below  
the Sync tab, and then select Storage  
Card > Set Up Sync.  
To sync Windows Media Player files  
with your computer, set the Media sync  
option on your smartphone (see  
5
Select the playlists you want to sync.  
On a Windows Vista computer, select  
the All Photos and All Videos playlists  
to synchronize pictures and videos  
between your smartphone and your  
computer.  
1
2
On your computer, open Windows  
Media Player.  
(Optional) If you’re transferring media  
files to an expansion card, insert a  
32MB or larger expansion card into your  
smartphone.  
NOTE If the playlist you want does not  
appear, the items you want to synchronize  
may reside in a folder that does not sync  
with Windows Media Player. Sync those  
items by following the correct sync  
procedure described in Synchronizing your  
3
4
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB sync cable.  
Do one of the following:  
Windows Media Player 10: When the  
Device Setup Wizard opens on your  
computer, click Automatic. Check the  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
209  
 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
6
Click Finish to begin the transfer. If you  
are transferring files to an expansion  
card, be patient; transferring media files  
to an expansion card can take several  
minutes.  
TIP If you can’t find a item you want, update  
the library (see Working with libraries).  
5
6
7
Select the item you want to play (such  
as a song, album, or artist name).  
To find your synchronized files, update the  
library in Windows Media Player. The files  
appear in the updated libraries.  
Press Play (left softkey). See the next  
page for playback controls.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
any of the following during playback:  
Playing media files on your smartphone  
Library: Displays the Library screen so  
you can select a different song to play.  
1
Press Start  
Media Player.  
and select Windows  
2
If the Library screen is not displayed,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Library.  
Shuffle/Repeat > Shuffle: Plays the  
Now Playing playlist in random order. A  
check appears next to this command  
when it is on.  
3
4
Tap the Library list in the upper-left and  
select the library you want to use.  
Shuffle/Repeat > Repeat: Plays the  
Now Playing playlist repeatedly. A check  
appears next to this command when it  
is on.  
TIP To play a file that is not in a library, go to  
the Library screen, press Menu, and select  
Open File.  
Stop: Ends playback.  
Select the category containing the  
media file you want to play. Continue  
selecting categories until the list of  
individual items (videos, songs, albums,  
or artist names) appears.  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
210  
           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Playback controls  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can play streaming files  
Use any of the following onscreen controls  
during playback:  
from the web. To play an MMS (Microsoft  
Media Streaming) file, press Menu on the  
Library screen and select Open URL. Select  
URL and enter the website address, or select  
History and select a site you’ve visited  
before.  
or Center  
plays the current file.  
or Center  
pauses the current file.  
or Left skips to the beginning of the  
current file or to the previous file.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you close the Windows  
Media Player Mobile window, your music  
continues to play in the background.  
or Right skips to the next file.  
sets the point from which playback  
begins. Tap and drag the slider to change  
the current position.  
Working with libraries  
A library represents each of the storage  
locations available to Windows Media  
Player Mobile, such as your smartphone  
(My Device) or an optional expansion card,  
sold separately (My Storage Card). Each  
library contains links to the media files in  
that location. Windows Media Player  
Mobile usually updates the My Device  
library automatically, but you must  
manually update the My Storage Card  
library.  
or Volume button increases the  
volume level.  
or Volume button decreases the  
volume level.  
turns the sound on or off.  
displays a video using the full screen.  
displays a website where you can find  
music and videos to play.  
TIP If you don’t see a media file that you  
added, manually update the library.  
indicates the rating of the current file.  
Select the star to change the rating.  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
211  
               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
1
2
Press Start  
Media Player.  
and select Windows  
of soothing songs for a long flight. When  
you synchronize, your favorite playlists are  
automatically copied to your smartphone.  
Your playlists appear in your libraries (in the  
My Playlists category).  
If the Library screen is not displayed,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Library.  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Update Library.  
A temporary playlist, called Now Playing,  
appears on the Now Playing menu. It lists  
the currently playing file, as well as any  
files that are queued up to play next. You  
can add to, modify, or clear the files on the  
Now Playing playlist.  
Wait for the files to be added, and then  
select Done.  
TIP To delete an item from a library, highlight  
the item and then press and hold Center on  
the 5-way to open the shortcut menu. Select  
Delete from Library, and select Yes to  
confirm the deletion.  
1
Go to the Now Playing screen:  
If you are on the Library screen,  
select the Now Playing category.  
If you are on the Playback screen,  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you move files between your  
press Now Playing (left softkey).  
smartphone and an expansion card, be sure to  
update your libraries, or you won’t be able to  
see the files in their new location.  
Working with playlists  
A playlist is a list of media files that play in  
a specific order. You can use playlists to  
group audio files together or video files  
together for convenient playback. For  
example, in the desktop Windows Media  
Player, you can create a playlist of upbeat  
songs for when you exercise and a playlist  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
212  
         
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
2
Do any of the following:  
Customizing Windows Media Player  
Mobile  
To move a file up or down one slot,  
highlight the file and select Move  
1
If you are on any screen other than the  
Up  
or Move Down  
.
Playback screen, press OK  
to go to  
the Playback screen.  
TIP You can also move a file in the Now  
Playing playlist by tapping and dragging it to a  
new position.  
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
On the Playback tab, set any of the  
following options:  
To add a file, highlight the file, select  
Add , press Menu (right softkey),  
and select Queue Up.  
To delete a file from the playlist,  
highlight the file and select  
Remove  
.
To view more info about a file,  
highlight the file and select  
Properties  
.
To remove all items from the Now  
Playing playlist, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Clear Now  
Playing.  
Show time as: Sets whether the time  
remaining or time elapsed appears in  
the Playback screen.  
Pause playback while using another  
program: Sets whether playback  
continues if you switch to another  
application.  
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
213  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
9
Resume playback after a phone call:  
Sets whether playback continues after  
you finish a phone call.  
7
8
Select the Skins tab and select  
Previous or Next to set the player’s  
background.  
Select the Buttons tab to change any of  
the available button settings:  
4
Select the Video tab and set any of the  
following options:  
Play video in full screen: Sets whether  
videos automatically play in full screen  
format.  
Scale to fit window: Sets whether  
videos are automatically scaled to fit the  
Playback screen.  
5
Select the Network tab and set the  
following options:  
Protocol: Enables and disables the  
available protocols. You must select at  
least one protocol. You can also set a  
UDP Port.  
To assign a button, highlight the item  
you want to set, select Assign, and  
press the button you want to use for  
that item.  
Internet connection speed: Specifies  
the speed of your network connection,  
and specifies whether you want the  
device to detect connection speed.  
To restore an items factory setting,  
highlight the item and select Reset.  
To unassign an item, highlight the  
item and select None.  
6
Select the Library tab and set whether  
you want to see the Library or Playback  
screen when you open Windows Media  
Player Mobile.  
9
Press OK  
.
W I N D O W S M E D I A P L A Y E R M O B I L E  
214  
                   
CHAPTER  
10  
Your personal information  
organizer  
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those  
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® TreoPro smartphone is all  
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with  
you wherever you go.  
You never lose your information, even if your battery is  
completely drained. All your personal information is backed up  
each time you synchronize, and your information is kept private  
when you use the security features available on your  
smartphone. Also, you can easily share info with others  
electronically.  
Benefits  
Track current, future, and past  
appointments  
Set reminders for appointments,  
birthdays, important tasks, and  
more  
Make to-do lists that get done  
215  
   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
TIP If you have set up a Windows Live account  
(see Using Windows LiveTM), you can save the  
contact as a Windows Live contact. A  
Windows Live contact synchronizes with your  
Windows Live contacts list but not with  
Microsoft Outlook on your computer  
Contacts  
Adding a contact  
1
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
2
3
Press New (left softkey).  
4
Use the 5-way navigator to move  
between fields as you enter  
information.  
Select the type of contact to create:  
Outlook Contact: This type of contact  
is stored in the Contacts application on  
your smartphone and synchronizes with  
the Contacts application in Microsoft  
Office Outlook® on your computer.  
NOTE For a SIM contact, you can enter a  
name and phone number only.  
SIM Contact: This type of contact is  
stored on the SIM card in your  
smartphone and does not synchronize.  
If you use the SIM card with another  
smartphone, you can access any  
contacts on the SIM card (see Using  
C O N T A C T S  
217  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
To assign the entry to one or more  
categories, select Categories and  
then check the categories under  
which you want this entry to appear.  
To add a new category, press New  
(left softkey), enter the category  
TIP Take some time to scroll down through all  
the fields in a new contact. There are fields for  
multiple addresses, phone numbers, email  
addresses, and much more.  
TIP Be sure to enter mobile numbers and  
email addresses in the correct fields so that  
Messaging can find this info when you  
address a message and Calendar can find your  
contacts when you want to invite them to  
meetings.  
name, and press OK  
.
5
6
(Optional) To add a note to an entry,  
select the Notes tab.  
After you have entered all the  
information, press OK  
.
Here are some helpful tips for entering  
info:  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If you want to create a new  
To enter complete name or address  
(work, home, or other) information,  
tap the arrow on the right side of the  
line and enter the information in the  
box that appears. When finished, tap  
outside the box to accept the  
contact that shares information with an  
existing contact—for example, they both work  
at the same company—you can make a copy  
of the first contact and then edit only the  
fields you need to change for the new contact.  
In the contacts list, highlight the first contact,  
press Menu (right softkey), and then select  
Copy Contact.  
information and close the box.  
To add a caller ID picture that displays  
when that person calls, select  
Picture, and then select Camera and  
take a picture, or select an existing  
picture from Thumbnail View.  
Viewing or changing contact information  
1
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
2
In the Contacts list (viewed by name),  
begin entering any combination of  
letters from the contacts first and/or  
To assign a ringtone to the entry,  
select Ring tone and select a tone.  
C O N T A C T S  
218  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
last name. If you use both first- and  
last-name letters, separate them by a  
space.  
5
6
Make changes to the entry as  
necessary.  
Press OK  
.
You can type letters from the last name  
first. For example, entering SM finds  
both Smilla Anderson and John Smith.  
Entering SM AN finds both Smilla  
Anderson and Ann Smith.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can find a contact by  
company name. Open Contacts, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select View By >  
Company. Select a company name to see the  
contacts who work there.  
3
Select the entry you want to open.  
TIP To view a particular group of contacts,  
press Menu (right softkey), select Filter, and  
then select the category you want to view.  
TIP You can also find a contact by tapping the  
first letter of the first or last name in the  
alphabetical index at the top of the Contacts  
list screen.  
TIP You can quickly send a text message to a  
contact from within the Contacts application.  
Select the contact name, press Menu (right  
softkey), and select Send Text Message.  
DID YOU KNOW When you select a contact  
?
entry, you are presented with several options  
for contacting the person, depending on what  
information you have entered for the contact.  
For example, you may see options for calling a  
number associated with the contact, sending  
an email to the contacts email address, or  
calling the last number you dialed to call the  
contact. Select a phone number to dial, or  
select a messaging option to create a new  
message addressed to the contact.  
Deleting a contact  
1
2
3
4
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
In the Contacts list, highlight the  
contact you want to delete.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete Contact.  
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
C O N T A C T S  
219  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Customizing Contacts  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:  
1
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
Make sure you are accessing Exchange  
Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003  
upgraded to Service Pack 2.  
2
3
Go to the Contacts list.  
Add access to the online address book  
to your smartphone. See Adding an  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
After adding the online address book,  
you must synchronize with the  
Exchange server in order for the  
Company Directory option to appear.  
Show alphabetical index: Displays the  
alphabet at the top of the Contacts list.  
You can use this index to find a contact.  
Show contact names only: Enables  
you to fit more names on the Contacts  
list by hiding everything but the  
contacts name.  
1
2
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
Press Menu (right softkey), select  
Company Directory, enter the name of  
the contact, and select Search.  
Area code: Specifies the default area  
code for new contact entries.  
Sending a contact  
5
Press OK  
.
Your smartphone provides multiple options  
for sending a contacts information to  
someone else.  
Finding a contact in an online address  
book  
In addition to having contacts on your  
device, you can also access contact  
1
Go to your Today screen and press  
Contacts (left softkey).  
information from your organization’s online  
address book or Global Address List (GAL).  
2
In the Contacts list, highlight the  
contact you want to send.  
C O N T A C T S  
220  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Using SIM Manager  
one of the following options:  
You can manage the contacts on your SIM  
card, including deleting numbers and  
Beam a contact to a nearby device:  
Select Send Contact > Beam, and then transferring numbers between the card  
select the receiving device.  
and the Contacts application on your  
smartphone.  
Send a text message containing the  
contact information: Select Send  
Contact > Text Messages. Select  
which contact information you want to  
send, and press Done (left softkey).  
Address the text message and press  
Send (left softkey).  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select SIM Manager  
.
TIP You can also open SIM Manager from  
within the Contacts application. On the  
Contacts list, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select SIM Manager.  
Send a multimedia message  
containing the contact information:  
Select Send as vCard. Address the  
multimedia message and press Send  
(left softkey).  
3
4
Highlight the contact you want.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
the option you want to edit the contacts  
information, delete the contact, copy it  
to the Contacts application, and more.  
TIP You can also send a message to the  
highlighted contact. Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Send MMS (Mobile) or  
Send VoiceMail (Mobile).  
TIP You can create a new SIM contact directly  
in SIM Manager by pressing New (left  
softkey).  
5
Press OK  
.
C O N T A C T S  
221  
       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
TIP If a contact has more than one phone  
number, you can automatically copy one or  
more of the numbers to the SIM card. In SIM  
Manager, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Tools > Options. Check the boxes next  
to the numbers you want automatically copied  
to the SIM card and press OK.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If your schedule contains a  
conflict—two appointments that overlap—you  
can see the conflict in both Day View and  
Week View.  
Month: Shows your schedule for a  
whole month.  
A morning appointment  
Calendar  
An afternoon appointment  
Both morning and afternoon  
appointments  
Displaying your calendar  
1
2
Press Calendar  
.
An all-day event  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
View.  
Year: Shows a calendar for a six-month  
period.  
3
Select one of the following views:  
Agenda: Shows your daily schedule in  
list format. Upcoming appointments are  
bold; past appointments are dimmed.  
TIP To switch views, press the left softkey.  
Don’t confuse the view name displayed above  
the left softkey with the current view. The left  
softkey displays the name of the next view  
you see when you press the key.  
Day: Shows your daily schedule in  
day-planner format. Day View displays a  
horizontal time strip at the top to show  
at a glance when you have  
4
Use the 5-way to move to another day,  
week, month, or year (depending on the  
current view).  
appointments.  
Week: Shows your schedule for an  
entire week.  
C A L E N D A R  
222  
                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Creating an appointment  
TIP You can display your appointments on your  
Today screen (see Selecting which items  
1
2
Press Calendar  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New Appointment.  
Adding an alarm reminder to an event  
1
2
Create an event and then select it.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
3
4
Select Reminder, and then select  
Remind me.  
Enter the number of minutes, hours,  
days, or weeks before the event you  
would like to receive the alarm.  
3
4
5
6
Enter a subject (description) and a  
location.  
Select Starts and select the starting  
date and time.  
Select Ends and select the ending date  
and time.  
1
2
Press OK  
.
TIP To pencil in” an appointment, open the  
appointment, select Status, and then select  
Tentative.  
1
2
Number of time units  
Type of time units  
5
Press OK  
.
C A L E N D A R  
223  
       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Creating an untimed event  
4
5
6
Select the starting and ending dates.  
An untimed event, such as a birthday,  
anniversary, or vacation, does not occur at  
a particular time of day. These events  
appear as banners at the top of your  
calendar; they don’t occupy blocks of time.  
For example, “Submit Final Draft” in the  
screenshot shown below is an untimed  
event.  
Select All Day, and then select Yes.  
Press OK  
.
Scheduling a repeating appointment  
1
2
3
Create an appointment or untimed  
event and then select it.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
Select Occurs, and then select a repeat  
pattern. To create a repeat pattern,  
select Edit pattern and follow the  
onscreen instructions.  
DID YOU KNOW An untimed event can last  
?
longer than a day.  
1
Press Calendar  
.
TIP To enter a birthday or an anniversary,  
create an untimed event that repeats every  
year.  
4
Press OK  
.
Sending a meeting request  
You can email meeting invitations to  
contacts who use Outlook or Outlook  
Mobile.  
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New Appointment.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create contact  
entries with email addresses for the people  
you want to invite to a meeting (see Adding  
Enter a subject (description).  
C A L E N D A R  
224  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
a contact). You can’t access contact entries The next time you synchronize, the  
without email addresses from your  
calendar.  
meeting request is sent to the attendees.  
When attendees accept your request, the  
meeting is automatically added to their  
schedules. When you receive their  
1
2
Create an event and then select it.  
response, your calendar is updated as well.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
Replying to a meeting request  
3
4
Select Attendees.  
You receive and reply to meeting requests  
in the Messaging application (see Working  
with meeting invitations). If you accept or  
tentatively accept an invitation, it shows up  
as an appointment in your Calendar.  
Select Add Required Attendee, and  
then select the name of the contact you  
want to invite. To invite other attendees,  
select Add Required Attendee, and  
then select the names.  
5
(Optional) To invite optional attendees,  
select Add Optional Attendee, and  
then select the names.  
Marking an event as sensitive  
If other people have access to your  
Outlook calendar on your computer and  
you don’t want them to see an  
appointment, you can mark that  
appointment as private to hide it from other  
Outlook users.  
DID YOU KNOW If you are using Exchange  
?
Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 with  
Service Pack 2, you can use your corporate  
Global Address List to find contact information  
for an attendee. Select Attendees, select Add  
Required Attendee or Add Optional  
Attendee, press Menu (right softkey), and  
then select Company Directory. Enter the  
name of the attendee and select Find.  
1
2
Create an event and then select it.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit.  
6
Press OK  
.
C A L E N D A R  
225  
             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
3
Select Sensitivity, and then select one  
4
Press OK  
.
of the following:  
Organizing your schedule  
Personal: Displays the event on your  
smartphone and on your computer.  
Meeting attendees or recipients see  
“Please treat this as Personal” near the  
top of an open appointment.  
Use categories to view various types of  
events.  
1
2
Create an event and then select it.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Private: Displays the event on your  
smartphone and on your computer.  
Meeting attendees or recipients see  
“Please treat this as Private” near the  
top of an open appointment. If you sync  
with an Exchange server, other users  
who can access your folders can’t see  
your private events; they see private  
events as unavailable time slots.  
Edit.  
3
Select Categories and check the  
categories that apply to this event.  
To add a new category, press New (left  
softkey), enter the category name, and  
press OK  
.
Confidential: Displays the event on  
your smartphone and on your computer.  
Meeting attendees or recipients see  
“Please treat this as Confidential” near  
the top of an open appointment.  
TIP If you don’t see an option on the screen,  
press Down on the 5-way to scroll to other  
options. For example, when editing an event,  
you don’t see the Sensitivity option until you  
scroll toward the bottom of the entry.  
4
5
Press OK  
two more times.  
After you assign events to categories,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Filter.  
C A L E N D A R  
226  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
6
Select the type of events you want to  
view.  
Start in: Specifies which view is  
displayed when you open Calendar.  
1st day of week: Specifies Sunday or  
Monday as the first day of the week for  
all Calendar views.  
TIP Wonder why you’re not seeing all the  
events in your day? Check to make sure that  
the filter is set to All Appointments.  
Week view: Specifies whether five, six,  
or seven days appear in Week View.  
Deleting an event  
Show half hour slots: Specifies  
whether time slots appear in hour or  
half-hour increments in Day View and  
Week View.  
1
2
Highlight the event you want to delete.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete Appointment.  
3
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
Show week numbers: Specifies  
whether week numbers (1–52) appear  
in Week View.  
Customizing Calendar  
1
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Options.  
3
Select the Appointments tab and set  
any of the following options:  
2
On the General tab, set any of the  
following options:  
C A L E N D A R  
227  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Set reminders for new items:  
Specifies whether a reminder is  
automatically added to new events and  
how long before the event the reminder  
appears. You can override this setting  
for individual events.  
Sending an appointment  
1
2
Press Calendar  
.
Highlight the appointment you want to  
send.  
3
Select one of the following:  
Beam an appointment to a nearby  
device: Press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Beam Appointment. Select the  
receiving device.  
Show icons: Specifies which icons  
appear next to events.  
The event has a reminder.  
The event repeats in a specified  
pattern.  
Send a multimedia message  
containing the appointment: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Send as  
vCalendar. Address the multimedia  
message and press Send (left softkey).  
The event has a note attached.  
A location has been assigned to the  
event.  
The event is a meeting.  
Tasks  
The event is marked private.  
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks  
you need to complete and to keep a record  
of completed tasks.  
TIP Not all icons appear in all Calendar views.  
Send meeting requests via: Specifies  
the email account used to send meeting  
requests.  
Adding a task  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
4
Press OK  
.
Select Tasks  
.
T A S K S  
228  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
3
4
5
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
New Task.  
Occurs: Indicates if the task repeats at  
regular intervals and how often it  
repeats.  
Enter a description of the task in the  
Subject field.  
Reminder: Sets an alarm for this task  
and indicates when you want to be  
reminded.  
Set any of the following:  
Categories: Assigns the task to one or  
more categories. To add a new  
category, press New (left softkey), enter  
the category name, and press OK  
.
Sensitivity: Marks this task as Normal,  
Personal, Private, or Confidential (see  
descriptions of these terms).  
6
7
(Optional) Select the Notes tab and  
enter additional text for the task.  
Priority: Specifies the priority level for  
this task. Later you can arrange your  
tasks based on the importance of each  
task.  
Press OK  
.
Status: Indicates whether the task is  
now completed.  
Starts: Specifies when the task begins.  
Due: Specifies the due date for the  
task.  
T A S K S  
229  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Organizing your tasks  
TIP You can also add a task by selecting the  
Tasks entry bar at the top of the task list  
screen, entering the task description, and  
pressing Center on the 5-way. Select the  
icons to the left of the bar to set the task as  
high or low priority.  
1
In the Tasks list, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Filter.  
2
Select which tasks you want to view:  
All Tasks, Recently Viewed,  
No Categories, Active Tasks,  
Completed Tasks, or a specific  
category, such as Business or Personal.  
TIP You can display your tasks on your Today  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Sort By.  
Checking off a task  
Select the sort method: Status,  
Priority, Subject, Start Date, or  
Due Date.  
1
Highlight the task you want to check off.  
Deleting a task  
1
2
Highlight the task you want to delete.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete Task.  
3
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
Customizing Tasks  
1
2
Go to the Tasks list.  
2
Press Complete (left softkey).  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
TIP You can also mark a task complete by  
tapping the check box next to the task on the  
Tasks list.  
DID YOU KNOW Overdue tasks appear in red.  
?
T A S K S  
230  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
3
Set any of the following options:  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Windows XP  
computer, to take advantage of all the sync  
features available in the Notes application,  
install ActiveSync desktop software from  
your smartphone (see Installing the  
Set reminders for new items:  
Automatically adds a reminder to new  
tasks. The default reminder is set to  
8:00 on the morning the task is due. You  
can override this setting for individual  
tasks using the Reminder field on the  
task entry screen.  
Creating a note  
1
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Show start and due dates: Displays  
task start and due dates in the Tasks  
list.  
Select Notes  
.
Press New (left softkey).  
Do one of the following:  
Show Tasks entry bar: Displays the  
Tasks entry bar at the top of the Tasks  
list.  
4
Press OK  
.
Notes  
Notes are a great way to capture thoughts,  
questions, and meeting notes on your  
smartphone. You can also create a voice  
note or add a recording to an existing note.  
Type the text with the keyboard.  
If you turned on writing mode (see  
Customizing Notes), write the text  
with the stylus.  
N O T E S  
231  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Press Menu (right softkey), select  
Draw, and draw a sketch with the  
stylus, crossing at least three ruled  
lines.  
5
Press OK  
.
Creating a voice note  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Notes  
.
*
Do one of the following:  
*
Voice note controls  
To create a new voice note: Press  
New (left softkey).  
6
7
Speak into the microphone on your  
smartphone, or hold it close to another  
sound source.  
To add a voice recording to an  
existing note: Open the note to which  
you want to add the recording.  
When you finish recording, tap the  
Stop  
icon. A Recording  
icon  
4
5
If the voice note controls are not visible  
at the bottom of the screen, press  
Menu (right softkey) and select View  
Recording Toolbar.  
appears in the note or note list,  
depending on where you recorded the  
note.  
8
Press OK  
.
Tap the Record  
icon.  
N O T E S  
232  
     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Organizing your notes  
DID YOU KNOW You can add several voice  
?
You can rename your notes, move notes to  
another folder, and move notes between  
your smartphone and an expansion card  
(sold separately) inserted into your  
smartphone.  
notes within a single note.  
TIP To play a recording, select the voice note  
in the Notes list, or open the note containing  
the recording and tap the Recording icon. Tap  
the controls at the bottom of the screen to  
control playback and volume.  
1
2
3
4
Go to the Notes list and highlight a note  
you want to move or rename.  
Creating a note from a template  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Rename/Move.  
1
2
Go to the Notes list.  
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select Templates. If you do not see the  
Templates folder, select More Folders.  
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the note.  
Select Folder, and then select the  
folder in which you want to store the  
note.  
3
4
5
6
Open the template you want to use.  
Enter the information.  
Press OK  
.
5
6
Select Location, and then select Main  
memory or Storage Card. The Storage  
Card option appears only if you have an  
expansion card (sold separately)  
Rename the note and move it to the  
appropriate folder. See Organizing your  
notes for details.  
inserted into your smartphone.  
TIP To create a new template, open the note  
you want to save as a template. Press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Tools > Rename/  
Move. Select Name and enter a name for the  
template. Select the Folder list and select  
Templates. Press OK.  
Press OK  
.
TIP To create a new folder, go to the Notes list,  
tap the Show list in the upper-left, and select  
Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name for  
the folder, and press OK.  
N O T E S  
233  
             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
10  
Deleting a note  
Default template: Specifies the default  
template for new notes.  
1
2
3
Go to the Notes list and highlight the  
note you want to delete.  
Save to: Indicates the default location  
where new notes are stored.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete.  
Record button action: Specifies what  
happens when you press and hold the  
Side button to record a voice note while  
in another application: whether the  
Notes application opens or whether you  
stay in the current application. This  
option applies only if you have changed  
the function of the Side button to open  
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
Customizing Notes  
1
2
Go to the Notes list.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
3
Set any of the following options:  
Default mode: Makes the default entry  
mode either Writing or Typing. The  
default is Typing; if you change it to  
Writing, you can write notes directly on  
the screen using the stylus.  
TIP Tap Global Input Options to set options  
for entering text in any application (see Setting  
4
Press OK  
.
N O T E S  
234  
               
CHAPTER  
11  
Your Microsoft Office and  
other document tools  
Your Palm® TreoPro smartphone enables you to take your  
office with you—including your Microsoft Office files. With  
Microsoft Office Mobile®, you can carry, create, view, and edit  
Microsoft Word, Excel®, and OneNote files directly on your  
smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint®  
files on your smartphone. You can keep updated copies of the  
files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you  
can work on them in the most convenient location at any time.  
You can also use Adobe Reader to view PDF files on your  
smartphone.  
Benefits  
Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint,  
and OneNote files on your  
smartphone  
Improve productivity by taking  
important docs, spreadsheets, and  
presentations with you  
Work with PDF files  
235  
               
In this chapter  
Word Mobile®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
PowerPoint Mobile® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Excel Mobile®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Adobe® Reader® LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Synchronizing files that are on your  
smartphone: Windows XP or Windows  
Vista  
Synchronizing your  
Microsoft Office files  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on the option to  
You can create and edit Microsoft Office  
files on your computer or on your  
smartphone and then synchronize the files  
so that changes you make show up on both  
your computer and your smartphone. How  
synchronization happens depends on two  
conditions:  
To synchronize files that you capture on or  
copy to your smartphone, simply follow  
one of the procedures for synchronizing  
with your computer described in  
Operating system: Do you use Windows  
After you synchronize, you can view and  
edit the items on your computer see  
XP or Windows Vista®?  
Sync direction: Are you transferring files  
from your smartphone to your computer, or  
from your computer to your smartphone?  
Synchronizing files that are on your  
computer: Windows XP  
For information about installing desktop  
sync software and about synchronizing  
with your computer, see Installing the  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB cable.  
NOTE Most ActiveSync desktop software  
options are available only when your  
smartphone is connected to your  
computer.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E F I L E S  
237  
     
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
2
On your computer, double-click the  
ActiveSync®  
icon in the taskbar in  
the lower-right corner of your computer  
screen to open the ActiveSync desktop  
software window.  
TIP If Files doesn’t appear under Information  
Type, open the Tools menu and select  
Options. Make sure the Files box is checked.  
4
Do either of the following:  
To copy a file from your computer to  
your smartphone, click Add, browse  
to and highlight the file, and click  
Open.  
TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in  
the taskbar, click Start > Programs >  
Microsoft ActiveSync to open the  
ActiveSync window.  
To delete a file from the file sync  
folder on your computer and from  
your smartphone, highlight the file  
name and click Remove.  
NOTE If you receive an error while  
synchronizing files, make sure that all of  
the files you’re trying to sync are closed on  
both your computer and your smartphone.  
TIP If a Treo My Documents sync folder has  
been created on your computer, you can also  
synchronize by dragging files into the  
appropriate subfolder under that folder.  
3
Under Information Type, double-click  
Files to view a list of all synchronized  
files.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E F I L E S  
238  
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Synchronizing files that are on your  
computer: Windows Vista  
Synchronization Settings dialog box (under  
On this computer, synchronize the files in  
this folder).  
1
On your computer, copy or save the file  
to the Documents\Documents on  
usernames Smartphone folder.  
Windows Vista: Open the Documents\  
Documents on username’s Smartphone  
folder.  
DID YOU KNOW The Documents on  
?
On your smartphone, you can find the  
synchronized file by doing either of the  
following:  
usernames Smartphone folder is created  
when you select the option to sync Files.  
Press Start  
Mobile. Select the application that  
opens the file: Word Mobile , Excel  
Mobile , PowerPoint Mobile . or  
and select Office  
2
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB cable.  
Synchronization takes place  
automatically.  
OneNote Mobile  
.
Where are the changes I made to my file?  
Press Start  
then select File Explorer  
Show list in the upper-left and select  
My Device > My Documents.  
, select Programs, and  
. Tap the  
Don't look for the changed file in its original  
location on your computer. Only the  
synchronized version contains the changes,  
and that version is in the file sync folder. To  
find this folder, do one of the following:  
Word Mobile®  
Windows XP: On your computer desktop,  
double-click the file sync folder icon. This is  
a shortcut to the file sync folder.  
With Microsoft Office Word Mobile®, you  
can create and edit documents and  
templates and save them as DOC, RTF,  
TXT, and DOT files. You can also edit  
Windows XP: In ActiveSync desktop  
software, double-click Files. The location of  
the file sync folder appears in the File  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
239  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Microsoft Office Word documents and  
templates that you create on your  
computer. However, keep in mind that  
some of the information and formatting  
may be lost when you save the document  
on your smartphone.  
The following features are partially  
supported in Word Mobile:  
Picture bullets: Regular bullets are  
supported.  
Revision marks: Documents appear as  
though all revisions were accepted; if the  
document is saved, revision marks are lost.  
DID YOU KNOW If you have a PDF file (.pdf),  
?
you can view the file using Adobe Reader.  
Press Start, select Programs, and then select  
Adobe Reader (see Adobe® Reader® LE).  
Table styles: Some or all of the formatting  
is lost if the document is saved.  
Underline styles: Unsupported styles are  
mapped to one of the four supported  
styles: regular, dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/  
wide.  
The following features are not supported in  
Word Mobile:  
Backgrounds.  
Legacy Pocket Word files: You can open  
PSW files, but if you edit a file, you need to  
save it in DOC, RTF, TXT, or DOT format.  
Bidirectional text.  
Document protection.  
Metafiles.  
The following features are not supported  
on your smartphone, but they remain in the  
file so that when you open the file on your  
computer, they appear as expected:  
Artistic page borders. Lined page  
borders are supported.  
Password-protected files. Remove  
password protection on your computer  
before opening the file on your  
smartphone.  
Fonts and font sizes: Original fonts are  
listed on your smartphone and are mapped  
to the closest font available.  
Shapes and text boxes.  
Smart tags.  
Footnotes, endnotes, headers, and  
footers.  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
240  
               
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Lists: Indented lists are mapped to the  
closest indentation level supported by  
Word Mobile.  
3
In the document list, select the  
document you want to open.  
TIP To zoom in or out, press View (left  
softkey), select Zoom, and then select the  
zoom level.  
Page breaks: Although not displayed, all  
page breaks, except a break placed at the  
end of a document, are retained in the  
document.  
Creating a document from a template  
Creating a document  
1
2
Go to the documents list.  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select Templates. If you don’t see  
Templates in the Show list, select More  
Folders to access this folder.  
Mobile.  
2
3
Select Word Mobile  
.
The first time you open Word Mobile, a  
new document opens. Otherwise,  
press New (left softkey).  
3
4
Open the template you want to use.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
File > Save As.  
4
5
Enter the text of the document.  
5
6
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the file.  
Press OK  
to save the file. When  
you save a new document, it is  
automatically named after the first  
several words in the file.  
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder where you want to save the  
file.  
Opening an existing document  
7
8
Select the Type list, and then select the  
format in which you want to save the  
file.  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
2
Select Word Mobile  
.
Select the Location list, and then select  
whether you want to store the file on  
your smartphone (Main memory) or on  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
241  
                 
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
an expansion card (Storage card). The  
Storage card option appears only if you  
have an expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone.  
6
7
8
Select Find to locate the first instance  
of the text you entered in step 3, or  
select Replace and enter the  
replacement text.  
9
Select Save.  
Select Next to find the next instance of  
the text, or select Replace to replace it.  
To replace all instances of the text,  
select Replace All.  
TIP To create a new template, open the  
document you want to save as a template.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select File >  
Rename/Move. Select Name and enter a  
name for the template. Select Folder, and  
then select Templates. Press OK.  
When you see a message that the  
search is done, press OK  
.
Moving or copying text  
1
2
3
Open the document containing the text  
you want to move or copy.  
Finding or replacing text in a document  
1
2
3
4
Open the document containing the text  
you want to find.  
Highlight the text you want to move or  
copy.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Find/Replace.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Copy to copy the text, or select Cut to  
move the text.  
Select Find what and enter the text you  
want to find.  
4
5
Open the document where you want to  
insert the text and position the cursor  
where you want the text to appear.  
(Optional) Check the Match case box to  
find text that matches the capitalization  
in the text you entered step 3.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Paste.  
5
(Optional) Check the Match whole  
words only box to find only full words  
that match the text you entered in  
step 3.  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
242  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Saving a copy of a document  
Formatting text  
1
Open the document you want to  
format.  
NOTE If a document was previously saved  
on a computer, any unsupported formatting  
may be lost when you save the file.  
2
3
Highlight the text you want to format.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Font.  
1
2
Open the document you want to copy.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
4
Set any of the following options for the  
highlighted text:  
File > Save As.  
3
4
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the file.  
Font: Specifies the typeface.  
Font color: Specifies the color.  
Size: Specifies the point size.  
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder where you want to save the  
file.  
Bold: Indicates whether the text  
appears normal or thick.  
5
6
Select the Type list, and then select the  
format in which you want to save the  
file.  
Italic: Indicates whether the text  
appears upright or slanted.  
Select the Location list, and then select  
whether you want to store the file on  
your smartphone (Main memory) or on  
an expansion card (Storage card). The  
Storage card option appears only if you  
have an expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone.  
Underline: Indicates whether the text  
appears with an underscore.  
Highlight: Indicates whether the text  
appears with a yellow highlight.  
Strikethrough: Indicates whether the  
text appears with a line through it.  
7
Select Save.  
5
Press OK  
to return to the  
document.  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
243  
               
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Formatting paragraphs and lists  
TIP You can also use the Formatting toolbar to  
create a list and to align text. To indent text in  
lists, you must use the Formatting toolbar.  
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to  
format.  
Position the cursor in the paragraph you  
want to format.  
Checking spelling in a document  
1
2
Open the document you want to check.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Paragraph.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Spelling. To check the spelling  
of specific text, highlight it before you  
select Spelling.  
Set any of the following options:  
Alignment: Aligns the text paragraph  
with the left, right, or center of  
the page.  
3
If an unknown or misspelled word is  
encountered, do one of the following:  
List: Creates a bulleted or numbered  
list.  
Select the correct word in the list if  
the word is spelled incorrectly.  
Indentation: Changes the paragraph  
margins.  
Select Ignore if the word is spelled  
correctly. Select Ignore All to skip all  
instances of the word.  
Left: Sets the left margin for the  
entire paragraph.  
Select Add to add a new word to the  
spelling dictionary.  
Right: Sets the right margin for the  
entire paragraph.  
Organizing your documents  
Special: Lets you indent the first line  
You can rename your documents, move  
your documents to another folder, and  
move your documents between your  
smartphone and an expansion card (sold  
separately) inserted into your smartphone.  
or set a hanging indent.  
By: Sets the size of the special  
indentation.  
5
Press OK  
to return to the  
document.  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
244  
           
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
1
2
3
Go to the documents list.  
Highlight a file.  
Deleting a document  
1
2
Go to the documents list.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Rename/Move.  
Highlight the document you want to  
delete.  
4
5
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the document.  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete.  
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder to which you want to move  
the document.  
Select Ye s to confirm the deletion.  
Customizing Word Mobile  
6
Select the Location list, and then select  
whether you want to store the file on  
your smartphone (Main memory) or on  
an expansion card (Storage card). The  
Storage card option appears only if you  
have an expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone.  
1
2
Go to the document list.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
3
Set any of the following options:  
Default template: Sets the default  
template for new documents.  
7
Press OK  
.
Save to: Sets the default location  
where new documents are stored.  
TIP To create a new folder, go to the  
documents list, tap the Show list in the  
upper-left and select Add/Delete. Select  
New, enter a name for the folder, and press  
OK.  
Display in list view: Sets the types of  
files that appear in the documents list.  
4
Press OK  
.
TIP When you go to a folder, you can easily  
search your documents by sorting by type.  
W O R D M O B I L E ®  
245  
                     
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
4
Do any of the following:  
PowerPoint Mobile®  
Press Right to advance to the next  
slide or Left to view the previous  
slide.  
With Microsoft Office PowerPoint Mobile®,  
you can open and view slide show  
presentations created on your computer.  
Many presentation elements such as slide  
transitions, animations, and URL links are  
also supported. Microsoft Office  
NOTE If a presentation is set up as a timed  
slide show, the slides advance  
automatically. Presentations pause during  
zooming.  
PowerPoint features not supported on your  
smartphone include the following:  
Press Center  
and then select the slide you want to  
view.  
, select Go to Slide,  
Notes written for slides  
Rearrangement or editing of slides  
Press Center  
Previous to play animations.  
and select Next or  
Files created in PPT format earlier than  
Microsoft PowerPoint 97  
To zoom in, press Center  
and  
select Zoom In. Tap and drag the  
HTML files in HTM and MHT formats  
slide to scroll it.  
Playing a presentation  
5
To end the slide show, press Center  
and select End Show.  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
Setting presentation playback options  
2
3
Select PowerPoint Mobile  
.
1
2
3
Highlight the presentation for which you  
want to change the settings.  
In the presentation list, select the  
presentation you want to play.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Set up show.  
On the Orientation tab, select the  
orientation you want. To select the  
P O W E R P O I N T M O B I L E ®  
246  
                       
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
orientation that best fits your  
smartphone screen, select Default.  
Excel Mobile®  
4
5
Select the Playback tab, and check the  
Override playback options for all files  
box.  
With Microsoft Office Excel Mobile®, you  
can create and edit workbooks and  
templates on your smartphone. You can  
also edit workbooks and templates that  
you create on your computer. However,  
you may lose some of the information and  
formatting when you save the workbook on  
your smartphone.  
Set any of the following options:  
Show without animation: Turns off  
builds and other animations.  
Show without slide transition: Turns  
off transition effects between slides.  
Note the following formatting  
considerations:  
Use timings, if present: Enables the  
timings recorded with each slide in a  
presentation. If a presentation is set up  
as a timed slide show, the slides  
advance automatically. Presentations  
pause during zooming.  
Alignment: Vertical text appears  
horizontal.  
Borders: Appear as a single line.  
Cell patterns: Patterns applied to cells are  
removed.  
Loop continuously: Advances to the  
first slide after playing the last slide in a  
presentation.  
Fonts and font sizes: The original font is  
listed on your smartphone and mapped to  
the closest font available. Original  
6
Press OK  
.
fonts reappear on your computer.  
TIP To turn the presentation into a  
continuously looping slide show, check both  
the Use timings, if present and the Loop  
continuously boxes.  
Number formats: Microsoft Office  
Excel 97 conditional formatting is displayed  
in Number format.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
247  
                                           
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Formulas and functions: Unsupported  
functions are removed, and only the  
returned value of the function appears.  
Formulas containing the following are also  
converted to values:  
AutoFilter Settings: AutoFilters that cause  
rows to be hidden are supported. Use the  
Unhide command to display hidden rows.  
Other AutoFilters are removed, but you can  
use the AutoFilter command in Excel  
Mobile to perform similar functions.  
An array or array argument, for example,  
=SUM({1;2;3;4}).  
Chart Formatting: All charts are saved as  
they appear in Excel Mobile. Unsupported  
chart types are changed to one of these  
supported types: Column, Bar, Line, Pie,  
Scatter, and Area. Background colors,  
gridlines, data labels, trend lines, shadows,  
3D effects, secondary axes, and  
External link references or an  
intersection range reference.  
References past row 16384 are  
replaced with #REF!.  
Protection settings: Most protection  
features are disabled but not removed.  
However, password protection is removed.  
You must remove the password protection  
in Microsoft Office Excel on your computer  
before opening the file on your  
logarithmic scales are turned off.  
The following features aren’t supported in  
Excel Mobile and are removed or modified  
when you open a workbook on your  
smartphone:  
smartphone.  
Hidden, dialog, and macro sheets  
VBA modules  
Zoom settings: Worksheet-specific zoom  
settings are not retained. The zoom setting  
applies to the entire workbook.  
Text boxes  
Worksheet names: Names that refer to  
other workbooks, arrays, array formulas, or  
intersection ranges are removed from the  
name list, causing those formulas to be  
resolved as “#NAME?” All hidden names  
are not hidden.  
Drawing objects and pictures  
Lists  
Conditional formats and controls  
Pivot table data (converted to values)  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
248  
                 
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Creating a workbook  
4
5
6
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
File > Save As.  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the workbook.  
2
3
Select Excel Mobile  
.
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder where you want to save the  
workbook.  
The first time you open Excel Mobile, a  
new workbook appears. Otherwise,  
press New (left softkey).  
7
8
Select the Type list, and then select the  
format in which you want to save the  
workbook.  
4
5
6
7
Highlight a cell where you want to enter  
text or other info.  
Enter the info in the cell and press  
Select Save.  
Return  
.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the  
remaining info.  
TIP To create a new template, highlight the  
workbook you want to save as a template.  
Press Menu (right softkey), select Rename/  
Move, select Name, and then enter a name  
for the template. Select the Folder list, and  
then select Templates. Press OK.  
Press OK  
to save the file. When  
you save a new workbook, it is  
automatically named and placed in the  
workbook list.  
Creating a workbook from a template  
Viewing a workbook  
1
2
Go to the workbook list.  
1
Press Start  
Mobile.  
and select Office  
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select Templates. If you don’t see  
Templates in the Show list, select More  
Folders to access this folder.  
2
3
Select Excel Mobile  
.
In the workbook list, select the  
workbook you want to view.  
3
Open the template you want to use.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
249  
                 
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
4
Press View (left softkey) and select any  
Toolbar: Indicates whether the toolbar  
of the following:  
appears onscreen.  
Full Screen: Shows as much data as  
possible on the screen. To return to the  
normal view, tap Restore in the  
upper-right.  
Status Bar: Indicates whether the  
status bar appears onscreen.  
Show: Indicates whether headings and  
scroll bars appear onscreen.  
Zoom: Sets the magnification level so  
that you can easily read the worksheet.  
TIP To jump to a cell or region, press Menu  
and select Edit > Go To. Select Cell  
reference or name and enter the target cell  
info, or select Current region. Select OK.  
Sheet: Lets you switch to a different  
worksheet.  
DID YOU KNOW You can also switch  
?
Calculating a sum  
worksheets by tapping the sheet list at the  
bottom of the screen.  
1
Press View (left softkey) and select  
Toolbar.  
Split: Divides the window into two  
scrollable areas. To move the split bar,  
tap and drag it. To remove the split bar,  
press View (left softkey) and select  
Remove Split.  
2
Highlight the cell where you want to  
insert the sum.  
3
4
Tap  
.
Tap and drag the stylus across the cells  
you want to add.  
Freeze Panes: Locks rows and columns  
so they remain visible while you scroll.  
Highlight the cell at the point at which  
you want to lock before you select this  
command. To unlock the rows or  
columns, press View (left softkey) and  
select Unfreeze Panes.  
5
Press Return  
.
TIP For simple calculations, use the Calculator  
(see Calculator).  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
250  
                 
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Entering a formula  
4
Finish entering the formula and press  
OK  
.
1
Highlight the cell where you want to  
enter the formula.  
TIP To refer to a cell from another worksheet  
in your formula, enter the worksheet name  
followed by an exclamation point (!) and the  
cell, range, or name reference.  
2
Enter an equals sign ( = ) followed by  
any values, cell references, name  
references, operators, and functions.  
Example: =Sheet1!Earnings  
Examples:  
TIP To create a 3-D reference in your formula,  
specify two or more sheets in a workbook.  
Use a colon between the first and last  
worksheet names.  
=(B4/25)+100  
=Revenue-Expenses  
3
Press Return  
.
Example: =SUM(Sheet2:Sheet6!$A$2:$C$5)  
TIP Use the Alt key to insert an equal sign.  
Inserting a function  
TIP To insert a symbol, place the cursor where  
you want the symbol. Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Insert > Symbol.  
Highlight the symbol you want to insert, and  
select Insert.  
1
Open the workbook where you want to  
insert the function.  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Insert > Function.  
Referring to a cell or range in a formula  
1
Open the workbook where you want to  
refer to a cell or range in a formula.  
2
3
Begin entering a formula in a cell.  
Navigate to the cell you want to refer to  
in the formula. To refer to a range, tap  
and drag the stylus over the cells you  
want to include in the range.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
251  
       
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
3
Select the Category list, and then  
select the type of function you want to  
insert.  
TIP Select Autofill as the series type to  
quickly fill cells with repetitive data such as  
numbers or repeated text. Autofill takes the  
content of the first cell in the highlighted row  
or column and copies it down or across the  
rest of the selection.  
4
5
Select the Function list, and then select  
the specific function you want to insert.  
Select OK.  
6
Select OK.  
Entering a sequence automatically  
1
Tap and drag with the stylus to highlight  
both the cells containing the info you  
want to automate and the adjacent  
destination cells.  
Adding cells, rows, and columns  
1
2
Open the workbook you want.  
Highlight the area where you want to  
insert elements.  
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Fill.  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Insert > Cells.  
Select the Direction list, and then  
select the direction you want to  
populate.  
Select how you want to insert the  
elements:  
Shift cells right: Inserts the same  
number of new cells as the number of  
cells you highlighted horizontally in step  
2. For example, if you selected an area  
containing two cells horizontally (A1 and  
B1), selecting Shift cells right inserts  
two horizontal cells; so the original A1  
and B1 (and their contents) are now C1  
and D1. The highlighted area and all  
cells on the right move the same  
4
5
Select the Fill type list, and then  
select Series.  
Select the Series type list, and then  
select the type of series you want. If  
you select Date or Number, enter a  
Step value increment.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
252  
         
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
number of columns—two in this  
example—to the right.  
of cells you highlighted horizontally in  
step 2. For example, if you selected an  
area containing two cells horizontally  
Shift cells down: Inserts the same  
number of new cells as the number of  
cells you highlighted vertically in step 2.  
For example, if you selected an area  
containing two cells vertically (A1 and  
A2), selecting Shift cells down inserts  
two vertical cells; so the original A1 and  
A2 (and their contents) are now A3 and  
A4. The highlighted area and all cells  
below it move the same number of  
rows—two in this example—down.  
(A1 and B1), selecting Entire column  
inserts two columns; so the original  
columns A and B (and their contents)  
are now columns C and D. The columns  
containing the highlighted area and all  
columns on the right move the same  
number of columns—two in this  
example—to the right.  
5
Select OK.  
TIP To add a new worksheet, press Menu and  
select Format > Modify Sheets. Select  
Insert, enter a name for the worksheet, and  
press OK. To change the order of the  
worksheets, highlight a worksheet you want  
to move, select Move Up or Move Down,  
and press OK.  
Entire row: Inserts the same number of  
new rows as the number of cells you  
highlighted vertically in step 2. For  
example, if you selected an area  
containing two cells vertically (A1 and  
A2), selecting Entire row inserts two  
rows; so the original rows 1 and 2 (and  
their contents) are now rows 3 and 4.  
The rows containing the highlighted  
area and all rows beneath it move the  
same number of rows—two in this  
example—down.  
Formatting cells  
1
2
3
Open the workbook you want to format.  
Highlight the cells you want to format.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Cells.  
Entire column: Inserts the same  
number of new columns as the number  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
253  
       
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
4
Select any of the following tabs:  
3
4
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Row or Format > Column.  
Size: Sets the row height and column  
width.  
Select any of the following:  
AutoFit: Adjusts the size of the  
highlighted rows or columns to their  
contents.  
Number: Sets the type of information  
the cells contain.  
Align: Sets whether text wraps within  
the highlighted cells, and sets horizontal  
and vertical alignment position.  
Hide: Hides the highlighted rows or  
columns.  
Unhide: Displays hidden rows or  
columns in the highlighted area.  
Font: Sets the typeface, color, size, and  
style attributes.  
Borders: Turns borders on and off for  
various cell edges, and sets the border  
and background colors.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can adjust the column and  
row size by tapping and dragging the right  
edge of the column or the bottom edge of the  
row. To automatically fit rows and columns to  
their contents, double-tap the lower edge of  
the row heading or the right edge of the  
column heading.  
5
Press OK  
.
TIP To name the highlighted cell or range of  
cells, press Menu and select Insert > Define  
Name. Enter the name and select Add. Press  
OK.  
Renaming a worksheet  
1
2
3
Open the workbook containing the  
worksheet you want to rename.  
Formatting rows and columns  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Modify Sheets.  
1
2
Open the workbook you want to format.  
Highlight the rows or columns you want  
to format.  
In the Sheets list, highlight the  
worksheet you want to rename.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
254  
       
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
4
Select Rename, enter a new name for  
the worksheet, and press OK  
twice.  
2
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > AutoFilter. In each column  
containing a highlighted cell, an arrow  
appears on the right side of the cell  
nearest the top of the column.  
Sorting info in a worksheet  
1
2
Highlight the cells you want to sort.  
3
4
Tap the arrow to open a list and select a  
filter. This hides all rows that do not  
include the selected filter.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Tools > Sort.  
(Optional) Do any of the following:  
3
4
Select the Sort by list, and then select  
the primary sort column.  
Open the other lists, and select other  
filters.  
Check the Ascending box to sort in  
ascending (A–Z or 0–9) order. Leave the  
box unchecked to sort in descending (Z–  
A or 9–0) order.  
To display all rows again, open the  
filter lists and select All.  
To turn off filtering, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Tools > AutoFilter  
again.  
5
6
7
(Optional) Select the Then by lists, and  
then select second- and third-level  
sorting options.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can also create custom  
Check or uncheck the Exclude header  
row from sort box to indicate whether  
you want to sort the header row.  
filters where you specify comparisons. Open  
a filter list and select Custom.  
Select OK.  
Creating a chart  
Filtering info in a worksheet  
1
Open the workbook in which you want  
to create a chart.  
1
Tap and drag the stylus to highlight the  
cells that contain the info you want to  
filter.  
2
Highlight the cells you want to include  
in the chart.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
255  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
3
4
5
6
7
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Insert > Chart.  
appears, and the placement of the  
legend.  
Select the type of chart, and press Next  
(right softkey).  
Scale: Specifies the minimum and  
maximum scales for charts with x and y  
axes.  
Confirm the area you want the chart to  
include, and press Next (right softkey).  
Type: Specifies the chart style. You can  
use this setting to convert your chart to  
a different format.  
Select the data layout, and press Next  
(right softkey).  
Check the boxes to indicate whether  
the first row and column represent  
labels.  
Series: Lets you add, modify, format, or  
delete related data points without  
affecting the info in your worksheet.  
8
9
Select whether you want the chart to  
appear as a separate worksheet within  
the current workbook, or as part of the  
current worksheet.  
5
Press OK  
.
Finding or replacing info in a workbook  
1
2
3
4
Open the workbook containing the info  
you want to find.  
Press Finish (right softkey).  
Formatting or changing a chart  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Find/Replace.  
1
Open the workbook that contains the  
chart you want to format.  
Select Find what and enter the info you  
want to find.  
2
3
Open the chart.  
(Optional) Check the Match case box to  
find text that matches the capitalization  
in any text you entered.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Format > Chart.  
4
Select any of the following tabs:  
5
(Optional) Check the Match entire cells  
box to find only cells whose contents  
exactly match the text you entered.  
Titles: Specifies the title of the chart  
and headings, whether a legend  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
256  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
6
7
8
Select Find to locate the first instance  
of the info you entered, or select  
Replace and enter the replacement  
info.  
6
7
Select the Location list, and then select  
whether you want to store the file on  
your smartphone (Main memory) or on  
an expansion card (Storage Card). The  
Storage Card option appears only if you  
have an expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone.  
Select Next to find the next instance of  
the info, or select Replace to replace it.  
To replace all instances of the info,  
select Replace All.  
Press OK  
.
When you see a message that the  
TIP When you go to a folder, you can easily  
search your files by sorting by type.  
search is done, press OK  
.
Organizing your workbooks  
Deleting cells, rows, and columns  
You can rename your workbooks. You can  
also move them to another folder or move  
them between your smartphone and an  
expansion card (sold separately) inserted  
into your smartphone.  
1
Open the workbook containing the  
elements you want to delete.  
2
3
Highlight the area you want to delete.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
1
2
3
Go to the workbook list.  
Highlight a file.  
Edit > Delete Cells.  
4
Select how you want to remove the  
elements:  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Rename/Move.  
Shift cells left: Deletes the highlighted  
cells and moves all cells on their right to  
the left.  
4
5
Select Name and enter a new name for  
the workbook.  
Select the Folder list, and then select  
the folder to which you want to move  
the workbook.  
Shift cells up: Deletes the highlighted  
cells and moves all cells below them up.  
E X C E L M O B I L E ®  
257  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Entire row: Deletes the entire row(s) in  
which the highlighted cells are located,  
and moves all rows below up.  
3
Set any of the following options:  
Template for new workbook:  
Specifies the default template for new  
workbooks.  
Entire column: Deletes the entire  
column(s) in which the highlighted cells  
are located, and moves all columns on  
their right to the left.  
Save new workbooks to: Specifies  
where new workbooks are stored.  
Files to display in list view: Specifies  
which types of files appear in the  
workbook list.  
NOTE Excel Mobile adjusts formulas to  
reflect the new cell locations. However, a  
formula that refers to a deleted cell  
displays the #REF! error value.  
4
Press OK  
.
5
Select OK.  
OneNote Mobile  
TIP To delete a workbook, go to the workbook  
list and highlight the workbook you want to  
delete. Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Delete. Select Ye s to confirm.  
OneNote Mobile lets you create digital  
notes that contain text, pictures, and audio  
and video. You can then synchronize these  
notes with Microsoft Office OneNote 2007  
on your computer. During synchronization,  
all the notes you create on your  
TIP To delete a worksheet, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Format > Modify Sheets.  
Highlight the worksheet you want to delete  
and select Delete. Select Ye s and press OK.  
smartphone are copied to a notebook  
called OneNote Mobile on your computer;  
you can then drag your notes to other  
locations on your computer. You can use  
OneNote Mobile to do any of the following:  
Customizing Excel Mobile  
1
2
Go to the workbook list.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
O N E N O T E M O B I L E  
258  
                     
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Take pictures of business cards and  
then insert them into OneNote.  
Italic, Underline, or Strikethrough.  
Enter the text you want formatted.  
Take pictures of flip charts and  
whiteboards in conference rooms, and  
then insert them into OneNote.  
To resume entering unformatted text,  
press Menu (right softkey), select  
Format, and then select the formatting  
option again.  
Create text notes and voice recordings  
(for example, reminders of important  
events, ideas for projects, price  
comparisons, recommendations, blog  
ideas, and so on) and synchronize them  
with your notes.  
TIP You can apply more than one formatting  
style to text. Press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Format for each style you want to  
apply to the text you are going to enter.  
TIP To clear the formatting from entered text,  
highlight the text with the stylus, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select Format > Clear All.  
Prepare meeting or travel information in  
OneNote on your computer and then  
transfer it to your smartphone so you  
can access the information on the road.  
Enter a list: Press Menu (right softkey),  
select List, and then select Numbered  
or Bulleted. When you have finished  
entering the list items, press Menu  
(right softkey), select List, and then  
select the list option again to turn off list  
formatting.  
Creating a note  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
2
3
4
Select OneNote Mobile  
.
Press New (left softkey).  
Begin typing your note text, or do any of  
the following:  
TIP To remove list formatting from entered  
text, highlight the text with the stylus, press  
Menu (right softkey), and select List > Clear.  
Format text: Press Menu (right  
softkey), select Format, and then select  
the formatting option you want: Bold,  
O N E N O T E M O B I L E  
259  
     
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Create a hyperlink: Enter the website  
address for which you want to create  
the hyperlink. For example, to create a  
hyperlink to the Microsoft website,  
enter http://www.microsoft.com.  
Viewing or editing an existing note  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
2
3
Select OneNote Mobile  
.
In the OneNote Mobile list, select the  
note that you want to open.  
Insert a picture: Press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Take Picture to take  
a picture with your smartphone’s  
camera or Insert Picture to insert an  
existing picture.  
4
Do any of the following:  
Open a hyperlink: Place the cursor  
anywhere in the link, and then press  
Center  
View picture detail: Highlight the  
picture, press Center , and then  
.
Insert an audio recording: Press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Insert  
Recording. Tap the onscreen controls  
to create your recording. Tap OK to  
accept the recording and add it to the  
note.  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Zoom In. To zoom in further, press  
Menu (right softkey) and select Zoom  
In again. Use the 5-way to view  
different parts of the picture. To zoom  
out, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Zoom Out; you can also select  
Actual Size or Fit to Screen.  
5
When you have finished creating your  
note, press Done (left softkey).  
TIP While you are composing the note, use  
menu items to undo and redo your last action,  
and to cut, copy, and paste text. After you  
have completed the note and pressed Done,  
use menu commands to delete or rename the  
note.  
Play a voice note: Highlight the voice  
note and press Center  
,.  
5
Press Done (left softkey) to close the  
note.  
O N E N O T E M O B I L E  
260  
           
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
Renaming a note  
2
3
Press Menu (right softkey), and then  
select Delete.  
1
In the OneNote Mobile list, select the  
note that you want to rename.  
Select Ye s to confirm deletion.  
2
Press Menu (right softkey), and then  
select Rename.  
Adobe® Reader® LE  
3
4
Enter the new name.  
Press Done (left softkey) to accept the  
new name.  
Adobe® Reader® LE lets you view PDF files  
whether they are saved to your  
Sorting your notes  
smartphone, attached to email messages,  
stored on an expansion card (sold  
separately) inserted into your smartphone’s  
expansion card slot, or downloaded from  
the web. You can customize the document  
display.  
1
Press Start  
and select Office  
Mobile.  
2
3
Select OneNote Mobile  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
4
5
In the Sort notes by list, press Up  
or  
Viewing a file  
Down  
to select Name or Date  
Adobe Reader LE supports  
modified.  
password-protected PDF files with up to  
128-bit encryption. When you open a  
password-protected PDF file, you must  
enter the password to open the file.  
Press Done (left softkey).  
Deleting a note  
In the OneNote Mobile list, select the  
note that you want to delete.  
1
1
2
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Adobe Reader  
.
A D O B E ® R E A D E R ® L E  
261  
             
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
3
Navigate to and select the file you want  
to open.  
5
Tap any of the following to move around  
within the PDF file:  
Move to the next page.  
Move to the previous page.  
Jump to the first page of the file.  
Jump to the last page of the file.  
6
To open another file, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Open. Select a  
recently opened file, or select Browse  
and navigate to the file you want.  
TIP To open additional files, press Menu (right  
softkey) and select Open. Select the file you  
want from the list, or select Browse to  
navigate to and select the file.  
4
Press Down  
to scroll to the next  
page (in Single Page mode) or scroll the  
continuous display down (in Continuous  
mode). Press Up  
to scroll to the  
preceding page or scroll the continuous  
display up.  
A D O B E ® R E A D E R ® L E  
262  
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
2
Press Tools (left softkey), select Zoom,  
and then select one of the following  
options:  
TIP To go to a specific page, press Tools (left  
softkey) and select Go To.  
DID YOU KNOW If the file was created with  
?
In: Increases the file display size to  
enlarge font and image size  
bookmarks, Adobe Reader LE displays the  
bookmarks pane on the left side of the screen.  
Select a heading in the bookmarks pane to  
jump to that section.  
Out: Decreases the file display size to  
fit more of the file on the screen  
DID YOU KNOW To view detailed information  
?
about the file you are viewing, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Details.  
To %: Specifies a specific zoom level for  
the display  
Fit screen: Sizes the display so an  
entire page fits on the screen top to  
bottom  
Changing display options  
You can change the display size, the scroll  
option, and more.  
Fit width: Sizes the display so that the  
width of the page fills the display from  
side to side  
1
Press Tools (left softkey), select View,  
and then select any of the following:  
Rotate Right/Left: Rotates the page in  
the selected direction.  
Finding text in a file  
1
2
3
With the file open, press Tools (left  
softkey) and select Find > Text.  
Single Page: Displays the pages so that  
when you use Up  
or Down  
to  
Select Find and enter the text you want  
to find.  
scroll the file, the display jumps a page  
at a time  
(Optional) Check the Match case box to  
find text that matches the capitalization  
in the text you entered.  
Continuous: Displays the pages so that  
when you use Up  
or Down  
to  
scroll the file, the display scrolls  
continuously up or down without  
jumping.  
A D O B E ® R E A D E R ® L E  
263  
 
Y O U R M I C R O S O F T O F F I C E A N D O T H E R D O C U M E N T T O O L S  
11  
4
5
(Optional) Check the Whole word box  
to find only full words that match the  
text you entered.  
6
7
Press Find (left softkey).  
To find the next occurrence of the text,  
press Tools (left softkey) and select  
Find > Next.  
(Optional) Check the Backwards box to  
search the file backwards.  
A D O B E ® R E A D E R ® L E  
264  
 
CHAPTER  
12  
Your application and info  
management tools  
Your Palm® TreoPro smartphone comes equipped with a  
variety of tools for managing and organizing your information.  
Find nearby businesses and driving directions. Get the most  
out of your smartphone: Install some of the thousands of  
business, education, or leisure-time applications available. Use  
one of several options to share business and personal info with  
others. Insert expansion cards (sold separately) for a compact  
and virtually limitless answer to the storage dilemma. And  
because there’s one on your smartphone, you never need to  
carry a separate calculator.  
Benefits  
Locate info in any application, or  
locate any address on a map  
Keep others up-to-date with  
meaningful business and personal  
information  
Install applications, games, and  
other software  
Store, carry, and exchange info  
Always have a calculator with you  
265  
   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
TIP For information on opening and closing  
Finding information  
Quickly find who or what you’re looking for  
by using one of these search features:  
Using Search  
Search for files and other items stored in  
the My Documents folder on your  
Search: Look through the text in all the  
applications on your smartphone.  
smartphone or on an expansion card (sold  
separately) inserted into your smartphone.  
You can search by file name or by words  
located in the item. For example, you can  
search for words within notes,  
File Explorer: Browse through the files  
and folders on your smartphone or on an  
expansion card.  
Lookup: Find and dial your contacts by  
name or phone number. See Dialing by  
contact name for details.  
appointments, contacts, and tasks.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Contacts on your SIM card do  
not appear in the search results list.  
Global Address List Lookup: Look up  
names in your online corporate address list  
book).  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Search  
.
Email message search: Display only those  
messages whose senders, recipients, or  
subjects match the text you enter (see  
QuickGPS: Get driving directions to any  
F I N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
267  
                           
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
6
Use the 5-way to select and view an  
item from the results of the search. A  
storage card symbol appears next to the  
names of files that are located on an  
expansion card.  
DID YOU KNOW You can also open Search by  
pressing Option + left Shift.  
?
3
Select Search for and enter the file  
name, word, or other info you want to  
find.  
Exploring files and folders  
You can use File Explorer to browse the  
contents of folders on your smartphone or  
on an expansion card (sold separately)  
inserted into your smartphone. The root  
folder on your smartphone is named My  
Device. My Device is similar to My  
TIP If you’ve looked for an item before, select  
the Search for list, and then select the item in  
the list.  
TIP When two or more words are entered in  
the Search for field, the search results  
contains only items that contain all of the  
words.  
Computer (Windows XP) or Computer  
(Windows Vista) on your computer.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
4
5
Select the Type list, and then select the  
kind of information you want to find.  
Select File Explorer  
.
Select the folder you want to explore. If  
the folder you want is not displayed, tap  
the Show list in the upper-left and  
select My Device to view all folders.  
TIP If you are searching for information in  
certain applications, such as Messaging or  
Word Mobile, press Advanced (right softkey)  
for more search options.  
Press Search (left softkey).  
F I N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
268  
                   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
IMPORTANT Do not delete any files that  
you cannot identify. These files may be  
required for your smartphone to function  
1
2
properly.  
To move a file to another folder:  
Highlight the item, press and hold  
Center  
to open the shortcut menu,  
and select Cut or Copy. Open the  
destination folder, press and hold  
Center  
and then select Paste.  
to open the shortcut menu,  
1
Show list  
Sort by list  
2
To highlight multiple items: Tap and  
drag the stylus.  
TIP When the items in a folder are displayed,  
you can sort them by name, date, size, or  
type. Select the Sort by list in the upper-right,  
and then select the sort method.  
Installing applications  
DID YOU KNOW The storage card symbol  
?
appears next to the names of files that are  
stored on an expansion card.  
Your smartphone comes with several  
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You  
can also install third-party applications that  
are compatible with Microsoft Windows  
Mobile® 6.1 Professional edition devices,  
such as business software, games, and  
more.  
4
Do any of the following:  
To open an item: Select it.  
To quickly delete, rename, beam, or  
email an item: Highlight the item,  
press and hold Center  
shortcut menu, and then select the  
appropriate command.  
to open the  
Applications you download to your  
computer are likely to be in a compressed  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
269  
                               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
format such as ZIP. If the file is  
Installing third-party applications  
compressed, you need to decompress the  
file before you install the application on  
your smartphone. You can decompress the  
file on your smartphone in File Explorer or  
on your computer using a decompression  
utility such as WinZip.  
When installing third-party applications,  
note the following:  
Install only apps that are designed for  
Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.1  
Professional. Apps designed for other  
versions of Microsoft Windows Mobile  
may not be compatible with your  
smartphone.  
TIP You can also send the file to yourself as an  
email attachment, and then open the  
attachment on your smartphone to  
automatically decompress the file (see  
If you can try a free or trial version of  
the software before purchasing it, you  
can test it first to make sure it works  
properly.  
The following instructions tell you how to  
install basic files onto your smartphone.  
Some software uses an installer or wizard  
to guide you through the process. For  
details, consult the documentation that  
came with the software.  
NOTE If you encounter a problem with a  
third-party application (such as an error  
message), contact the applications vendor.  
For general troubleshooting of third-party  
DID YOU KNOW  
application that lets you run Palm OS® by  
ACCESS applications on your smartphone.  
?
You can purchase a third-party  
TIP If an application does not have a Microsoft  
Mobile to Market certificate, you see a  
message indicating that the application is  
untrusted. If this occurs, you can indicate  
whether you want to continue the installation.  
Installing applications from the Internet  
You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to  
install Windows Mobile apps in the CAB  
file format directly from the Internet. For  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
270  
                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
files in the ZIP file format, you must unzip  
the files in File Explorer or on your  
8
Select the file you downloaded to start  
the installation program.  
computer before you install them. For files  
in any format other than CAB or ZIP, you  
must first download the files to your  
computer and then install them to your  
smartphone by synchronizing.  
Installing applications from your  
computer  
There are many applications available for  
your smartphone. To get started, check out  
the selection at palm.com/  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
phone is on and that you are in a coverage  
area (see Turning your phone on).  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an  
application from your computer to your  
smartphone, you must first install the  
desktop sync software on your computer  
1
2
3
Press Start  
Explorer.  
and select Internet  
Go to the page that contains the link to  
the application you want to download.  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer to synchronize and install the  
application(s) on your smartphone.  
Highlight the link to the file, and then  
press Center  
process.  
to start the download  
2
3
4
Open My Computer or Windows  
Explorer on your computer.  
4
5
If prompted, select the folder where  
you want to store the file.  
Double-click the icon representing your  
smartphone.  
When the download has finished, press  
Start  
and select Programs.  
Copy the application file(s) into the  
folder.  
6
7
Select File Explorer  
.
Go to the folder you selected in step 4.  
If you did not select a folder, go to the  
My Documents folder.  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
271  
       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Installing applications onto an expansion  
card  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Java  
.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an  
Press Menu (right softkey), select  
Install, and then select Local (to install  
a file from your computer) or Internet.  
application from your computer to an  
expansion card, you must first install the  
desktop sync software on your computer  
After you install the file, press Menu (right  
softkey) to perform various tasks using the  
file.  
1
Insert the expansion card (sold  
separately) into the expansion card slot  
cards).  
Removing  
applications  
2
3
4
5
6
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer using the USB cable.  
Open My Computer or Windows  
Explorer on your computer.  
To free up memory on your smartphone,  
you can remove applications that you no  
longer use. You can remove only  
applications, patches, and extensions that  
you install; you cannot remove the built-in  
applications that reside in the Read-Only  
Memory (ROM) portion of your  
Double-click the icon representing your  
smartphone.  
Navigate to the folder representing the  
expansion card.  
Copy the application file(s) into the  
expansion card folder.  
smartphone.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Remove Programs  
and select Settings.  
Installing Java games and applications  
You can install Java application files called  
Midlets onto your smartphone, either from  
your computer or from the Internet.  
.
R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
272  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
your info or to receive info from another  
device.  
In many applications, you can send a file  
or an entry by email or beaming. Open  
the app to the file or entry list and  
highlight the item you want to send.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
the Send or Beam option.  
In the Messaging application, you can  
insert a picture or attach a note or other  
file to an email. You can also receive  
pictures and attachments (see Your  
email).  
3
Select the application that you want to  
remove.  
DID YOU KNOW Built-in applications that  
cannot be deleted are not listed in the  
Remove Programs list.  
?
You can attach a picture, video, or sound  
file to a multimedia message (see  
message).  
4
5
Select Remove.  
You can synchronize to share info  
Select Yes to confirm the deletion.  
between your smartphone and your  
computer or between your smartphone  
and Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or  
Sharing information  
If you are near someone, you can beam  
files and applications between your  
smartphone and your neighbors device  
using the IR port or Bluetooth® wireless  
Your smartphone comes equipped  
with a variety of options for sharing  
information, so that you can choose the  
quickest, most convenient way to send  
S H A R I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
273  
       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
You can also store files on an expansion  
card and share the expansion card (see  
TIP For best results, the path between the  
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and  
both devices kept stationary. If you have  
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and  
avoid bright sunlight.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
The type of information you  
Beaming information  
can beam depends on the type of device you  
are beaming to. Other Windows Mobile 6  
Professional devices are always compatible  
with your Treo Pro smartphone.  
Your smartphone is equipped with an IR  
(infrared) port that enables you to beam  
information to another device with an IR  
port. The IR port is located on the side of  
your smartphone closest to the stylus, near  
the top. You can also beam using the  
Bluetooth wireless technology on your  
smartphone.  
Beaming an entry or file  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To beam using  
Bluetooth technology, make sure your  
smartphone has the Bluetooth feature  
The normal range for beaming with IR is  
about 20 centimeters (eight inches). The  
maximum range for beaming with  
Bluetooth technology is about 10 meters  
(30 feet). Performance and range are  
affected by physical obstacles, radio  
interference from nearby electronic  
equipment, and other factors.  
1
2
Highlight the entry or file you want to  
beam.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Beam… (the menu item changes  
names based on the type of item you  
highlighted). In Contacts, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Send Contact  
> Beam.  
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
274  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
3
Do one of the following:  
Bluetooth: When the name of the  
receiving device appears, select it to  
begin the transfer. A blue icon indicates  
a Bluetooth connection.  
4
Wait for Done to appear next to the  
name of the receiving device before you  
continue using your smartphone.  
IR: Select Infrared. Point the IR port on  
your smartphone directly at the IR port  
of the receiving device. A red icon  
indicates an IR connection.  
TIP The regional setting determines the list of  
characters that can be used when info is  
beamed between devices. If you try to send  
or receive a character that is not on the list, it  
appears as a question mark (see Setting  
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
275  
   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Turning on the option to receive beamed  
information  
Using expansion  
By default, the option to receive beamed  
information on your smartphone is turned  
off. You need to turn the beam option on  
before you can receive information being  
beamed from another device.  
cards  
The expansion card slot on your  
smartphone enables you to add microSD  
cards to extend the storage capacity of  
your smartphone. For example, microSD  
expansion cards can store the following:  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Beam  
and select Settings.  
.
Pictures  
Games  
3
Check the Receive all incoming  
Videos  
Applications  
Databases  
beams box.  
MP3 audio files  
Email attachments  
Receiving beamed information  
1
Press End  
is not already on.  
to turn on your screen if it  
Expansion cards are sold separately.  
2
If you are beaming over an IR  
connection, point the IR port on your  
smartphone directly at the IR port of the  
transmitting device.  
TIP We recommend that you purchase  
preformatted expansion cards. To format a  
card on your own, you need to connect a card  
reader (sold separately) to your computer.  
3
When the Receiving Data message  
appears, select Yes to receive the  
beam.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
276  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Inserting and removing expansion cards  
TIP The expansion card slot has a push-push  
mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;  
push in gently to remove it.  
1
With the back panel facing you, press  
the lower-right corner of the back panel  
with your right thumb to release the  
panel. Remove the panel.  
1
2
1
2
Notch  
Wi-Fi button  
4
5
Replace the back panel.  
To remove an expansion card, repeat  
step 1 to remove the back panel, and  
then push the card in to release it.  
2
3
Insert the card with the label facing up  
and the notch pointing toward the Wi-Fi  
button.  
6
Replace the back panel.  
Push the card into the slot until you feel  
the card click into place.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
277  
     
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Opening applications on an expansion  
card  
*
After you insert an expansion card into the  
expansion card slot, you can open any of  
the applications stored on the expansion  
card.  
TIP To run an application on an expansion card,  
your smartphone must have enough free  
space in the internal memory to run the  
application.  
*
Show list  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
5
Select the application you want to open.  
Saving files to an expansion card  
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
You can save space on your smartphone by  
saving files to an expansion card. For  
example, when you create new Word  
Mobile documents, notes, Excel® Mobile  
workbooks, pictures, videos, and audio  
files, you can save them directly to an  
expansion card. Saving files to an  
Select File Explorer  
.
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select Storage Card.  
expansion card also makes it easy to share  
those files with others. (Some applications  
may not support this feature.)  
1
Insert an expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
278  
           
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
2
3
4
Open the application from which you  
want to save the info.  
1
2
3
Insert an expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options or Tools > Options.  
Open the application from which you  
want to move the info.  
Select the option for where to save info,  
and then select Storage Card. The  
option name changes depending on the  
application you are in.  
Go to the list view, tap the Show list in  
the upper-left, and highlight the file or  
application you want to move.  
4
5
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Rename/Move.  
TIP If you don’t see a Save to option on the  
Options screen, look on the other tabs (if  
present). If you still can’t find a Save to list, the  
application may not support this feature.  
Select the Location list, and then select  
where you want to move the info:  
Storage card or Main memory.  
6
Press OK  
.
5
Press OK  
.
Moving info between your smartphone  
and an expansion card using File Explorer  
Moving info between your smartphone  
and an expansion card from within an  
application  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
In certain applications—for example,  
Pictures & Videos and the Office Mobile  
applications—you can move files directly to  
another location. For applications that do  
not support this feature, see Moving info  
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select File Explorer  
.
Highlight the file or application you want  
to copy or move (see Exploring files and  
folders).  
TIP Your applications are usually located in the  
My Device/Program Files folder.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
279  
                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
5
6
7
8
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.  
5
6
Select the folder or files you want to  
view.  
Go to the folder where you want to  
place the selected item.  
Press OK  
.
Renaming an expansion card  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Edit > Paste.  
If you change the contents of an expansion  
card, you may want to rename the card to  
better match its contents.  
Press OK  
.
Viewing available expansion card  
memory  
TIP Before copying information to or renaming  
the files or folders on an expansion card, or  
renaming the card itself, make sure the card is  
not write-protected. See the instructions that  
came with your card for details.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
2
3
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Memory  
Select the Storage Card tab.  
Press OK  
and select Settings.  
.
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
4
5
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
.
Select File Explorer  
.
Exploring files on an expansion card  
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select My Device.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
5
6
Highlight the current expansion card  
name (Storage Card by default).  
2
3
4
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select File Explorer  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Rename.  
Tap the Show list in the upper-left and  
select Storage Card.  
7
8
Enter a new name for the card.  
Press OK  
.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
280  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Encrypting an expansion card  
connect to your work computer and have  
access to all of your applications, files, and  
network resources as though you were in  
front of your computer at work. You can  
leave applications running at work and then  
see your work computer’s desktop  
displayed on your smartphone, with the  
same applications running.  
When you encrypt an expansion card, the  
info on the card can be read only by your  
smartphone—so no one can see whats on  
the card if it gets lost or stolen.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot.  
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Accessing a remote computer  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Encryption.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask the remote  
computer administrator for your computer  
username, password, and domain if you  
don’t know them.  
4
Check the Encrypt files when placed  
on a storage card box.  
NOTE If your organization enforces an  
encryption policy, you can see that the box  
is checked but cannot uncheck it.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Remote Desktop Mobile  
.
Enter the name of the computer you  
want to access. If you are accessing a  
computer you’ve already entered, select  
the computer name from the list.  
Accessing  
information on a  
remote computer  
4
5
Enter the username, password, and  
domain you use to access the remote  
computer.  
Press OK  
.
Remote Desktop Mobile is a technology  
that allows you to use your smartphone to  
connect to a remote computer in a  
different location. For example, you can  
A C C E S S I N G I N F O R M A T I O N O N  
A
R E M O T E C O M P U T E R  
281  
       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
Customizing Remote Desktop Mobile  
Remote desktop sound: Sets whether  
sounds from the remote computer are  
muted completely, played on the  
remote computer, or played on your  
smartphone.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Remote Desktop Mobile  
.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Options.  
6
Press OK  
.
4
On the Display tab, select any of the  
following options:  
Colors: Set how to display colors from  
the remote computer on your  
smartphone screen.  
Calculator  
You can use Calculator for basic arithmetic  
calculations, such as addition, subtraction,  
multiplication, and division.  
Full screen: Set whether you want the  
remote computer display to take up  
your entire smartphone screen  
Fit remote desktop to screen: Set  
whether you want to resize the remote  
computer display so that the entire  
display fits on your smartphone screen.  
5
Select the Resources tab, and then  
select one or both of the following  
options:  
Device storage: Set whether to map  
your smartphones storage memory to  
the remote computer.  
Performing calculations  
1
Press Start  
and select Calculator.  
C A L C U L A T O R  
282  
         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
2
Enter numbers and perform  
Using the Calculator memory  
calculations, including the following:  
To store a displayed number, tap the box  
to the left of the entry box. An M  
appears in the box.  
Clears the last digit in a multi-digit  
entry.  
Clears the current calculation or the  
displayed number.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
When you store a number in  
memory, it replaces the number that is  
currently stored.  
Calculates the reciprocal of a  
number.  
To add the displayed number to the  
Calculates percentage.  
number stored in memory, tap  
or  
Calculates the square root of a  
number.  
press P.  
To display the number stored in  
Switches a number between  
negative and positive.  
memory, tap  
.
To clear the memory, tap  
.
TIP You can paste numbers into Calculator as  
well as copy calculation results to be pasted  
into another app.  
TIP For more advanced calculations, use Excel  
Mobile. See Excel Mobile® for details.  
C A L C U L A T O R  
283  
       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
12  
C A L C U L A T O R  
284  
CHAPTER  
13  
Your personal settings  
Customizing is optional. But why not personalize your Palm®  
TreoPro smartphone to make it match your lifestyle and work  
even harder for you?  
You can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and  
more on your smartphone. Take advantage of various levels of  
security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone  
call by locking the keyboard. Some preference settings can help  
extend the life of your battery. There are lots of ways to make  
your smartphone work better for you.  
Benefits  
Conserve power  
Make your screen easy to read  
Streamline smartphone use  
Secure your phone and your data  
285  
     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
TIP To change the color theme for your  
Today screen settings  
smartphone, select a new theme from the  
Appearance tab in Today Settings (see  
Selecting your Today screen background  
1
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Selecting which items appear on your  
Today screen  
TIP You can also open Settings from your  
Today screen by pressing Settings (right  
softkey).  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Today  
.
Select the Items tab.  
2
On the Personal tab, select Today  
.
4
5
Check the boxes next to the items you  
want to appear on your Today screen,  
and uncheck any items that you do not  
want to appear.  
3
On the Appearance tab, check the Use  
this picture as the background box.  
4
5
6
Select Browse.  
Select the picture you want to use.  
(Optional) Highlight an item and select  
Move Up or Move Down to change the  
Press OK  
.
T O D A Y S C R E E N S E T T I N G S  
287  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
order in which items appear on the  
Today screen.  
2
To hear all sounds again, slide the  
Ringer switch to Sound On  
.
6
7
(Optional) Highlight an item and select  
Options (if available) to configure the  
When you slide the Ringer switch back to  
the Sound On position, it restores the  
previous sound settings. For example, if  
the smartphone ring volume is set to the  
loudest setting and you slide the Ringer  
switch to Sound Off, you do not hear the  
smartphone ring. When you move the  
Ringer switch back to Sound On, the  
smartphone ring volume is still set to the  
loudest setting.  
settings for the item. Press OK  
to  
return to Today Settings.  
Press OK  
.
DID YOU KNOW  
?
There are lots of third-party  
plug-ins available for your Today screen.  
System sound  
settings  
1
2
When you’re in a meeting, at the movies,  
or anywhere that silence is required, you  
can immediately silence all sounds on your  
smartphone, including Calendar  
1
2
Sound On  
Sound Off  
notifications and system sounds. This does  
not mute the speaker during phone calls.  
TIP Can't get music to play out of the built-in  
MP3 player? Check the Ringer switch. If its  
set to Sound Off, you won’t be able to hear  
music.  
Silencing sounds  
1
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Your smartphone includes a  
Off  
. The smartphone vibrates  
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.  
briefly.  
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S  
288  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Selecting Sounds & Notifications  
the volume level when this sound is  
turned on.  
1
2
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select Sounds &  
Notifications  
and select Settings.  
Hardware buttons: Turns sounds  
associated with pressing buttons on/off,  
and sets the volume level when this  
sound is turned on.  
.
3
On the Sounds tab, set any of the  
following options:  
TIP To add, preview, delete, and send sounds,  
select the Manage tab. To add a sound, press  
Menu (right softkey), select Add, and navigate  
to the sound file. To play a sound, select it and  
press Play (left softkey). To delete a sound,  
highlight it and press Backspace. To send a  
sound, highlight it, press Menu (right softkey),  
and select Beam Sound or Send Sound.  
4
Select the Notifications tab and set  
any of the following options:  
Events: Turns sounds on/off for system  
warnings and error messages.  
Programs: Turns sounds on/off in the  
applications on your smartphone.  
Notifications: Turns alarms and  
reminders on/off in the applications on  
your smartphone.  
Screen taps: Turns sounds associated  
with tapping the screen on/off, and sets  
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S  
289  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Event: Specifies the action for which  
you want to change the settings.  
Display and  
appearance settings  
NOTE The settings described here apply to  
all event types except phone calls. To set  
notifications for the various phone call  
Adjusting the brightness  
1
2
Press Option  
and then press  
.
Press Left and Right to adjust the  
brightness for when your smartphone is  
running on battery power and when it is  
running on external power.  
Play sound: Lets you turn the sound  
on/off for the selected event. To select a  
different sound, select the list to the  
right of this setting, and then select a  
different sound. To preview the sound,  
select Play Sound, and then select  
Play.  
3
Press OK  
.
Changing the text size and clarity  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Screen  
and select Settings.  
Repeat: Indicates whether the sound  
plays more than once, if turned on.  
.
3
4
Select the Text Size tab.  
Display message on screen: Indicates  
whether a notification message appears  
onscreen for the selected event.  
Press Left and Right to adjust the  
text size.  
5
6
Select the Clear Type tab.  
Vibrate when ringer switch off/on:  
Indicates whether your smartphone  
vibrates to notify you about the selected  
event.  
To smooth the edges of screen fonts,  
check the Enable Clear Type box.  
7
Press OK  
.
5
Press OK  
.
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S  
290  
                                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Displaying the clock  
Setting display formats  
You can display a clock at the top of every  
screen. You can also choose between a  
digital and an analog clock display.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Regional Settings  
and select Settings.  
.
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Clock & Alarms  
and select Settings.  
.
3
Select the More tab.  
3
4
On the Region tab, select a region from  
the list. The region selection determines  
all display formats (date, time, and so  
on) on your smartphone unless you use  
another Regional Settings field to select  
a different format for a specific type of  
display item.  
4
To display the clock, check the Display  
the clock on the title bar in all  
programs box.  
(Optional) Select any of the following  
tabs to customize individual format  
settings:  
5
6
Press OK  
.
To change the clock display format, tap  
and hold the clock and select Analog or  
Digital. If you select analog format, a  
Number: Sets the decimal symbol and  
number of decimal places, the digit  
grouping symbol and group size, list  
clock icon  
time.  
appears displaying the  
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S  
291  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
separators, negative number sign  
3
On the General tab, select Align  
symbol and format, leading zero display,  
and measurement system (metric vs.  
U.S.).  
Screen.  
4
5
Tap the screen where indicated.  
Press OK  
.
Currency: Sets the currency symbol  
and position, the decimal symbol and  
position, digit grouping symbol and  
group size, and negative number  
format.  
Changing the system color scheme  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Today  
.
On the Appearance tab, select a theme  
in the list.  
Time: Sets the time style, separators,  
and AM and PM symbols.  
4
Press OK  
.
Date: Sets the short date style,  
separators, and long date style.  
TIP You can also set the background for your  
5
Press OK  
.
Aligning the screen to correct tapping  
problems  
Application settings  
Occasionally, your screen may need to be  
readjusted. You know your screen needs  
adjustment when the wrong feature is  
activated when you tap the screen. To fix  
the problem, align the screen.  
Arranging the Start menu  
You can change the seven applications  
listed on the Start menu. You can still  
access the remaining applications by  
selecting Programs from the Start menu,  
and then selecting the application’s icon.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Screen  
and select Settings.  
.
1
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S  
292  
                                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
2
On the Personal tab, select Menus  
.
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select  
Buttons  
.
3
4
Check the boxes next to the  
applications you want to see in the Start  
menu.  
3
On the Program Buttons tab, highlight  
the button or key combination you want  
to change in the Button list. The  
hardware buttons are mapped to the  
following items:  
Press OK  
.
TIP Don’t forget the six icons across the top of  
the Start menu. They’re the apps you opened  
most recently, and its easy to get back to  
them: just use the 5-way to select one of the  
icons.  
Start  
OK  
= Start menu  
= OK/Close  
Option  
Internet Explorer  
+ Phone/Send  
=
Reassigning buttons  
You can use Buttons Settings to select  
which applications to associate with many  
of the buttons and key combinations on  
your smartphone.  
Option  
Option  
Option  
+ Start  
+ OK  
= File Explorer  
= Task Manager  
+ Calendar  
= Calculator  
A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S  
293  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Option  
+ Messaging  
= Tasks  
Hold Side = Camera  
Select the Assign a program list, and  
then select the application you want to  
assign to the button or key combination  
you selected.  
4
5
Select the Up/Down Control tab and  
adjust the settings for the Up  
and  
Down  
buttons on the 5-way.  
4
5
Check the Enabled box.  
Press OK  
.
Select the items you want to enable. If  
an item is highlighted and the Options  
button is active, select Options to  
choose the features you want enabled  
for the highlighted item.  
Setting up voice commands  
IMPORTANT The Voice Command  
application is available only for English,  
French, and German.  
6
Select Notifications and select the  
options for how you want to receive  
voice command notifications.  
Voice commands enable you to use speech  
to execute some commands on the Start  
menu and the Programs screen.  
Using voice commands  
1
Assign the Hold Side button to Voice  
details.  
IMPORTANT Do not use voice commands  
in your car until you read the End user  
notice about this kind of usage; see the  
safety and legal information included in  
your smartphone package for information.  
2
3
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select Voice  
Command  
and select Settings.  
.
A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S  
294  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
1
2
Set the Ringer switch at the top of your  
smartphone to Sound On  
TIP You can move quickly through voice  
.
commands by stopping the voice command  
response before it finishes. When Voice  
Command responds, you can press the Voice  
Command button before it completes the  
question. After the microphone icon is visible,  
you may say your answer.  
Hold your device close to your mouth  
and press and release the assigned  
Voice Command button (see Setting up  
voice commands). A tone plays and a  
microphone icon appears at the top of  
your screen.  
Setting input options  
3
In a clear voice say the command. For  
example:  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Input  
.
To access Help: Say “Help.” After Voice  
Command finishes speaking, a  
microphone icon appears at the top of  
your screen. Say your answer. For  
example, say “General” to access  
general Help topics.  
On the Input Method tab, set any of the  
following options:  
To access your Calendar: Say “Start  
Calendar.”  
To access your music: Say “Start  
Windows Media.” After Voice  
Command finishes speaking, a  
microphone icon appears at the top of  
your screen. Say your answer.  
NOTE The Input Method options you  
specify apply only to entering info using the  
screen. You can still enter info using your  
smartphones keyboard regardless of the  
onscreen input method you choose.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S  
295  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Input method: Specifies which  
onscreen input method you want to  
use:  
Block Recognizer: Use a single  
stroke to write letters, numbers,  
symbols, and punctuation, which are  
then converted into typed text. Use  
gestures to enter Return and  
Backspace.  
Keyboard: Tap keys on the onscreen  
keyboard to enter text.  
Suggest words when entering text:  
Indicates whether word suggestions  
appear as you enter text. You can also  
specify how many letters you want to  
enter before a suggestion appears, how  
many suggestions you want to see, and  
whether a space appears after you  
insert a suggested word.  
Letter Recognizer: Write individual  
letters, numbers, and punctuation,  
which are converted into typed text.  
Large/Small keys: If you selected  
Keyboard, select whether to use large  
or small onscreen keys. If you select  
Large keys, check the box if you want to  
use gestures for the space bar and the  
Backspace, Shift, and Return keys.  
TIP To enter a suggested word, press Down  
to highlight the suggestion, and then press  
Center to accept it.  
Options: If you selected Letter  
Recognizer, select Options and select  
the options you want.  
Clear Stored Entries: Deletes the  
database of word suggestions.  
4
Select the Word Completion tab and  
set any of the following options:  
Enable Auto Correct: Indicates  
whether common misspellings such as  
“teh” are corrected automatically.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S E T T I N G S  
296  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
5
Select the Options tab and set any of  
Scroll upon reaching the last line:  
the following options:  
Specifies whether the display  
automatically scrolls when you select  
the last line of visible info.  
6
Press OK  
.
Locking your  
smartphone and info  
Your smartphone includes several features  
that help you protect it from inadvertent  
use and keep your information private. The  
security software lets you use your  
smartphone for emergency calls, such as  
dialing your national emergency number  
(such as 911, 112, or 999), even if it is  
locked.  
Voice recording format: Specifies the  
format in which you save voice notes.  
Default zoom level for writing:  
Specifies the initial size of text entered  
from onscreen writing methods.  
Default zoom level for typing:  
Specifies the initial size of text entered  
using the keyboard.  
Keyguard: Manually disables all buttons  
and the screens touch-sensitive feature  
to prevent accidental presses in your  
briefcase or pocket.  
Capitalize first letter of sentence:  
Specifies whether the first letter of a  
sentence automatically appears in  
uppercase, without requiring you to  
press a Shift key.  
Auto-Keyguard and touchscreen  
lockout: Automatically enables Keyguard  
after a period of inactivity and lets you  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
297  
                                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature To dismiss Keyguard: Press Center  
.
during an active call.  
To manually turn on Keyguard when  
SIM card Lock: Requires a PIN to turn on  
your phone so you can make and answer  
calls.  
your smartphone screen is on: Do one of  
the following:  
Press and hold End  
.
System password lock: Requires a  
password to see any information on your  
smartphone.  
Press Option + End  
.
TIP If you’re using a headset or hands-free  
device and your smartphone is in a pocket or  
bag, you can manually turn on Keyguard  
during a call to prevent accidental key presses  
TIP To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen  
buttons while you’re holding your smartphone  
up to your ear to speak, you can disable the  
screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active  
calls. When the screen’s touch-sensitive  
feature is disabled, you must use the 5-way  
navigator to access items on the screen.  
TIP If your Today screen is displayed and  
you’re not on a call, you can also turn on  
Keyguard by pressing End.  
Turning on Auto-Keyguard  
Auto-Keyguard enables you to configure  
the Keyguard feature.  
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)  
By default, your keyboard locks so that you  
don’t accidentally press buttons or activate  
screen items while your smartphone is in a  
pocket or bag.  
1
2
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select  
Keyguard  
and select Settings.  
.
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard list and  
disable the Auto-Keyguard feature or set  
the period of inactivity that passes  
before the keyboard automatically locks.  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
298  
                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
card is locked, you must enter the PIN to  
power on your phone to make or receive  
calls, except for emergency numbers. The  
SIM card remains locked even if you move  
the card to another phone.  
To unlock your SIM card, turn on the phone  
and enter your PIN.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
phone is on and that you’re inside a  
Get your default PIN from your wireless  
service provider.  
4
Press OK  
.
Locking your screen  
1
2
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select  
Keyguard  
and select Settings.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone  
.
.
Select the PIN tab.  
3
Under Disable touchscreen, check or  
uncheck the While on a phone call box  
to determine whether the screen’s  
touch-sensitive feature is disabled  
during a call.  
4
Press OK  
.
Locking the SIM card  
You can lock your SIM (Subscriber Identity  
Module) card to prevent unauthorized use  
of your mobile account. When your SIM  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
299  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
4
Check the Require PIN when phone is Locking your smartphone  
used box.  
To protect your personal information, you  
can lock the system so that you need to  
enter your password to access any of your  
information or use other features of  
your smartphone.  
5
6
Enter the PIN and press OK  
.
Turn your phone off to activate the  
phone lock feature.  
Your SIM card locks when you turn off your  
phone and turn it back on. When your SIM  
card is locked, you can unlock your SIM  
card by entering your PIN.  
IMPORTANT If you lock your system, you  
must enter the exact password to unlock it.  
If you enter an incorrect password, you are  
given another chance. Each time an  
incorrect password is entered, you are  
given progressively longer time periods  
between your chances to enter the  
password. If you forget the password, you  
need to perform a hard reset to resume  
using your smartphone. Performing a hard  
reset deletes all the entries in your  
smartphone. However, you can restore all  
previously synchronized info the next time  
TIP If your wireless service provider changes  
the PIN, you need to change it on your  
smartphone. Press Start and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Phone. Select the  
PIN tab, and then select Change PIN.  
NOTE You need your PIN number to edit  
your PIN number or remove the locking  
feature. If you enter an incorrect PIN more  
times than allowed by your wireless  
service provider, the SIM card locks. After  
the SIM card locks, you need the PUK to  
unlock the SIM card. Contact your wireless  
service provider for more information and  
the PUK.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
On the Personal tab, select Lock  
.
On the Password tab, check the  
Prompt if device unused for box to  
turn on the password feature.  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
300  
                             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
4
5
Select the first list, and then select how  
long a period of inactivity must pass  
before you are prompted to enter a  
password to unlock the system.  
TIP If you lock your smartphone and use a  
Simple PIN as the password, you can dial an  
emergency number by entering the number in  
the password field and pressing Phone/Send.  
You do not need to press Option before  
entering the number. However, if you select  
Strong alphanumeric as the password type,  
you must first press Option twice before  
entering an emergency number in the  
password field.  
Select the Password type list, and then  
select a format for your password:  
Strong alphanumeric: A strong  
alphanumeric password must contain at  
least seven characters and must contain  
a combination of letters, numerals, and  
punctuation. You must press Option or  
Alt before entering numerals or  
punctuation.  
Entering owner information  
You can enter personal information that you  
want to associate with your smartphone,  
Simple PIN: A simple PIN must contain such as your name, company name, and  
at least four characters and includes phone number. You can also set whether  
numerals only. You do not need to press you want this information to appear when  
Option before entering the PIN  
numerals.  
you turn on your smartphone. If you lose  
your smartphone, this feature can help the  
person who finds it return it to you.  
6
7
8
9
Select Password and enter your  
password.  
1
2
Press Start  
On the Personal tab, select Owner  
Information  
and select Settings.  
Select Confirm and enter the password  
again.  
.
(Optional) Select the Hint tab and enter  
a hint to help you recall your password.  
3
On the Identification tab, enter any of  
the information you want to include.  
Press OK  
.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
301  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
System settings  
Setting the date and time  
Use Clock & Alarms Settings to set the  
time zone, time, and date for your home  
location and a location that you visit.  
To set the display format for the date and  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Clock & Alarms  
and select Settings.  
4
5
Select the Notes tab and enter any  
additional text you want to include.  
.
Select the Options tab and check the  
boxes to indicate which info (if any) you  
want to appear on the screen when you  
turn on your smartphone.  
3
On the Time tab, select Home.  
6
Press OK  
.
TIP You can also display your Owner  
Information on your Today screen. See  
Today screen for details.  
4
Select the first list, and then select the  
time zone for your home location.  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
302  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
5
6
7
Select the hour and press Up  
Down to increase or decrease the  
hour setting. Repeat this process for the  
minute, seconds, and AM/PM settings.  
or  
4
5
To disable this option, uncheck the  
Enable local network time box.  
If you want to keep your smartphone  
date and time set for your selected  
location, uncheck the Use network  
time zone box.  
Select the month and press Up  
Down to increase or decrease the  
month setting. Repeat this process for  
the date and year settings  
or  
Setting system alarms  
(Optional) Select Visiting and set the  
info for a location that you visit often.  
System alarms let you set alarms that are  
not associated with a task or appointment.  
For example, you can use your smartphone  
as an alarm clock when you travel, or set  
alarms to remind you when its time to take  
medication or pick up the kids.  
8
9
Press OK  
.
If prompted, select Yes to accept your  
changes.  
Synchronizing the date, time, and time  
zone with the network  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Clock & Alarms  
Select the Alarms tab.  
and select Settings.  
By default your smartphone synchronizes  
the date, time, and time zone with your  
wireless service providers network  
whenever your phone is on and you are  
inside a coverage area.  
.
3
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Clock & Alarms  
Select the More tab.  
and select Settings.  
.
3
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
303  
             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
4
5
Check a box to turn on that alarm.  
documents that are used to authenticate  
and exchange information on networks.  
Certificates can be issued for a user, a  
device, or a service.  
Select Description next to the box you  
checked and enter a description for the  
alarm.  
6
Tap the days of the week you want the  
alarm to go off. You can select multiple  
days for each alarm.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Certificates  
and select Settings.  
.
7
8
Tap the time, set the time you want the  
3
Select any of the following tabs:  
alarm to go off, and press OK  
.
Personal: Displays certificates that  
establish your identity when you log in  
to a secured network, such as a  
corporate network.  
Select the alarm icon and check the  
boxes to select how you want the alarm  
to go off. You can choose a single  
sound, a repeating sound, a flashing  
light, or vibration.  
Intermediate: Displays certificates  
issued from a root certificate whose  
purpose is to then issue personal  
certificates.  
TIP To change the alarm sound, select the  
alarm sound icon, select the Play Sound list,  
and then select the alarm sound you want to  
use.  
Root: Displays certificates that identify  
the computers, such as servers, to  
which you connect. These certificates  
help prevent unauthorized users from  
accessing your smartphone and  
information.  
9
Press OK  
twice.  
10 If prompted, select Yes to accept your  
changes.  
4
5
To view certificate details, select the  
certificate.  
Managing identity certificates  
Your smartphone may include preinstalled  
certificates. Certificates are digital  
Press OK  
.
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
304  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
TIP To delete a certificate, highlight the  
certificate name, press and hold Center on  
the 5-way, and then select Delete from the  
shortcut menu.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
This error reporting method  
meets the privacy regulations of the European  
Union (EU) as well as the Fair Information  
Practice Principles of the Federal Trade  
Commission in the United States. To view the  
Fair Information Practice Principles, visit the  
Federal Trade Commission website at ftc gov/  
Enabling error reporting  
Error Reporting sends info that helps  
diagnose application errors for devices  
running Windows Mobile® software. When  
an error is detected, a text file is created.  
You can review the file and choose  
whether you want it delivered to Microsoft  
Support. The information is used by  
programming groups at Microsoft for  
quality control and is not used for tracking  
individual users or installations for any  
marketing purpose. The info that is  
collected is technical info about the state of  
your system when the error occurred. No  
documents (or any info contained in them)  
are intentionally sent with the report. To  
ensure further security, the report is  
transmitted via a secure connection and is  
kept confidential and anonymous in a  
limited-access database.  
Your smartphone must be connected to  
your computer when you send the error  
report—provided your computer is  
connected to the Internet.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Error Reporting  
and select Settings.  
.
3
4
Select whether you want to enable or  
disable error reporting.  
Press OK  
.
How much storage space do I have left?  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Memory  
and select Settings.  
.
3
Select either of the following tabs:  
Main: Displays the amount of memory  
assigned to your applications and info,  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
305  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
as well as the amount of memory in use  
4
Press OK  
.
versus the available memory.  
Optimizing power settings  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Power  
and select Settings.  
.
3
On the Battery tab, view the power  
remaining in your battery.  
TIP If storage memory is low, consider using  
an expansion card to store files (see Using  
expansion cards). If program memory is low,  
close some applications to avoid slow  
smartphone performance (see Closing  
applications). You can also tap Find at the  
bottom of the screen to search for large files  
to delete and free up memory  
TIP An easy way to check the battery level is  
by tapping the battery icon in the title bar.  
TIP You can also open Memory settings by  
selecting the running programs icon in the  
upper-right corner of the Today screen, and  
then selecting the memory icon.  
4
Select the Advanced tab and set  
whether your smartphone screen turns  
off automatically after a specified period  
of inactivity. You can assign different  
intervals for battery power and external  
power.  
Storage Card: Displays the amount of  
memory available on an expansion card  
that is inserted in the expansion slot on  
your smartphone.  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
306  
                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
Turning wireless services on/off  
To quickly turn all wireless services on or  
off, press and hold Power  
.
Follow these steps to turn individual  
wireless features on or off.  
1
On the Today screen, select your  
wireless service provider name, or  
select Phone off if your wireless  
service provider name is not displayed.  
5
6
Select the Screen Saver tab, and check  
the box to enable the screen saver  
feature, or uncheck it to disable the  
screen saver.  
Press OK  
.
TIP To conserve additional battery power,  
disable the screen saver, or adjust the display  
backlight setting. Press Start and select  
Settings. Select the System tab, and then  
select Backlight. On the Battery Power tab,  
set whether the display backlight turns off  
automatically after a period of inactivity. You  
can also select the External Power tab to turn  
off the backlight when your smartphone is  
connected to an external charging source.  
2
Select a wireless feature to turn it on or  
off. The current state of the feature, ON  
or OFF, appears on a gray background.  
The description of the feature tells you  
what you can change it to. In the  
illustration, Airplane Mode and Wi-Fi are  
off, and Phone and Bluetooth are on.  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
307  
       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
TIP To change the settings for one of the  
displayed wireless features, press Settings  
(right softkey) and select the wireless feature  
you want to change.  
3
Press OK  
.
You can also turn wireless services on and  
off by tapping the signal-strength  
at the top of the screen and selecting  
Comm Manager.  
icon  
3
On the Update Setup screen, press  
Next (right softkey).  
Updating the system software  
Windows Update for Windows Mobile lets  
you download security updates and other  
important updates to the Windows Mobile  
operating system software on your  
smartphone.  
TIP Select View privacy statement to read  
about how using Windows Update affects the  
personal information on your smartphone.  
4
5
Select whether you want to run  
Windows Update manually or you want  
it to check for updates automatically,  
and press Next (right softkey).  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Windows Update.  
If you selected automatic updates,  
check the Use my data plan to check  
for and download updates box if you  
want to use your data plan instead of  
your basic wireless plan to update your  
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
308  
       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
smartphone. Using your data plan  
means that updates may occur more  
frequently but may result in additional  
data charges. Press Next (right softkey).  
Connection settings  
Managing ISP settings  
6
Press Finish (left softkey).  
Your smartphone is already set up to  
connect to the Internet using a high-speed  
data connection on your wireless service  
providers network. To connect to the  
Internet, simply start Internet Explorer  
Mobile.  
If you selected Automatic in step 4,  
Windows Update periodically checks for  
and downloads updates automatically. If  
you selected Manual in step 4, you can  
check for updates at any time by opening  
Windows Update and pressing Check  
Now (left softkey).  
For special situations, such as connecting  
to your internet service provider (ISP) or to  
a remote access server (RAS), you can set  
up another connection.  
To view detailed results of the last check  
for updates, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select View details.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Obtain the following  
information from your ISP or system  
administrator:  
TIP To switch between manual and automatic  
updates, open Windows Update, press Menu  
(right softkey), and select Change Schedule.  
To select or deselect the option to use your  
data plan to check for and download updates,  
press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Connections.  
ISP server phone number or access  
point  
Username  
Password  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Connections  
and select Settings.  
.
3
On the Tasks tab, select Manage  
existing connections.  
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
309  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
4
5
Select the Modem tab.  
Your servers host name or IP address  
Highlight the connection you want to  
view or change and select Edit, or  
select New to create a new connection.  
1
Install your third-party VPN client (see  
2
3
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Connections  
and select Settings.  
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to edit  
or create the connection.  
.
4
5
On the Tasks tab, select Add a new  
VPN server connection.  
Connecting to a VPN  
If you want to use your smartphone to  
access your corporate email account or  
other files on your corporate server, you  
may need to set up a VPN (virtual private  
network). A VPN enables you to log in to  
your corporate server through the  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
enter the settings provided by your  
corporate system administrator.  
TIP To manually start a data connection on  
your wireless service providers network or  
another network, go to Connections  
companys firewall (security layer).  
Settings, and on the Tasks tab, select  
Manage existing connections. Tap and hold  
the connection you want to start, and then  
select Connect from the shortcut menu.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check with your  
companys system administrator to see if a  
VPN is required to access the corporate  
network. If you need a VPN, you  
must purchase and install a third-party VPN  
client in order to use this feature.  
Setting up a proxy server  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Connections  
and select Settings.  
Ask your corporate system administrator  
for the following information:  
.
Your username and password  
Your servers domain name  
Your servers TCP/IP settings  
3
On the Tasks tab, select Set up my  
proxy server.  
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
310  
                                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
4
Check both the This network connects  
to the Internet and the This network  
uses a proxy server to connect to the  
Internet boxes.  
3 Do one of the following:  
5
6
Select Proxy server and enter the proxy  
server name.  
Press OK  
.
TIP To change settings such as the port  
number, proxy server type, or credentials,  
select Advanced.  
Turn on the proxy server: Check the  
Enable Pocket Internet Explorer Proxy  
box, enter the proxy server information,  
and select Apply.  
Turning a proxy server on or off  
Your wireless service provider may require  
a proxy server to access the Internet using  
your wireless service providers data  
Turn off the proxy server: Uncheck the  
Enable Pocket Internet Explorer Proxy  
box.  
connection. However, if you connect to the  
Internet using a Wi-Fi (see Connecting to a  
to a VPN) connection, the proxy server may  
prevent your smartphones web browser  
from locating certain websites. You can  
use the Internet Proxy application to turn  
the proxy server on or off, depending on  
how are you connecting to the Internet.  
4
Press OK  
.
Ending a data connection  
If your service plan includes  
minutes-of-use fees for data connections,  
you can reduce costs by ending the data  
connection when you’ve finished browsing  
the web.  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select Internet Proxy  
.
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
311  
         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
13  
1
2
On the Today screen, select your  
wireless service provider name.  
a feature, such as the camera or  
messaging, worked previously and this  
feature no longer works after enrollment,  
contact your system administrator to find  
out if this feature is disabled on your  
smartphone.  
Select Data Connection.  
Enrolling a domain  
If your company uses Microsoft System  
Center Mobile Device Manager, you may  
need to use the Domain Enroll settings to  
register your smartphone within your  
companys network.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Domain Enroll  
and select Settings.  
.
3
4
Press Enroll (right softkey).  
IMPORTANT After you enroll your  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
complete the enrollment process.  
smartphone in your companys network,  
your system administrator can turn various  
features on your smartphone on and off. If  
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
312  
 
CHAPTER  
14  
Troubleshooting  
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,  
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly  
asked questions. For additional information and answers to  
other common questions, visit palm.com/treoproumts-support.  
313  
   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
Transferring info from Reinstalling the  
another device  
desktop software  
For information on transferring your info  
from a previous Windows Mobile® device  
or from a Palm OS® by ACCESS device to  
your new Palm® TreoPro smartphone,  
instructions.  
If you have problems synchronizing using  
your desktop sync software, you may need  
to reinstall the software.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
computer profile includes administrator  
rights to install software. In large  
organizations, these are usually granted  
by the system administrator.  
DID YOU KNOW You can purchase a third-party  
?
application that lets you run Palm OS®  
applications on your smartphone.  
1
2
3
Shut down your computer and turn it on  
again.  
DID YOU KNOW If you have questions about  
?
Windows Mobile, you can go to  
windowsmobile.com. Search for Palm devices  
for information.  
On your computer, click Start > Control  
Panel > Add or Remove Programs.  
Remove your desktop software. For  
computers running Windows XP, the  
software is called Microsoft ActiveSync.  
For computers running Windows Vista,  
the software is called Windows Mobile  
Device Center.  
IMPORTANT Do not use a backup utility to  
transfer your info from another device to  
your new smartphone. This can cause your  
smartphone to malfunction.  
4
Quit any active applications, including  
virus scanners and Internet security  
applications.  
T R A N S F E R R I N G I N F O F R O M A N O T H E R D E V I C E  
315  
                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
5
To reinstall the software, switch your  
4
5
Slide the stylus out from its slot.  
smartphone to setup mode and connect  
your smartphone to your computer and  
follow the onscreen instructions. See  
detailed instructions.  
Use the stylus tip to gently press the  
reset button.  
.
Resetting your  
smartphone  
Performing a soft reset  
Performing a soft reset is similar to  
restarting a computer. If your smartphone  
is not responding or you have trouble  
synchronizing with your computer, a soft  
reset may help.  
1
If your smartphone responds to key  
presses, press and hold Power  
turn off your phone.  
to  
6
7
Wait for the progress bar on the Palm®  
logo screen to fill before continuing to  
use your smartphone.  
2
3
If the screen display is on, press  
Power  
to turn off the screen.  
Slide the back panel into place.  
Remove the back panel from your  
smartphone.  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
316  
               
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
TIP You can also do a soft reset by removing  
TIP Some third-party applications do not  
the battery and reinserting it.  
create a backup on your computer when you  
synchronize. If you do a hard reset, you may  
lose info in these applications and you need to  
reinstall the application on your smartphone  
after the hard reset. Please contact the  
application vendor to find out if your info is  
backed up during synchronization.  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
If the phone or the Bluetooth®  
wireless technology feature was on before a  
reset, these automatically turn on after the  
reset.  
Performing a hard reset  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
When you synchronize after a  
A hard reset erases all personal  
hard reset, the source folder in My  
Documents changes from Treo My  
Documents to WM_your name.  
information, such as appointments,  
contacts, and tasks, as well as programs  
you have added, such as third-party  
software on your smartphone. Never do a  
hard reset without first trying a soft reset.  
You can restore previously synchronized  
information the next time you sync.  
A hard reset can tell you whether a  
problem stems from your smartphone or  
from an application installed on it. If you do  
not experience the problem after you  
perform a hard reset, the problem may be  
related to software you installed. See  
Third-party applications for suggestions on  
diagnosing third-party software issues.  
IMPORTANT Synchronize to restore your  
Outlook data, such as Outlook email,  
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks. You  
can use a backup and restore solution.  
Make sure its an application that’s  
approved by Palm, such as the one  
included on your smartphone.  
1
Synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer so that your smartphone  
applications and info can be restored by  
synchronizing again after you perform  
the hard reset.  
2
Remove the back panel from your  
smartphone.  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
317  
                                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
3
4
Slide the stylus out from its slot.  
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery in an  
environmentally responsible and legal way. In  
some areas, disposal in household or  
If the screen is off, press Power  
wake up the screen.  
to  
business trash is prohibited. Visit palm.com/  
environment for more information.  
5
6
While pressing and holding End  
the tip of the stylus to gently press and  
release the reset button.  
, use  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
Your smartphone stores all  
your info even when you remove the battery.  
Continue pressing and holding End  
until the “Erase all data?” prompt  
appears.  
1
2
Press Power  
to turn off the  
screen.  
7
8
Press Up  
to confirm the hard reset.  
With the back panel facing you, press  
the lower-right corner of the back panel  
with your right thumb to release the  
panel. Remove the panel.  
Wait for the progress bar on the Treo  
logo screen to fill before continuing to  
use your smartphone.  
9
Slide the back panel into place.  
10 (Optional) Synchronize to restore your  
previously synchronized info. If you use  
a backup utility, you may also need to  
restore a backup to recover additional  
info and settings.  
Replacing the battery  
Your smartphone comes with a replaceable  
battery. Be sure to use a replacement  
battery from Palm that is compatible with  
Treo Pro models. Do not use a battery from  
any earlier model of smartphone.  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
318  
                       
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
3
4
Place a finger in the notch between the  
stylus and the battery, and then remove  
the battery.  
Performance  
The applications are running slower than  
usual  
Align the metal contacts on the new  
battery with the contacts of the battery  
compartment, and then press the  
battery into place.  
1
2
3
Press and hold OK  
Manager.  
to open Task  
Select Stop All to close all your open  
applications.  
Press OK  
.
If the previous steps don’t fix the problem,  
reset). If the problem persists, follow these  
steps to turn off the Voice Command  
setting, if it is enabled:  
1
2
1
2
Press Start  
Select Personal, and then select Voice  
Command  
and select Settings.  
.
3
4
Uncheck the Enabled box.  
Press OK  
1
2
Battery contacts  
Smartphone contacts  
5
Slide the back panel into place.  
P E R F O R M A N C E  
319  
           
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
computer to charge your smartphone (and  
not to sync), you need to turn off setup  
mode. When the Setup screen appears on  
your computer, on your smartphone, press  
Cancel (right softkey), and then press Exit  
(right softkey).  
TIP Be sure that third-party applications are  
designed for Windows Mobile 6.1  
Professional. Applications written for  
Windows Mobile 6.1 Standard or earlier  
versions of Windows Mobile software do not  
work with your smartphone.  
If you can try a free version of the software  
before purchasing it, you can test it first to  
make sure it works properly.  
Screen  
My battery seems to drain quickly  
The screen appears blank  
If you have a push email solution or if you  
have set up a schedule for wireless  
synchronization, check with your email  
provider or system administrator to make  
sure that the server is set up properly to  
work with your smartphone. Incorrect  
server setup can cause excessive drain on  
your battery.  
1
2
3
If this is the first time you are turning on  
your smartphone, you need to take out  
and reinsert the battery to turn on the  
Alternately, connect your smartphone to  
a wall outlet using the USB AC charger  
If you’re on a call, when the time period  
specified in Backlight Settings expires,  
the screen dims; one minute later, the  
screen automatically turns off.  
Press any key except End to wake up  
the screen. Pressing End hangs up the  
call.  
For more tips on conserving battery life,  
I want to charge my smartphone by  
connecting it to my computer, when  
when I connect them, a Setup screen  
appears  
Look closely at the screen. If you can  
see a dim image, try adjusting the  
If you just want to use the connection  
between your smartphone and your  
S C R E E N  
320  
                 
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
screen brightness (see Adjusting the  
Network connection  
4
5
If that doesn’t work, perform a soft  
Signal strength is weak  
1
2
3
4
5
If you’re standing, move about 3 meters  
(10 feet) in any direction.  
If that doesn’t work, connect your  
smartphone to the USB AC charger (see  
Charging the battery) and perform a soft  
reset again  
If you’re in a building, move near a  
window. Open any metal blinds.  
6
7
If you are using a third-party application,  
make sure that the application supports  
320x320 screen resolution.  
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or  
to a more open area.  
If you’re outdoors, move away from  
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.  
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard  
reset (see Performing a hard reset).  
If you’re in a vehicle, move your  
smartphone so that its level  
with a window.  
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to  
taps or activates wrong features  
6
Try using a hands-free Bluetooth  
headset to see if that improves the  
signal strength.  
1
Make sure there is no debris trapped  
under the edges of the screen.  
2
3
Press Start  
Select the System tab, and then select  
Screen  
and select Settings.  
TIP Become familiar with low coverage areas  
where you live, commute, work, and play so  
you know when to expect signal strength  
issues.  
.
4
On the General tab, select Align  
Screen.  
5
6
Tap the screen where indicated.  
Press OK  
.
N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N  
321  
           
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
mobile network  
Your phone is on and a 3G UMTS  
data connection is active. You  
can make and receive calls and  
transmit data simultaneously.  
1
2
3
Try the suggestions above for weak  
signals.  
Your phone is connected to a  
HSDPA UMTS network, but you  
are not actively transmitting data.  
You can still make or receive  
calls.  
Turn off your phone and turn it on again  
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
My phone seems to turn off by itself  
NOTE In most cases, when your  
phone is connected to a UMTS  
network (either 3G or HSDPA)  
but you are not actively  
transmitting data, the 3G icon  
appears. The H icon may appear  
when your phone is connected  
to a HSDPA UMTS network, but  
you are not actively transmitting  
data.  
If a system error and reset occur, the  
phone automatically turns on if it was on  
before the reset. However, if your  
smartphone can’t determine if your phone  
was on before the reset, it does not  
automatically turn on the phone (see  
I can’t tell if data services are available  
Your phone is on and an HSDPA  
UMTS data connection is active.  
You can make and receive calls  
and transmit data  
The following icons appear in the title bar  
to indicate whether data services are  
available:  
Your phone is connected to a 3G  
UMTS network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
simultaneously.  
N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N  
322  
       
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
Your phone is connected to an  
EDGE network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
Contact your wireless service provider  
to verify that your subscription plan  
includes data services and that these  
services have been correctly activated.  
Your wireless service provider should  
also be able to tell you if there are any  
outages in your location.  
Your phone is on and an EDGE  
data connection is active. You  
can still make or receive calls,  
but the data transmission is  
automatically interrupted.  
Press and hold Power  
to turn off  
your phone, then press and hold the  
same button to turn it back on.  
Your phone is connected to a  
GPRS network, but you are not  
actively transmitting data. You  
can still make or receive calls.  
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
Confirm that data services are correctly  
configured on your smartphone by  
doing the following:  
Your phone is on and a GPRS  
data connection is active. You  
can still make or receive calls,  
but the data transmission is  
automatically interrupted.  
1
2
Press Start  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Connections  
and select Settings.  
.
3
4
On the Tasks tab, select Manage  
existing connections.  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
Internet  
If your wireless service providers name  
Your smartphone supports GPRS or UMTS  
(3G or HSDPA) wireless data networks.  
To connect to the Internet, you must  
subscribe to data services with your  
wireless service provider.  
appears in the list, press OK  
. If not,  
contact your wireless service provider  
for assistance.  
N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N  
323  
           
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
I can’t send or receive text or multimedia  
messages  
Your Bluetooth device is charged and  
turned on.  
Make sure your phone is on and that  
Your smartphone is within range of the  
hands-free device. Bluetooth range is  
up to 10 meters (30 feet) in optimum  
environmental conditions, which include  
the absence of the following: obstacles,  
radio interference from nearby  
you’re inside a coverage area (see  
Contact your wireless service provider  
to verify that your plan includes  
messaging services, that these services  
have been correctly activated, and that  
they are available at your location. Your  
wireless service provider should be able  
to tell you if messaging services have  
been experiencing transmission delays.  
electronic equipment, and other factors.  
The Bluetooth Settings screen is closed.  
You are away from other devices using  
the 2.4 GHz radio frequency, such as  
cordless phones, microwaves, and  
Wi-Fi equipment. If this is impossible,  
move the phone closer to the  
If possible, contact the recipient or  
sender of the message, and make sure  
the receiving device can handle the type  
of message you’re sending.  
hands-free device.  
The device specifications are  
compatible with your smartphone.  
If a text message arrives but does not  
display a notification, perform a soft  
reset (see Performing a soft reset).  
I lost the connection between my  
smartphone and my Bluetooth headset  
I can’t make or receive calls using a  
hands-free device with Bluetooth®  
wireless technology  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth.  
Verify all of the following:  
3
4
Select the Devices tab.  
The Turn on Bluetooth box is checked  
Select your headset name from the list.  
in Bluetooth Settings.  
N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N  
324  
                   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
5
In Partnership Settings, make sure the  
Hands Free box is checked.  
Synchronization  
6
7
8
Select Save.  
Synchronization enables you to back up the  
information on your smartphone onto your  
computer or your server. If you ever need  
to perform a hard reset or otherwise erase  
all your information on your smartphone,  
you can synchronize your smartphone with  
your computer to restore the info. To make  
sure you always have an up-to-date backup  
of your info, synchronize frequently.  
Highlight the headset name.  
Press and hold Center  
to open the  
shortcut menu and select Set as  
Hands-Free.  
9
Test your headset by making or  
receiving a call.  
If the headset still doesn’t work, delete the  
existing partnership and create a new one.  
To delete the partnership:  
You can synchronize email and other  
information directly with Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server  
2003 with Service Pack 2 using Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync®, or you can  
synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer, using the desktop sync software  
that came with your smartphone.  
1
2
Press Start  
and select Settings.  
Select the Connections tab, and then  
select Bluetooth.  
3
4
Highlight the headset device name.  
Press and hold Center  
to open the  
shortcut menu and select Delete.  
5
Create a new partnership (see  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
You can go to the Windows  
Mobile website for more information at  
DID YOU KNOW  
?
A common cause of sync  
problems is the presence of protective  
software, such as VPNs or firewalls, on your  
computer or network.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
325  
                   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
Desktop sync software  
4
If you still cannot synchronize, go to  
synchronization support.  
This section covers issues with  
synchronizing using the desktop sync  
software that came with your smartphone.  
If you have a Windows XP computer, the  
desktop sync software is called  
I am in sync mode, but synchronization  
isn’t working.  
ActiveSync® desktop software. If you have  
a Windows Vista computer, the desktop  
sync software is called Windows Mobile  
Device Center.  
Even if you are in sync mode,  
synchronization cannot take place unless  
you have the desktop sync software  
installed on your computer. If you did not  
install the software during initial setup but  
want to synchronize, switch to setup mode  
so that you can install the software.  
synchronization) for help with direct  
wireless synchronization with an Exchange  
server.  
1
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
My smartphone does not sync when I  
connect it to my computer with the USB  
cable. Instead, I see a Treo Setup screen.  
2
Select the System tab, and then select  
PC Setup  
.
3
4
Select Set up my PC.  
Your connection did not automatically  
switch to sync mode. Follow these steps  
to switch modes manually.  
If you still cannot synchronize, go to  
synchronization support.  
1
2
3
On your smartphone, press Start  
and select Settings.  
The desktop sync software does not  
respond to sync attempt  
Select the System tab, and then select  
PC Setup  
.
As you complete the following steps,  
synchronize after each step. If the  
Select Synchronize.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
326  
     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
synchronization is successful, you do not  
need to complete the remaining steps.  
Windows XP computer: Click Start >  
Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync.  
1
2
3
Verify that the USB cable is securely  
connected at all points (see Setting up  
Windows Vista computer: Click Start  
> All Programs > Windows Mobile  
Device Center.  
Make sure that all of the files you’re  
trying to sync are closed on both your  
computer and your smartphone.  
4
Do one of the following:  
Windows XP computer: Double-click  
the ActiveSync  
icon in your taskbar.  
On a Windows XP computer, look for  
From the File menu, select Connection  
Settings. Make sure the Allow USB  
connections box is checked and click  
Connect.  
the ActiveSync  
your smartphone screen and the  
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on  
icon at the top of  
your computer to make sure ActiveSync  
desktop software is running on your  
computer. On a Windows Vista  
computer, look for the connection  
icon at the top of your smartphone  
screen.  
Windows Vista computer: Click Start  
> All Programs > Windows Mobile  
Device Center. Select Connect  
without setting up your device, and  
then select Connection settings. Make  
sure the Allow USB connections box  
is checked and click Connect.  
If the correct icons are not displayed, do  
the following:  
5
On your smartphone, press Start  
select Settings, select the  
,
Smartphone: Press Start  
, select  
Programs. and select ActiveSync  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Connections. Make sure the  
Synchronize all PCs using this  
connection box is checked, and that  
USB is selected from the list.  
.
Connections tab, and then select USB  
to PC . If the Enable advanced  
network functionality box is checked,  
uncheck it. If this box is currently  
unchecked, then check it.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
327  
   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
6
7
8
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
Right-click the gray ActiveSync  
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right  
corner of your computer screen and  
select Open Microsoft ActiveSync.  
Restart your computer and make sure  
the desktop sync software is running.  
Click File, and then click Delete  
Mobile Device. When asked to  
confirm, click Yes .  
If problems persist and you’re  
synchronizing through a USB hub, try  
connecting the USB cable to a different  
USB port or directly to your computers  
built-in USB port.  
Connect your smartphone and your  
computer to the USB cable.  
9
If you’re already synchronizing through a  
built-in USB port on the front of your  
computer, move the USB cable to a  
USB on the back of your computer if  
your computer has USB ports in both  
places.  
When the Synchronization Setup  
Wizard appears, follow the steps to  
establish a sync relationship between  
your smartphone and your computer.  
12 If your organization uses a firewall or a  
VPN connection, synchronizing with  
ActiveSync may not work. For a  
Windows XP computer only, go to  
microsoft.com and search for the  
following topics to help with specific  
firewall setup situations:  
10 Uninstall the desktop software that  
came with your smartphone, and then  
repeat the installation process (see  
11 For a Windows XP computer only,  
delete the existing partnership between  
your smartphone and your computer  
and create a new one by doing the  
following steps in turn:  
ActiveSync USB Connection  
Troubleshooting Guide  
ActiveSync with Sygate Personal  
Firewall  
Disconnect your smartphone and your  
computer from the USB cable.  
ActiveSync with TrendMicro PC-cillin  
Internet Security  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
328  
   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
ActiveSync with Norton Personal  
Firewall  
Microsoft Office Outlook subfolders and  
public folders are not accessible with  
the included software. You may want to  
use a third-party solution instead.  
ActiveSync with Zone Alarm Security  
Suite  
If you’re trying to sync offline, be sure  
to set your Microsoft Office Outlook  
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to  
be available offline  
ActiveSync with McAfee Personal  
Firewall  
ActiveSync with Windows Firewall  
13 Verify with your computer hardware  
vendor that your operating system  
supports your internal USB controller.  
For music files, update the library in  
Windows Media Player Mobile (see  
For pictures and videos, see  
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t  
appear where it should  
music for information on the location of  
synchronized items.  
With the included desktop sync  
software, your smartphone can  
For Office Mobile files, see Where are  
information on the location of  
synchronized files.  
synchronize with the root folders of  
Microsoft Office Outlook Contacts,  
Calendar, Tasks, and Notes (Outlook  
sold separately; a free trial version is  
available for download from your  
smartphone). If you want to synchronize  
with a global Exchange Address Book,  
you must copy the addresses to your  
local Contacts list in Microsoft Office  
Outlook (right-click the addresses and  
select Add to Personal Address Book).  
If you’re still having problems, try the  
following:  
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with  
the intended desktop personal  
information manager (PIM). The  
desktop sync software lets you  
synchronize with Microsoft Office  
Outlook for Windows. If you use a  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
329  
                 
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
different PIM, you need to install  
before you installed Windows Media  
Player.  
third-party software to synchronize. For  
more information, consult the company  
that makes the PIM.  
My appointments show up in the wrong  
time slot after I sync  
2
3
Open the desktop sync software on  
your computer, and make sure the Files  
synchronization option is selected (see  
1
Make sure that you installed the  
desktop sync software that came with  
your smartphone. If you’re not sure  
whether this software is installed,  
Uninstall the desktop sync software,  
reboot your computer, and then repeat  
the installation process (see Reinstalling  
2
3
Open Microsoft Office Outlook and  
correct the wrong entries.  
Synchronization starts but doesn’t finish  
Manually enter any information you  
added to your smartphone since the last  
time you synchronized.  
Make sure that you installed the desktop  
software that came with your smartphone.  
If you’re not sure whether this software is  
installed, reinstall it (see Reinstalling the  
4
Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
My scheduled sync doesn’t work  
My video and music files won’t sync  
By default, a scheduled sync does not work  
while you are roaming. This is to prevent  
roaming charges on your account. If  
roaming charges are not a concern, follow  
these steps to continue your sync schedule  
1
2
Make sure you have Windows Media  
Player 10 or later installed on your  
computer.  
Reinstall the desktop sync software  
Media file synchronization fails if you  
installed the desktop sync software  
1
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
330  
           
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
2
3
Select ActiveSync  
.
An alert tells me that ActiveSync  
encountered a problem with [item type]  
[item name]  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Schedule.  
An error occurred during the sync of a  
single item. This error can usually be  
corrected only by removing the item that  
caused the error. If you sync again to see if  
the error persists, be aware that items  
causing this type of error are skipped and  
do not show up again.  
4
5
Check the Use above setting when  
roaming box.  
Press OK  
.
An alert tells me that ActiveSync  
encountered a problem on the server  
There is a temporary problem with the  
server or the server may be temporarily  
overloaded. Try again later. If the problem  
persists, contact your system  
My Today screen settings are not restored  
after a hard reset  
Settings such as the background image and  
plug-in choices are not backed up during  
synchronization, so they can’t be restored  
after a hard reset. If you use a backup  
utility, you may be able to restore a backup  
to recover your Today screen settings and  
other additional info.  
administrator.  
An alert tells me that there is not enough  
free memory to sync my info  
The ActiveSync application on your  
smartphone ran out of storage space. Try  
the following:  
Exchange ActiveSync (wireless  
synchronization)  
1
Go to Memory Settings and close all  
This section covers issues with direct  
wireless synchronization with an Exchange  
server. See Desktop sync software for help  
with synchronizing using your desktop sync  
software.  
2
If the problem persists, see Making  
suggestions on other ways to free up  
space on your smartphone.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
331  
                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
An alert tells me the device timed out  
while waiting for credentials  
TIP If you are synchronizing with an Exchange  
server and you’re unable to change your lock  
settings, check with your system  
administrator to find out if a systemwide  
locking policy is in place.  
The Exchange server credentials screen  
was left open too long. Re-enter the  
Exchange server credentials, and try to  
sync again.  
An alert tells me that the server could not  
be reached  
Your smartphone had to wait too long to  
connect to the Exchange server. The  
connection may have been lost, the server  
may be temporarily overloaded, or the  
server may have encountered an internal  
error. Check your Exchange server name  
and proxy server settings (see Setting up  
again later.  
Email  
I have problems using my account  
Occasionally you may experience problems  
using an email account after you set it up. If  
you followed the account setup procedure  
and are experiencing problems in using the  
account, verify that the account complies  
with your email providers requirements by  
following these steps:  
An alert tells me that my account  
information could not be detected  
Verify both your password and your  
username for your email account.  
When you set up the Exchange server sync  
options, the credentials page was left  
up wireless synchronization), or set up your  
smartphone to sync only with a computer,  
and try to sync again.  
Some email service providers require  
you to be on their network to use your  
email account. If this is the case, be  
sure to use your providers network as  
the connection type for the account.  
Some email service providers have  
other requirements specific to their  
E M A I L  
332  
                   
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
service. Check with your service  
provider to see if any provider-specific  
requirements exist.  
occur at the expected day and time. See  
details.  
Service provider settings frequently  
change. If your email account was  
working but you are currently  
Press Start  
then select ActiveSync  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
, select Programs, and  
. Press  
experiencing problems, check with your  
service provider to see if any of the  
account settings have changed.  
Configure Server. Make sure the verify  
password setting is on. This is required  
for over-the-air synchronization.  
I have problems sending and receiving  
email  
I have problems sending email  
If you are able to receive email messages  
but cannot send them, try the following  
steps, in turn:  
Short periods of time when email is  
unavailable are common due to server  
problems or poor wireless coverage. If you  
have problems sending or receiving mail  
for an extended period of time, check with  
your ISP or email service provider to verify  
that the service is working properly.  
Make sure your ISP or email provider  
allows you to access email on a  
smartphone. Some providers do not  
offer this option at all; other providers  
require an upgrade for accessing email  
on a smartphone.  
Scheduled email synchronization is not  
working  
Press Start  
then select ActiveSync  
Menu (right softkey) and select  
Configure Server. Make sure the SSL  
box is checked.  
, select Programs, and  
. Press  
If email synchronization is occurring and  
you turn your smartphone off or the  
connection to your email service provider is  
disconnected, the synchronization fails.  
Enter the name of a different outgoing  
mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs,  
Check the synchronization schedule to  
make sure that email sync is set to  
E M A I L  
333  
     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
such as cable companies, require that  
4
5
Click OK.  
you have an Internet connection to their  
network to send email through their  
servers. In this case, you can almost  
always receive email from these  
accounts, but if you want to send email,  
you must send it through another server  
Start the email client software and  
make sure it is configured as the default  
MAPI client. Consult the documentation  
for your desktop email application for  
more information.  
When I sync with my Exchange server my  
info is not downloading to my  
smartphone  
Check with your system administrator to  
obtain the name of the mail server that  
offers you wireless access to the corporate  
mail system. If you cannot obtain the name  
of this server (some companies do not give  
it out, because they do not want wireless  
access to their servers), you cannot use  
Exchange ActiveSync to synchronize with  
the Exchange server. You can also check  
the following setting:  
My vCard or vCal email attachment isn’t  
forwarding correctly  
Microsoft Office Outlook provides several  
features including vCard and vCal that work  
with email client software on a Windows  
computer. For these features to work  
correctly, the email client software must be  
properly set up. Follow these steps to  
check the settings:  
1
2
3
Click Start on your computer and select  
Settings.  
1
2
3
Press Start  
and select Programs.  
Select ActiveSync  
.
Select Internet Options and click the  
Programs tab.  
Press Menu (right softkey) and select  
Configure Server.  
Make sure that the email field is set to  
the correct email client software.  
4
Make sure the SSL box is checked.  
E M A I L  
334  
                 
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
TIP Your smartphone can open your email  
Web  
application when you select an email address  
on a web page. If nothing happens when you  
select the link, try setting up your email  
application first.  
I can’t access a web page  
First, make sure you have Internet access:  
Open Internet Explorer Mobile and try to  
view a web page you’ve loaded before. To  
ensure that you’re viewing the page  
directly from the Internet, press Menu  
(right softkey) and select Refresh. After  
confirming your Internet connection, try to  
view the page in question again. If it comes  
up blank, press Menu (right softkey) and  
select Refresh.  
An image or map is too small on my  
smartphone screen  
Internet Explorer Mobile has several  
viewing modes: One Column, Default,  
Desktop, and Full Screen. Switch to  
Desktop to see the full-size image (see  
A secure site refuses to permit a  
transaction  
If you’re still having trouble, the page may  
contain elements that are not supported by  
Internet Explorer Mobile, such as Flash,  
Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, and  
other plug-ins.  
Some websites don’t support certain  
browsers for transactions. Please contact  
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site  
allows transactions using Internet Explorer  
Mobile.  
Some websites use a redirector to their  
true home page. For example, if you enter  
may resolve to http://palm.com/us/support.  
If Internet Explorer Mobile can’t follow the  
redirect, try using a desktop browser to  
see the landing page of the redirector, and  
enter that address in Internet Explorer  
Mobile.  
WE B  
335  
                           
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
For best results, verify that you have the  
brightest light source coming from  
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.  
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the  
subject in front of a window or light.  
Camera  
DID YOU KNOW Pictures are 16-bit color.  
?
Resolution settings range from the low end of  
VGA (160 x 120 pixels) to a high end of 2  
megapixels (1600 x 1200). Video resolution  
settings range from a low end of 176 x 144  
pixels to a high end of 352 x 288 pixels. You  
can change the resolution setting by pressing  
Menu (right softkey) and selecting Resolution  
(still images) or Quality (video).  
Make sure the subject is at least 0.5  
meters (18 inches) away from the  
camera to ensure good focus.  
When you synchronize with a Windows XP  
computer, your Camera images are stored  
in the C:\Documents and  
Settings\<Username>\MyDocuments\Treo  
My Documents folder on your hard drive  
Here are some tips for taking good pictures  
with the built-in camera:  
Clean the cameras lens with a soft,  
lint-free cloth.  
The Camera preview image looks strange  
Some third-party applications overwrite the  
color settings on your smartphone with  
their own 8-bit color settings. This can  
affect the Camera Preview Mode. Delete  
third-party applications one by one until the  
preview image improves (see Removing  
Take pictures in bright lighting  
conditions. Low-light images may be  
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the  
camera.  
Hold the camera as still as possible. Try  
supporting your picture-taking arm  
against your body or a stationary object  
(such as a wall).  
Keep the subject of the pictures still.  
Exposure time is longer with lower light  
levels, so you may see a blur.  
C A M E R A  
336  
                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
6.1 Professional operating system on  
your smartphone.  
Third-party  
applications  
3
Delete the most recently installed  
application from your smartphone (see  
Sometimes third-party applications can  
cause conflicts on your smartphone.  
Third-party applications that modify  
wireless features may affect the  
performance of your smartphone and may  
require extra troubleshooting. Use caution  
when installing the following types of  
applications:  
4
5
6
7
If the problem persists, perform another  
soft reset.  
If possible, synchronize or use a backup  
utility to back up your most recent info.  
Synchronize or restore your backup to  
restore the info in your built-in  
applications.  
Ringtone managers  
Caller ID applications  
Instant messaging  
8
9
If the problem is resolved, begin  
reinstalling your third-party applications  
one at a time.  
Applications that modify when your  
phone or data connections turn on or off  
and how your phone behaves  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
application you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
If you recently installed an application and  
your smartphone seems to be stuck, try  
the following:  
Getting more help  
1
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
Contact the vendor of any third-party  
software if you require further assistance.  
2
Make sure the third-party application is  
compatible with the Windows Mobile  
T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S  
337  
                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
messages). You may also want to empty  
the deleted items folder.  
TIP Remember that not all third-party  
applications were written with the Treo Pro  
smartphone keyboard and 5-way navigator in  
mind. You may encounter strange behavior or  
errors in these applications if you use the  
keyboard and the 5-way navigator.  
Internet: If you save links to pages you’ve  
visited in Internet Explorer Mobile, you may  
want to clear all recent pages  
Third-party applications: You can delete  
infrequently used applications or move  
them to an expansion card (see Moving  
Making room on your  
smartphone  
If you store a large amount of information,  
or install many third-party applications, the  
internal memory on your smartphone may  
fill up. Here are some common ways to  
clear space on your smartphone:  
Also, remember that your smartphone  
includes an expansion card slot, and that  
you can store applications and information  
on expansion cards. However, you still  
need free memory on the smartphone  
itself to run applications from an expansion  
card.  
Camera: Large images or videos take up a  
lot of memory. Move images to an  
expansion card or delete images from your  
smartphone (see Pictures & Videos).  
Messaging: Multimedia content and email  
attachments can consume excessive  
memory. Move multimedia content and  
attachments to an expansion card, or  
delete large files from your smartphone  
(see Deleting messages and Deleting  
Voice quality  
Is the other person hearing an echo?  
Try decreasing the volume on your  
smartphone to avoid coupling  
M A K I N G R O O M O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
338  
                                                     
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
or feedback on the other person’s end.  
This applies to both the speakerphone  
and to the handset earpiece.  
Are you hearing your own voice echo?  
Ask the other person to turn down their  
volume or to hold the phone closer to  
their ear.  
Position the smartphone closer to your  
ear to prevent sound leaking back to the  
microphone. Keep your hand away from Is your voice too quiet on the other end?  
the microphone hole, which is on the  
lower-right side of your smartphone.  
smartphone, or the hands-free  
Be sure to hold the bottom of the  
If you’re using Speakerphone mode  
with your smartphone lying on a flat  
surface, try turning the smartphone  
“face down” (screen facing the  
surface).  
microphone, close to your mouth.  
Check the signal strength indicator. If the  
signal is weak, try to find an area with  
better coverage.  
V O I C E Q U A L I T Y  
339  
         
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G  
14  
V O I C E Q U A L I T Y  
340  
beam  
Terms  
The process of sending or receiving an  
entry or application using the infrared (IR)  
port on your smartphone or using  
Bluetooth® wireless technology. See  
ActiveSync®  
The software on your smartphone that  
exchanges and updates the information  
on your Palm® TreoPro smartphone with  
the information on your computer.  
Bluetooth® wireless technology  
Technology that enables devices such as  
smartphones, mobile phones, and  
computers to connect wirelessly to each  
other so that they can exchange  
information over short distances. For more  
ActiveSync desktop software  
The software on your Windows XP  
computer that exchanges and updates the  
information on your computer with the  
information on your smartphone. To open  
ActiveSync on your computer, double-click  
the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your screen. If the  
icon does not appear, click Start > All  
Programs (or navigate to the Programs  
group) > Microsoft ActiveSync. See  
desktop software  
A Personal Information Manager (PIM)  
application for computers, such as  
Microsoft Outlook®, that helps you manage  
your personal information and keep it  
synchronized with your smartphone. See  
auto-off interval  
The time of inactivity that passes before  
the screen on your smartphone turns off.  
The wireless features on your smartphone  
are unaffected by this setting. See  
dialog box  
A set of options and command buttons that  
is enclosed by a border and that enables  
you to carry out a specific task.  
T E R M S  
341  
                       
EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM  
Evolution)  
infrared (IR)  
A way of transmitting information using  
An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers light waves. You use the IR port on  
data speeds that are up to 3 times faster  
than standard GPRS connections, with  
your smartphone to transfer information  
between other IR devices within a  
rates up to 236.8 Kbps. (Additional charges short radius. See Beaming information.  
may apply.) See What are all those icons?  
Lithium-ion (Li-ion)  
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File Format)  
The rechargeable battery technology used  
A standard for storing interchange  
information in image files that enables  
images to be interoperable across multiple  
devices.  
in your smartphone. See Charging the  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®  
Technology that allows your smartphone to  
synchronize email, contacts, calendar  
events, and tasks wirelessly with Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007. See Setting  
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)  
A mobile Internet connectivity technology  
that allows persistent data connections.  
(Additional charges may apply.) See What  
are all those icons?  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)  
HSDPA (High-Speed Download Packet  
Access)  
An enhanced messaging system that  
enables you to send pictures, animations,  
and ringtones almost instantly. See  
An evolutionary enhancement to UMTS  
packet data. HSDPA uses different  
modulation and coding techniques to  
improve downlink performance. Your  
smartphone supports data rates up to  
700Kbps.  
Mobile Device  
The component on your Windows XP  
computer that enables you to install  
applications and other information on your  
T E R M S  
342  
                         
smartphone. To access it, open Windows  
Explorer or My Computer and look for the  
icon that represents your smartphone. See  
piconet  
An ad-hoc network of devices that uses  
Bluetooth wireless technology to connect  
one master device with up to seven active  
slave devices. The network can include up  
to 255 inactive, or parked, slave devices  
which the master device can bring into  
active status at any time.  
partnership  
The connection that you make between  
two devices by means of Bluetooth  
wireless technology. The devices recognize  
each other because each device finds the  
same passkey on the other device. After  
you create a partnership between the  
devices, you no longer need to enter the  
passkey. Partnership is also known as  
paired relationship, pairing, trusted device,  
and trusted pair on some devices. See  
PIM (personal information manager)  
A genre of software that includes  
applications such as Microsoft Outlook,  
Palm® Desktop software, Lotus Notes, and  
ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,  
schedules, tasks, and memos.  
PIN (personal identification number)  
The password assigned to your SIM card  
by your wireless service provider. Turning  
on the PIN lock secures your wireless  
account. See also PUK. See Locking the  
Phone Off  
Appearing on the Today screen, this  
indicates that your smartphone is not  
connected to any network, and you cannot  
make calls except those to emergency  
numbers. You can still use the organizer  
PIN2 (personal identification number 2)  
A code that protects certain network  
features, however. See Turning your phone settings such as fixed dialing. See Enabling  
T E R M S  
343  
                 
PUK (personal unblocking key)  
phone numbers, and SMS messages on  
A special extended password assigned to  
your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN  
more than the allowed number of times,  
your SIM is blocked and you must call your  
wireless service provider for the PUK. See  
SMS (Short Messaging Service)  
The service that exchanges short text  
messages almost instantly between  
mobile devices. Your smartphone can send  
and receive text messages while you are  
PUK2 (personal unblocking key 2)  
A special extended password assigned to  
your SIM card, specific to certain network  
features such as fixed dialing. If you enter  
the wrong PIN2 more than the allowed  
number of times, your SIM is blocked and  
you must call your wireless service  
provider for the PUK2. See Enabling fixed  
streaming  
Technology that enables you to access  
media content—for example, watch video  
or listen to an audio program—directly  
from the Internet on your smartphone  
without needing to download and a save a  
file on your smartphone. See Viewing a  
video.  
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)  
A security protocol that enables you to  
send personal information in a more secure  
manner over the Internet.  
synchronization  
The process in which information that is  
entered or updated on your smartphone,  
your computer, or a server is automatically  
updated in one of the other locations either  
wirelessly or by means of a cable  
SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card  
The smartcard, inserted into your  
smartphone, that contains your mobile  
account information, such as your phone  
number and the services to which you  
subscribe. You can also store addresses,  
connection. See Synchronizing information.  
T E R M S  
344  
             
UMTS (Universal Mobile  
Windows Mobile  
Telecommunications System)  
The operating system of your Treo Pro  
smartphone. Your smartphone uses  
Windows Mobile® 6 Professional edition.  
When installing third-party applications to  
One of the third-generation (3G) mobile  
phone technologies that is designed for  
high-speed data transfer, with rates up to  
384 Kbps, as well as voice and multimedia your smartphone, be sure to install only  
services. It uses W-CDMA as the  
underlying technology. See What are all  
those icons?  
apps that are written for Microsoft  
Windows Mobile 6.1 Professional. Apps  
designed for Microsoft Windows Mobile  
6.1 Standard or any edition of Windows  
Mobile 5.0 software are not compatible  
with your Treo Pro smartphone. See  
username  
The name associated with your  
smartphone that distinguishes it from  
other Windows Mobile® devices. If you  
install desktop software, you are asked to  
give your smartphone a username. If you  
Windows Mobile Device Center  
The software on your Windows Vista  
only synchronize wirelessly using Microsoft computer that enables you to synchronize  
Exchange ActiveSync, you do not need to  
give your smartphone a username. See  
content and manage music, pictures, and  
videos between your smartphone and your  
computer. To open Windows Mobile  
Device Center on your computer, click  
Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile  
Device Center.  
T E R M S  
345  
       
T E R M S  
346  
Regulatory and safety information  
NOTE To see your End User License Agreement, go to your General  
User Guide: Important Safety and Legal Information booklet included  
Switch off in explosive environments  
with your device.  
Do not use while re-fuelling  
This device may produce a bright or flashing light  
Do not dispose of in a fire  
Do not use hand-held while driving  
For body-worn operation maintain a separation of  
1.5 cm  
Avoid contact with magnetic media  
Avoid Extreme Temperatures  
Small parts may cause a choking hazard  
This device may produce a loud sound  
Avoid contact with liquid, keep dry  
Do not try and disassemble  
Keep away from pacemakers and other personal  
medical devices  
Switch off when instructed in hospitals and medical  
facilities  
Do not rely on this device for emergency  
communications  
Switch off when instructed in aircrafts and airports  
Only use approved accessories  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
347  
 
CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the  
party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to  
operate the equipment.  
FCC Statements  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If  
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications  
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna  
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate  
FCC regulations.  
Industry Canada  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only  
signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
IC: 3905A-SKYG  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
L ‘ utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions  
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur  
du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique  
reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le  
fonctionnement du dispositif. Cet appareil numérique de la classe [*]  
est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and  
is certified with the FCC as:  
FCC ID: O8F-SKYG.  
EU Regulatory Conformance  
We, Palm, Inc. hereby declare that this device is in conformance to all  
essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.  
The FCC ID on you Palm smartphone is located on a label inside the  
battery compartment. The battery must be removed as shown below  
to view the label.  
This equipment is marked with the  
0984  
symbol and can be used throughout the European community.  
This indicates compliance with the R&TTEE Directive 1999/5/EC and  
meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:  
ETSI EN 301 511  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
348  
ETSI EN 301 908-1  
ETSI EN 301 908-2  
ETSI EN 300 328  
ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24  
EN 60950-1  
RF Safety Exposure  
General statement on RF energy: Your smartphone contains a  
transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits  
RF energy. When you communicate with your smartphone, the  
system handling your call controls the power level at which your  
smartphone transmits.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR): Your mobile device is a radio  
transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for  
exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines.  
These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific  
organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure  
the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health.  
EN 50360  
EN 50371  
Marking by the symbol  
indicates this equipment uses  
non-harmonized frequency bands.  
In order to certify this unit for sale in the US, Canada and Europe this  
unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test  
laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding  
exposure to RF Energy under the recommendations of the  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection  
(ICNIRP). The tests are preformed in positions and locations as  
required by the FCC, IC, and The Council of the European Union for  
each model.  
France—2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:  
In all Metropolitan departments, wireless LAN frequencies can be  
used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:  
Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire  
2400–2483.5 MHz frequency band  
Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400–  
2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for  
the 2454–2483 MHz band  
As SAR is measured utilising the devices highest transmitting power,  
the actual SAR of this device while operating is typically below that  
indicated below. This is due to automatic changes to the power level  
of the device to ensure it only uses the minimum power required to  
communicate with the network.  
Responsible party  
(North America)  
Palm Inc.  
950 W. Maude Ave.  
Sunnyvale, CA 95085  
USA  
The SAR limit for mobile devices set by FCC/IC is 1.6 W/kg averaged  
over 1 gram of tissue for the body or head (4.0 W/kg averaged over  
10 grams of tissue for the extremities—hands, wrists, ankles, and  
feet).  
The highest reported SAR values of the Palm smartphone are:  
Maximum 1g SAR values (FCC)  
(Europe)  
Palm Europe ltd.*  
Roy Bedlow  
Buckhurst Court  
London Road, Wokingham  
Berkshire RG40 1PA,  
UK  
WCDMA  
850  
WCDMA  
1900  
GSM850  
GSM1900  
Head SAR 0.775 W/kg 0.602 W/kg 0.7 W/kg  
Body SAR 1.25 W/kg  
1.5 W/kg  
0.527 W/kg 0.687 W/kg 0.608 W/kg  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
349  
The SAR limit recommended by The Council of the European Union is  
2.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of tissue for the body or head (4.0  
W/kg averaged over 10 grams of tissue for the extremities—hands,  
wrists, ankles, and feet).  
own or their children’s RF exposure by limiting the length of calls, or  
using ‘hands-free’ devices to keep mobile phones away from the  
head and body.  
Further information on this subject can be obtained from the WHO  
index html WHO Fact sheet 193: June 2000.  
Maximum 10g SAR values (CE)  
GSM900  
GSM1800  
0.788 W/kg  
0.8 W/kg  
WCDMA2100  
0.964 W/kg  
0.332 W/kg  
Précautions d’usage de votre téléphone mobile  
Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit dAbsorption Spécifique) de votre  
Treo Pro est 0.964 W/kg.:  
Head SAR  
Body SAR  
0.75 W/kg  
0.866 W/kg  
In order to comply with FCC, IC and EU RF exposure safety  
guidelines, users MUST use one of the following types of body worn  
accessories:  
Conseils d’utilisation pour réduire le niveau  
d’exposition aux rayonnements  
Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons (oreillettes),  
notamment en cas d’usage fréquent ou prolongé du téléphone  
mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort d’utilisation.  
1
A Palm® brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for  
(specific absorption rate) SAR compliance and is intended for use  
with this product.  
2
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and  
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm (0.6 in.) of separation between the  
users body and the unit.  
Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que  
le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le basventre chez les  
adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.  
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact  
with the body (i. e. on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will  
likely exceed the FCC RF safety exposure limits. See www.fcc.gov/  
oet/rfsafety for more information on RF exposure safety.  
Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de  
réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la  
matérialisation de barrettes. En présence de 3 ou 4 barrettes, la  
réception est de bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce  
n’est pas toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations,  
notamment les parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en  
voiture ou tout simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le  
réseau.  
To view the most recent SAR values of the Treo Pro smartphone, visit  
Body worn operation: Important safety information regarding radio  
frequency radiation (RF) exposure: To ensure compliance with RF  
exposure guidelines the smartphone must be used with a minimum  
of 1.5 cm (0.6 in.) separation from the body. Failure to observe these  
instructions could result in your RF exposure exceeding the relevant  
guideline limits.  
Mesures touchant à la sécurité :  
Dans certains lieux ou situations, tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les  
stations-service et les garages professionnels, l’usage du téléphone  
est interdit. Il est donc impératif de respecter strictement les  
consignes de sécurité propres à chacune de ces situations et  
d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela est requis.  
Limiting exposure to radio frequency (RF) fields: For individuals  
concerned about limiting their exposure to RF fields, the World  
Health Organisation (WHO) provides the following advice:  
Precautionary measures: Present scientific information does not  
indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of mobile  
phones. If individuals are concerned, they might choose to limit their  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
350  
Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes  
porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques,  
pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs..) doivent conserver une  
distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du  
côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.  
Battery usage by children should be supervised.  
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is  
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects  
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium-Ion (LI-ion) battery  
as you can be burned.  
Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont  
pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente  
potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée  
par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne  
jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation  
d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.  
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other  
hazard.  
Based on DOT rules, spare batteries must not be transported in  
checked luggage on commercial flights. Spare batteries can only be  
transported in carry-on luggage. For more information:  
(1)Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour une  
utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS,  
exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes  
électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à  
la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci  
soit inférieur à 2w/kg.  
Protecting Your Battery  
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your  
batterys performance.  
Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone  
batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It appears that  
many, if not all, of these reports involve counterfeit or inexpensive,  
aftermarket-brand batteries with unknown or questionable  
manufacturing standards. Use only manufacturer-approved batteries  
and accessories found at Carrier Stores or through your devices  
manufacturer. Buying the right batteries and accessories is the best  
way to ensure they're genuine and safe.  
Battery handling:  
Do not disassemble or open crush, bend or deform, puncture or  
shred.  
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects  
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,  
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.  
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.  
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures  
that range from 32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50° C).  
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been  
qualified with the system per the IEEE/CTIA-1725 standard. Use  
of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire,  
explosion, leakage, or other hazard.  
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity  
areas, such as the bathroom.  
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.  
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects  
to contact battery terminals.  
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.  
Don't attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.  
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been  
qualified with the system per IEEE/CTIA-1725. Use of an  
unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage  
or other hazard.  
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long  
period of time.  
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local  
regulations.  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
351  
Its best to replace the battery when it no longer provides  
acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times  
before it needs replacing  
recycling. Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices,  
smartphones and mobile companions out of landfills through  
evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling.  
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods  
of time. It's best to follow these storage rules:  
Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of  
charge. Visit www palm com/recycle for additional details and  
information about how you can help reduce electronic waste.  
Less than one month: –4° F to 140° F (–20° C to 60° C)  
More than one month: –4° F to 113° F (–20° C to 45° C)  
Recycling and Disposal  
Palm is committed to supporting the collection and recycling of its  
products. Palm participates and supports the WEEE directive in the  
European Union. For more information on the WEEE directive  
implementation in the various EU member states please see  
Power Specifications  
Use only Palm-approved power accessories such as AC-power  
adapters and batteries. Unauthorized and non-approved batteries will  
NOT operate with the Palm product.  
AC Power Adapter source: Helmsman  
Model: PMG0501000P  
Recyclage et mise au rebut (pour la France seulement)  
Ce symbole indique que les produits Palm doivent  
être recyclés. Vous ne pouvez pas vous en  
débarrasser dans une décharge municipale  
n’effectuant pas le tri sélectif. Les produits Palm  
doivent être envoyés dans un centre prenant en  
charge le recyclage des appareils électriques et  
électroniques. Ce service est disponible gratuitement  
dans votre commune.  
Part Number: 157-10107-00  
Input Rating: 100–240 Vac, 50/60Hz, 0.3A  
Output Rating: 5Vdc, 1000mA  
AC Power Adapter source: Foxlink  
Model: 5890-712V-02K0  
Part Number: 157-10108-00  
Input Rating: 100–240 Vac, 50/60Hz, 0.25A  
Output Rating: 5Vdc, 1000mA  
En tant qu’utilisateur de cet appareil, vous êtes tenu de vous  
débarrasser de cet équipement électronique dans un centre de  
collecte agréé par votre commune. Pour en savoir plus sur le centre  
de collecte le plus proche, contactez votre commune. Si vous  
remplacez un ancien appareil par un nouveau produit équivalent, le  
distributeur est tenu de le reprendre gratuitement dans la mesure où  
l’appareil est de type équivalent et propose les mêmes  
fonctionnalités.  
Battery Source: Palm  
Type: Rechargeable Li-ion Polymer  
Model: 157-10105-00  
Rating: 3.7Vdc, 1500mAh (minimum)  
Recycling and Disposal  
This symbol indicates that Palm products should be  
recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted Municipal  
waste. Palm products should be sent to a facility that  
properly recycles electrical and electronic equipment.  
For information on Palms environmental programs,  
Les produits électroniques peuvent contenir des substances  
dangereuses potentiellement à risque pour la santé et  
l’environnement. Le recyclage est bon pour l’environnement. Il  
permet en effet de ne pas surcharger les décharges et de revaloriser  
des matériaux pouvant être recyclés en d’autres produits. Le  
recyclage responsable garantit une collecte et une mise au rebut  
appropriées des matériaux. Palm s’engage à respecter la Directive  
As part of Palms corporate commitment to be a good steward of the  
environment, we strive to use environmentally friendly materials,  
reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
352  
DEEE de l’Union européenne (2002/96/EC), applicable en France par  
le Décret n°2005-829 en date du 20 juillet 2005, et à protéger  
l’environnement pour les générations futures.  
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for  
interference.  
Turn the smartphone OFF immediately if you have any reason to  
suspect that interference is taking place.  
Il est de la responsabilité de chacun de s’assurer que les produits  
électriques et électroniques sont correctement réutilisés, recyclés ou  
revalorisés.  
Other Medical Devices, Hospitals: If you use any other personal  
medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine  
if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician  
may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Turn your  
smartphone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted  
in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities  
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF  
energy.  
Pour plus d’informations: www.eco-systemes.com.  
User Safety  
Operational Warnings  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT  
OPERATION. Read this information before using your smartphone.  
For the safe and efficient operation of your smartphone, observe  
these guidelines.  
Repetitive Motion Injuries: When using the keyboard or playing  
games on your smartphone, you may experience discomfort in your  
neck, shoulders, hands, arms, of other parts of the body. To avoid any  
injury, such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, or other  
musculoskeletal disorder, make sure to take necessary breaks from  
use, take longer rests (such as several hours) if discomfort or tiring  
begins, and see a doctor if discomfort persists. To minimize the risk  
of Repetitive Motion Injuries, when Texting or playing games with  
your phone:  
Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your smartphone when  
you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as  
fueling areas (gas or petrol stations, below deck on boats) storage  
facilities for fuel or chemicals, blasting areas and areas near electrical  
blasting caps, and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such  
as metal powders, grains and dust) in the air.  
Interference to medical and personal Electronic Devices: Most but  
not all electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals and certain  
electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals  
from your smartphone.  
Do not grip the phone too tightly  
Press the buttons lightly  
Make use of the special features in the handset which minimize  
the number of buttons which have to be pressed, such as  
message templates and predictive text  
Pacemakers: The Health Industry Manufacturers Association  
recommends that a minimum separation of 15 centimeters (6 inches)  
be maintained between a smartphone and a pacemaker to avoid  
potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations  
are consistent with the independent research by the  
Take lots of breaks to stretch and relax  
Blackouts and Seizures: Blinking lights, such as those experienced  
with television or playing video games may cause some people to  
experience blackout or seizure, even if never experienced before. In  
the event a smartphone user should experience any disorientation,  
loss of awareness, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching or other  
involuntary movements, stop use immediately and consult a doctor.  
Individuals with personal or family history of such events should  
consult a doctor before using the device. To limit the possibility of  
such symptoms, wherever possible every hour take a minimum of  
15 minutes, use in a well lighted area, view the screen from the  
farthest distance and avoid exposure to blinking lights if you are tired.  
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research.  
Persons with pacemakers should:  
ALWAYS keep the smartphone more than six inches  
(15 centimeters) from their pacemaker when the smartphone is  
turned ON.  
Not carry the smartphone in a breast pocket.  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
353  
Operating Machinery: Do not use your smartphone while operating  
machinery. Full attention must be given to operating the machinery in  
order to reduce the risk of an accident.  
® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound  
Bluetooth  
has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in  
the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential  
hearing problems varies. The amount of sound produced by a  
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound,  
the device, the device settings and the headphones. You should  
follow some common sense recommendations when using any  
portable audio device:  
Aircraft: While in aircraft, follow all instructions regarding the  
operation of your smartphone. Use of your smartphone while on  
board an aircraft must be done in accordance in compliance with  
airline instructions and regulations.  
Vehicles with Air Bags: Your smartphone should not be placed in a  
position that would affect the operation of air bag deployment or in a  
position that, should the air bag inflate, could propel the smartphone.  
Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to  
protect within a vehicle that has air bags. Do not place a phone in the  
area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Store the  
phone safely before driving the vehicle.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Hearing Aids: People with hearing aids or other cochlear implants  
may experience interfering noises when using wireless devices or  
when one is nearby. The level of interference will depend on the type  
of hearing device and the distance from the interference source.  
Increasing the separation between them may reduce the  
interference. You may also consult your hearing aid manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise.  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases,  
less time is required before your hearing could be affected.  
Small children: Do not leave your smartphone and its accessories  
within the reach of small children or allow them to play with it. They  
could hurt themselves or others, or could accidentally damage the  
smartphone. Your smartphone contains small parts with sharp edges  
that may cause an injury or which could become detached and create  
a choking hazard.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Keep the device away from the abdomens of pregnant women and  
adolescents, particularly when using the device hands-free.  
To reduce exposure to radiation, use your device in good reception  
areas, as indicated by the bars on your phone, at least 3 to 4 bars.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Email: info@audiology.org  
CAUTION Avoid potential hearing loss.  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research  
suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music  
players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long  
durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This  
includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds and  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
354  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to extreme  
temperatures, minimum 0 and maximum +45 degrees Celsius.  
(32F–113F)  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320  
Voice: (301) 496-7243  
Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.  
Do not carry your smartphone in your back pocket as it could  
break when you sit down.  
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov  
Battery: Your smartphone includes an internal lithium-ion or  
lithium-ion polymer battery. Please note that use of certain data  
applications can result in heavy battery use and may require frequent  
battery charging. Any disposal of the smartphone or battery must  
comply with laws and regulations pertaining to lithium-ion or  
lithium-ion polymer batteries.  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health  
Hubert H. Humphrey Bldg.  
200 Independence Ave., SW  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)  
Demagnetisation: To avoid the risk of demagnetisation, do not allow  
electronic devices or magnetic media close to your smartphone for a  
long time.  
Product Handling & Safety  
General statement on handling and use: You alone are responsible  
for how you use your smartphone and any consequences of its use.  
Normal use position: When making or receiving a phone call, hold  
your smartphone to your ear, with the bottom towards your mouth or  
as you would a fixed line phone.  
You must always switch off your smartphone wherever the use of a  
phone is prohibited. Use of your smartphone is subject to safety  
measures designed to protect users and their environment.  
Emergency calls: This smartphone, like any wireless phone,  
operates using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection in  
all conditions. Therefore, you must never rely solely on any wireless  
phone for emergency communications.  
Always treat your smartphone and its accessories with care and  
keep it in a clean and dust-free place.  
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to open  
flames or lit tobacco products.  
Smartphone heating: Your smartphone may become warm during  
charging and during normal use.  
Accessories: Use only approved accessories. Do not connect with  
incompatible products or accessories. Take care not to touch or allow  
metal objects, such as coins or key rings, to contact or short-circuit  
the battery terminals.  
Do not expose your smartphone or its accessories to liquid,  
moisture, or high humidity.  
Do not drop, throw, or try to bend your smartphone or its  
accessories.  
Connection to a car: Seek professional advice when connecting a  
phone interface to the vehicle electrical system.  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or aerosols to  
clean the device or its accessories.  
Faulty and damaged products: Do not attempt to disassemble the  
smartphone or its accessory. Only qualified personnel must service  
or repair the smartphone or its accessory. If your smartphone or its  
accessory has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to  
a severe fall, do not use it until you have taken it to be checked at an  
authorised service centre.  
Do not paint your smartphone or its accessories.  
Do not attempt to disassemble your smartphone or its  
accessories; only authorised personnel must do so.  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
355  
Interference in cars and to other Electronic Devices: Please note  
that because of possible interference to electronic equipment, some  
vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their  
vehicles unless a hands-free kit with an external antenna is included  
in the installation. RF energy may affect improperly installed or  
inadequately shielded electronic operating and entertainment  
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or  
representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded  
from external RF energy. Also check with the manufacturer of any  
equipment that has been added to the vehicle.  
offer, including automatic redial and memory dial. Also, work to  
memorize the smartphone keyboard so you can use the  
speed-dial function without taking your attention off the road.  
2
Use a hands-free device. A number of hands-free smartphone  
accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an  
installed mounted device for your smartphone or a speakerphone  
accessory, take advantage of these devices. If driving while using  
a smartphone is permitted in your area, we recommend using a  
phone headset or a hands-free car kit (sold separately). However,  
be aware that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your  
ability to hear other sounds. Use of such a headset while  
operating a motor vehicle or riding a bicycle may create a serious  
hazard to you and/or others, and may be illegal. If you must use a  
stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in only one ear.  
Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises, and do so only if  
it is legal and you can do so safely.  
Driving Safety  
Driving Safety Tips Overview  
Always obey all laws and regulations on the use of the smartphone in  
your driving area.  
3
4
Make sure you place your smartphone within easy reach and  
where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road.  
If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your  
voicemail answer it for you.  
Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or  
situations. Let the person you are speaking to know you are  
driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or  
hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, and ice can be  
hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first  
responsibility is to pay attention to the road.  
Do not take notes, look up phone numbers, read/write e-mail, or  
surf the internet while driving. If you are reading an address book  
or business card while driving a car, or writing a to-do list, then  
you are not watching where you are going. It's common sense.  
Don't get caught in a dangerous situation because you are  
reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby  
vehicles.  
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when  
you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your  
calls before you begin your trip, or attempt to schedule your calls  
with times you may be temporarily stopped or otherwise  
stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple  
tip: dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors,  
then continue  
Safety—Your most important call. The Wireless Industry reminds you  
to use your smartphone safely when driving.  
1
Get to know your smartphone and its features, such as speed-dial  
and redial.  
2
3
4
Use a hands-free device.  
Position your smartphone within easy reach.  
Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if  
necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather  
conditions.  
5
6
7
5
6
7
8
9
Do not take notes, look up phone numbers, read/write e-mail, or  
surf the internet while driving.  
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when  
you are not moving or before pulling into traffic.  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may  
divert your attention from the road.  
Dial your national emergency number to report serious  
emergencies. This is a free call from your smartphone.  
Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies.  
10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless  
number when necessary.  
Driving Safety Tips Details  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may  
be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving  
do not mix—they are distracting and even dangerous when you  
are behind the wheel. Make people you are talking with aware  
you are driving and if necessary, suspend phone conversations  
which have the potential to divert your attention from the road.  
1
Get to know your smartphone and its features such as speed-dial  
and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to  
take advantage of valuable features most smartphone models  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
356  
8
9
Use your smartphone to call for help. Your smartphone is one of  
the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your  
family in dangerous situations—with your smartphone at your  
side, help is only three numbers away. Dial your national  
emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, road  
hazard, or medical emergencies. Remember, your national  
emergency number is a free call on your smartphone.  
Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. If you see  
an auto accident, crime in progress, or other serious emergency  
where lives are in danger, call your national emergency number,  
as you would want others to do for you.  
General Operation  
Voice Command Control: Many of the functions of the Device  
Software can be accomplished using only voice commands. Using  
voice commands while driving allows you to initiate the command  
with a button and then operate the Device mostly without removing  
your hands from the wheel.  
Prolonged Views of Screen: If you are driving, do not access any  
function requiring a prolonged view of the screen. Pull over in a safe  
and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the  
system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to  
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted  
away from your driving task at a critical time.  
10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency  
assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you  
encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent  
enough to merit a call to your national emergency number. But  
you can still use your smartphone to lend a hand. If you see a  
broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic  
signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a  
vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other  
special non-emergency wireless number.  
Let Your Judgment Prevail: The Device Software is only an aid.  
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local  
conditions and existing traffic regulations. The Device Software is not  
a substitute for your personal judgment.  
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the  
volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and  
emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these  
sounds could cause an accident.  
End user notice  
Microsoft® Voice Command Version 1.5 for Windows Mobile®  
NOTE The Voice Command application is not available in all  
languages. See Setting up voice commands.  
Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition  
software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors.  
It is your responsibility to monitor the speech recognition functions  
and address any errors.  
IMPORTANT Do not become distracted from driving safely if  
operating a motor vehicle while using Device Software. Operating  
certain parts of this Device requires user attention. Diverting attention  
away from the road while driving can possibly cause an accident or  
other serious consequences. Even occasional, short diversions of  
attention can be dangerous if your attention is diverted away from  
your driving task at a critical time. Do not change system settings or  
enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving. Stop the  
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these  
operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some  
functions you might be required to distract your attention away from  
the road and remove your hands from the wheel.  
Hands-Free Capability  
All CTIA Certified portable products provide the consumer with a  
toll-free number for the purchase of a compatible hands-free device.  
1-800-881-7256.  
ESD Safety  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices  
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such  
an occurrence. Do not touch the SIM cards metal connectors.  
Description of ESD  
Microsoft makes no representations, warranties, or other  
determinations that ANY use of the Software Product is legal, safe, or  
in any manner recommended or intended while driving or otherwise  
operating a motor vehicle.  
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of  
excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static  
electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example,  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
357  
after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up  
electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the discharge event—  
when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the  
built-up static electricity.  
Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For  
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural  
fibers like cotton.)  
The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect  
electronic devices.  
ESD-susceptible equipment  
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working  
with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic  
devices, including your PalmTM handheld, from ESD harm. While Palm  
has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately  
exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm  
your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry  
point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is  
susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as  
your handheld, build up ESD in a unique way because the static  
electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed  
to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device  
such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.  
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge  
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD  
events you may want to take extra precautions to protect your  
electronic equipment against ESD.  
Owner’s Record  
The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located  
on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial  
number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need  
to contact us about your phone in the future.  
Product: Palm® TreoTM Pro Smartphone  
Precautions against ESD  
Model:  
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself  
and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or  
connecting one device to another. The recommendation from Palm is  
that you take this precaution before connecting your handheld to your  
computer, placing the handheld in a cradle, or connecting it to any  
other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:  
Serial No.:  
Other International Requirements  
France Audio Requirements:  
Precaution against hearing loss: Protect your hearing. Listening to  
this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your  
hearing.  
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by  
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.  
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur  
peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez  
notre site web www.palm.com/fr pour plus  
d'informations.  
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged  
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case  
should discharge the ESD on your body.  
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.  
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.  
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences  
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the  
environment include the following:  
Low relative humidity.  
R E G U L A T O R Y A N D S A F E T Y I N F O R M A T I O N  
358  
Specifications  
Radio  
Dual mode GSM/UMTS phone  
GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band  
UMTS 850/1900/2100 tri-band  
GPRS  
EDGE  
UMTS PS data  
HSDPA Category 5 (3.6 Mb)  
Personal speakerphone  
Phone features  
Hands-free headset jack (3.5 mm, 3-barrel connector)  
Microphone mute option  
TTY-compatible  
Processor technology  
Expansion  
Dual-core MSM7201 processor—400MHz  
microSD card slot  
Battery  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
1500mAh power  
Removable for replacement  
3.5 hours full charge time  
Windows Mobile® 6.1 Professional  
Still image capture resolution:1280 x 1024, 2 megapixel  
8x digital zoom  
Operating system  
Camera  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
359  
               
Size  
114mm x 60mm x 13.5mm (4.5 in. x 2.36 in. x 0.53 in.)  
130 grams (4.6 ounces)  
Weight  
Connectivity  
Infrared (1.0 compliant)  
Bluetooth® wireless technology (2.0 + EDR compliant)  
Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g)  
Display  
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)  
65,536 colors (16-bit color)  
Resolution: 320 x 320  
User-adjustable brightness  
Built-in 30-key keyboard plus 5-way navigator  
Backlight for low lighting conditions  
Today/Phone (includes Speed Dial and Keypad)  
Messaging (text, multimedia, and email)  
Internet Explorer Mobile (web browser)  
Camera  
Keyboard  
Included software  
Pictures & Videos  
Windows Media Player Mobile  
File Explorer  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Notes  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
360  
       
Included software  
(continued)  
OneNote  
Task Manager  
Calculator  
ActiveSync®  
Microsoft Office Excel Mobile®  
Microsoft Office Word Mobile®  
Microsoft Office PowerPoint Mobile®  
Adobe® Reader® LE  
Voice Command (English, French, German only)  
Quick Tour  
Search  
Remote Desktop Mobile  
QuickGPS  
SIM Manager  
Internet Sharing  
Java  
Windows Live (not available from all wireless service  
providers)  
Windows Live Messenger (not available from all wireless  
service providers)  
Streaming Media  
Bluefire VPN client  
Sprite Backup  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
361  
System requirements  
(for sync with desktop  
sync software using  
USB cable)  
Windows XP or Vista (later versions may also be  
supported)  
32MB of available memory (RAM)  
170MB of free hard disk space  
Available USB port  
Operating and storage  
temperature range  
0° C to 50° C (32° F to 122° F)  
5% to 90% RH  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
362  
   
getting help with 13  
making phone calls and  
preventing unauthorized  
sending messages and  
troubleshooting 332  
Acrobat Reader 235  
action keys. See softkeys  
activating  
items on screen 32  
SIM cards 21  
active calls 55, 58  
See also phone calls  
ActiveSync  
defined 341  
opening 93, 94  
synchronizing with 93,  
troubleshooting 315, 326–  
ActiveSyncdesktopsoftware  
ActiveSync icon 95, 194, 341  
Add new device option 70,  
AddServerSourcecommand  
Add to Personal Address  
Book command 329  
Add to Speed Dial command  
Index  
SYMBOLS  
! on battery icon 22  
NUMERICS  
112 calls 52, 297  
1st day of week option 227  
3G networks 57  
3G status icons 66  
5-way navigator 29, 31, 338  
911 calls 52, 297  
999 calls 52, 297  
adding  
a second call 58  
applications 292  
appointments 223, 224  
attachments to email 117,  
connections 310  
contacts 53, 120, 151,  
document templates 242  
expansion cards 276  
files to playlists 213  
folders 245  
spreadsheets 247  
untimed events 224  
web favorites 166–167  
address books 121–123,  
A
accented characters 37  
accessing  
alternate characters 37  
applications 292  
menu items 32, 33, 34  
on-device help 13  
online support 13, 26  
Outlook folders 329  
remote files 310  
the Internet 309, 323  
account information 19  
accounts  
See also email accounts  
enabling TTY/TDD devices Add new phone number to  
and 74 Contacts option 75  
Address List Lookup 267  
addresses  
I NDE X  
363  
 
copying 329  
airplane mode 48  
alarm clock 303  
alarm sounds 304  
alarms  
setting 290, 303  
turning on and off 289  
Alarms tab 303  
albums 203  
alerts 66  
See also alarms  
aligning the screen 292  
alignment settings  
documents 244  
spreadsheets 247  
Allow USB connections  
check box 327  
associating with buttons  
caution for hard resets and  
choosing menu items in  
closing 40–41  
creating multimedia  
messages and 142  
creating text messages  
entering email 116, 128,  
entering web 164  
highlighting 31  
looking up corporate 267  
searching for web 43  
selecting 335  
synchronizing 329  
verifying 116, 121  
ad-hoc connections 177  
adjusting screen brightness  
Adobe Flash Player 90  
Adobe Reader 235, 240  
Adobe Reader icon 261  
copying 279  
customizing 292–297  
deleting 272, 338  
downloading 269, 271  
error reporting for 305  
highlighting 39  
included with device 360  
losing information in 317  
marking as exclusive 41  
movingtoexpansioncards  
reinstalling 315, 317  
running from expansion  
Alt key 37, 38  
alternate characters 37  
alternate characters list 37  
Adobe Reader LE application anniversaries 224  
Advanced tab (Power  
Settings) 306  
advancing slides 149, 246,  
answering phone calls 53–  
Appearance tab 287, 292  
application icons 39, 293  
applications  
See also third-party  
applications  
running multiple 40  
scrolling in 30  
selecting 39, 40  
storing 338  
AES encryption 178  
Agenda View (calendar) 222  
switching between 43, 56  
I N D E X  
364  
synchronizing info in 86,  
internal memory and 338  
opening 119  
Backlight Settings screen 35  
backlight shut-off interval 35  
troubleshooting 317, 319  
turning sounds on or off  
for 289  
removing from messages Backspace key 32, 37  
144 backup and restore app 95  
setting maximum size 130 backup utilities 315, 317,  
viewingmemoryusagefor  
appointment settings 227–  
storing 119, 128  
troubleshooting 334  
attendees (meeting  
requests) 225  
backups, restoring 318, 331  
banners (calendar) 224  
battery  
appointments  
adding 223  
appearing in wrong time  
slots 330  
creating reminders for  
audio modes 74  
connecting to Bluetooth  
devices and 184  
conserving 23–24, 110,  
authentication 178, 179  
auto-completion options 295  
AutoFilter settings  
(spreadsheets) 248, 255  
Auto-Keyguard feature 298  
Auto-Keyguard list 298  
Automatic Send/Receive  
option 131  
disposing of 318  
inserting 20  
deleting 227  
displaying 43  
replacing 318–319  
viewing remaining power  
for 306  
viewing status of 22, 66  
battery icons 22, 66  
battery specifications 359  
Battery tab 306  
battery technology 342  
beaming 23, 204, 269, 274–  
birthdays 224  
Blacklist tab 154  
marking as private 225  
scheduling repeating 224  
sending 144, 228  
viewing 222, 223  
area codes 220  
auto-off interval 341  
available memory 306  
available storage space 305  
arrow icons 29  
B
arrow keys 29, 30  
Assign a program list 294  
attachments  
downloading 119–120  
embedded objects in 120  
background colors 144  
backgrounds 195, 205, 214,  
backing up information 315,  
backlight (keyboard) 35, 307  
I NDE X  
365  
blank screens 320  
broadcast channel options  
browsing files and folders  
browsing  
built-in applications 272  
built-in camera. See camera  
button settings (Media  
Player) 214  
See also Calendar  
application  
adding items to 223, 224,  
Block incoming calls list 77  
Block outgoing calls list 77  
Block Recognizer option 296  
Bluetooth devices  
See also hands-free  
devices  
beaming and 274, 275  
connecting to 183–187  
conserving battery and 23  
displaying 222  
hiding items on 225  
moving through 222  
removing items 227, 230  
setting alarms for 223,  
enabling phone as modem buttons  
sorting tasks on 230  
unavailable slots on 226  
viewing appointments on  
Calendar application  
adding contacts and 218  
customizing 227–228  
managing schedules with  
opening 222  
sending meeting requests  
and 134  
Calendar icon 222  
calendar settings 227–228  
calendar views 222, 227  
call forwarding 60  
call forwarding icon 60  
Call Status softkey 55  
call waiting 58, 78  
and 188  
assigning voice  
synchronizing over 100–  
commands to 294  
associating with  
applications 293  
disabling 298  
reassigning 293–294  
selecting 29, 31  
turning sounds on or off  
for 289  
troubleshooting 324  
Bluetooth feature  
turning on or off 23, 69  
viewing status of 42  
Bluetooth icon 100  
Bluetooth Settings screen  
Bluetooth status icons 66  
Bluetooth technology 161,  
bonus software 360  
bookmarks 166  
See also favorites  
border highlight 31  
brightness, adjusting 290  
Buttons list 293  
Buttons screen 293  
C
calculations 250, 282  
calculator buttons 283  
calendar  
I N D E X  
366  
call-barring password 76, 77 cascading menus 33  
capitalizing 36, 297  
creating messages and  
entering 36, 251  
highlighting 32  
caller ID blocking 57  
caller ID pictures 195, 204,  
case-sensitive searching  
cell patterns (spreadsheets)  
caller IDs 74, 77  
call-forwarding icon 65  
camera  
capturing videos with  
overview 195  
taking pictures 197–199  
troubleshooting 336  
camera modes 196  
Camera Preview Mode 336  
camera settings 197, 200–  
cell references  
moving to specific 30  
typing alternate 37  
charge indicator 22  
charging smartphone battery  
charging status 22, 66  
chat sessions 149–150  
chat view 147, 148, 150  
check boxes 31  
(spreadsheets) 251  
certificates 131, 163, 304  
Certificates icon 304  
Certificates screen 304  
Change PIN 2 option 80  
changing  
alarm sounds 304  
calendar views 222  
color themes 287, 292  
connections 310  
Clear Cookies button 169  
contacts 218–219  
camera specifications 359  
cancelling selections in lists  
date and time settings 302 Clear Now Playing command  
information 256  
phone numbers 78  
Clear Type tab 290  
capitalization 36, 297  
Capitalize first letter of  
sentence check box 297  
Caps Lock icon 36  
Caps Lock mode 36  
captions 143, 144  
capture format 201  
car kits 68, 69, 71  
carrier. See service providers  
picture or video resolution Clock & Alarms icon 291,  
PIN numbers 300  
sync settings 98  
text 242  
Clock & Alarms Settings  
closing  
text size 290  
character sets 169  
characters  
applications 40–41  
drop-down lists 35  
menus 33  
See also text  
screens 30, 31  
I NDE X  
367  
color settings 144, 336  
color themes 287, 292  
Comm Manager 48, 185  
command button 295  
commands 295  
Company Directory  
command 122, 220  
company names 219  
comparisons 255  
completed tasks 229, 230  
compressed files 270  
computers  
accessing remote 281  
charging smartphone and  
connecting to 90–91  
installing from 271, 272  
reinstalling desktop  
software on 315  
synchronizing with 12, 89,  
viewing synchronized  
items on 92  
Configure Wireless  
Networks screen 176  
configuring  
data services 323  
mail servers 334  
TTY/TDD devices 74–75  
confirmation messages 147,  
Connect command 310  
Connect via Bluetooth  
command 100  
Connect via IR command  
browsing websites and  
changing 310  
conservingbattery and 18,  
creating 310  
displaying 310  
enabling Bluetooth 69,  
enabling TTY/TDD 74–75  
enabling Wi-Fi 175  
ending 311  
inserting SIM cards and 19  
losing 324  
making phone calls and 57  
manually starting 310  
setting up 309–311  
streaming and 171  
synchronizing and 86, 92  
timing out 332  
troubleshooting 321–325,  
Connections icon 309, 310  
Connections screen 309,  
connecting  
to mobile networks 322  
to service providers 309  
to the Internet 309, 323  
to VPNs 310–??  
connecting smartphone to  
Connection Settings  
command 327  
connection status icons 65–  
conference calls 59–60  
confidential events 226  
configurations,  
connections  
accessing VPN clients and Connections tab 309, 310  
troubleshooting 323  
Configure Server command  
connectivity specs 360  
conserving smartphone  
adding Bluetooth devices  
and 183  
I N D E X  
368  
contact categories 218  
Contact Details command  
contact lookup feature 50,  
Contacts application 217–  
Contacts list 220  
context-sensitive menus 33,  
creating  
appointments 224  
connections 310  
contacts 53, 120, 151,  
contact names, dialing by  
contact types 217  
contacts  
assigning caller IDs 77,  
assigning ringtones 74,  
assigning speed dial  
numbers 63–64  
copying 218  
editing 218–219  
getting from address  
removing 219  
saving info for 57–58  
searching for 50, 218,  
continuous playback (slides)  
cookies 163, 169  
copying  
addresses 329  
applications 279  
contacts 218  
documents 243  
items in folders 269  
media files 194  
phone numbers 51, 53,  
pictures or videos 205  
copyrighted items 204  
corporate email passwords  
documents 240, 241  
email messages 116–117  
folders 245  
meeting invitations 134  
meeting requests 225  
message templates 145  
multimedia messages  
passkeys 70, 186  
playlists 212–213  
reminders 223, 228, 229,  
spreadsheets 247  
templates 242, 249  
text messages 139–141  
untimed events 224  
web favorites 166–167  
workbooks 249  
credentials 311, 332  
cropping pictures 206  
currency symbols 292  
corporate mail systems 107,  
corporate networks 304  
corporate servers 310, 334  
coupling 338  
selecting 219  
transferring to car kits 72  
viewing information about coverage areas 12, 23, 47,  
I NDE X  
369  
Custom domain option 112  
customer assistance 13  
customizing  
applications 292–297  
Calendar 227–228  
Contacts application 220  
dates and time 302  
Excel Mobile 258  
format settings 291  
Internet Explorer Mobile  
Media Player Mobile 213  
Notes application 234  
Quick Menu 41  
data transmissions 12, 19  
date format settings 292  
See also calendar  
Day View 222, 227  
decimal places 291  
decimal symbols 291, 292  
decompression utility 270  
default PINs 299  
defined names  
(spreadsheets) 254  
delays 324  
Delete All Calls command 62  
Delete Call command 62  
partnerships 186, 325  
pictures or videos 206  
tasks 230  
text or multimedia  
messages 147, 154  
web files 169  
workbooks 258  
worksheets 258  
desktop software 341  
See also applications;  
software  
device names 345  
devices  
system settings 302–308 Deleted folder 129, 338  
system sounds 288  
tasks 230231  
Today screen 287  
Word Mobile 245  
cutting. See deleting  
Deleted Items folder 152  
deleting  
See also removing  
applications 272, 338  
certificates 305  
contacts 219  
documents 245  
email accounts 115  
events 227  
See also Bluetooth  
devices; smartphone  
beaming to 274  
configuring TTY/TDD 74–  
connecting headset 68–69  
discovering trusted 184,  
transferring info from 90,  
troubleshooting 324  
Devices tab 324  
device-to-deviceconnections  
D
daily schedules 222  
data 317  
See also information  
data formats 291  
data service icons 322  
dataserviceproviders 12, 42,  
favorites 166  
items in folders 269  
messages 152  
data services 12, 322  
I N D E X  
370  
diagnostic information 305  
dial pad. See keypad  
dialing 49–53  
dialog boxes 341  
digit grouping symbols 291,  
display names (email) 109,  
display options (web) 164  
display settings (screen) 290  
displaying  
alternate characters 37  
animated images 208  
application menus 32, 33, documents  
voicemail messages 54  
web favorites 166  
wireless settings 307  
disposal information 2  
document file types 239, 245  
documentation 11, 13, 47  
digital cameras 202  
See also camera  
digital certificates 131, 163,  
See also Word Mobile  
appointments 43, 222,  
calendar 222  
application  
creating 240, 241  
deleting 245  
finding and replacing text  
moving or copying text in  
opening 241  
digital notebook 258  
digital signatures 130  
dimmed images 320  
Direct Push Technology 96  
directory services 121–123,  
Disable touchscreen check  
box 299  
Disconnect Bluetooth  
command 101  
contact info 141, 149, 220  
current connection 310  
folder contents 268  
memory usage 305  
notifications 290  
on-device help 13  
PDF documents 261  
power settings 306  
service provider 42  
renaming 245  
setting margins for 244  
spell-checking 244  
documents list 245  
domains 312  
disconnecting from Wi-Fi  
networks 179  
discovering trusted devices  
space on expansion cards Download messages option  
disk space 362  
See also memory  
display formats 291  
Display message on screen  
option 290  
speed dial numbers 64  
unread messages 43, 49  
videos 203  
Download size limit list 98  
Download size limit option  
I NDE X  
371  
Download Size Settings  
screen 133  
downloading  
Adobe Flash Player 90  
applications 269, 271  
attachments 119–120  
email messages 98  
files 167  
images 208  
Media Player 87  
multimedia messages  
Outlook 87  
Palm information and  
updates 13  
pictures 167  
ringtones 72  
videos 208  
downward-pointing arrows  
drawing 232  
driving directions 267  
drop-down lists  
cancelling selection in 35  
closing 35  
highlighting items in 29,  
scrolling through 30  
selecting items in 34  
drop-down menus 33  
overview 105  
saving passwords for 109  
sending 117, 124, 132,  
settingsecurityoptions for  
synchronizing 86, 95, 118  
troubleshooting 332–334  
email accounts  
changing display names  
changing settings for 115  
deleting 115  
selecting 115, 127  
setting up 107–115  
troubleshooting 332  
email addresses  
E
EAP authentication type 179  
earpiece 339  
echoes 338  
EDGE connections 342  
EDGE status icons 67  
Edit sender’s message  
option 123  
editing. See changing  
email  
See also email messages  
adding attachments to  
adding contacts and 120,  
conserving battery and  
downloading 23, 117–  
downloading attachments  
getting from corporate  
servers 310, 334  
internal memory and 338  
highlighting 31  
verifying 116, 121  
email applications 335  
email client software 334  
email message search  
feature 267  
email messages  
adding attachments 117,  
adding signatures to 125  
creating 116–117  
I N D E X  
372  
deleting 124, 128, 129,  
Enable Quick Menu option  
selecting sounds for 73,  
dialing from 52  
displaying 43  
downloading 98, 118  
finding 123  
Enable TTY support option 75 Excel files 235  
See also Excel Mobile;  
spreadsheets  
ending data connections 311 Excel Mobile application  
forwarding 124  
opening attachments in  
entry fields  
customizing 258  
overview 247  
searching in 256  
starting 249  
Excel Mobile icon 249  
deleting text in 32  
highlighting text in 32  
moving to 29  
scrolling through 30  
Erase all data? prompt 318  
erasing. See deleting  
replying to 123, 127  
saving 117  
setting maximum size 133 error messages 289, 331  
Exchange Address Book 329  
Exchange server credentials  
screen 332  
Exchange server sync  
options 332  
Exchange servers  
changing sync settings for  
finding contacts and 220  
getting email from 117  
sending email over 108,  
setting priority 117  
sorting 124  
Error Reporting icon 305  
Error Reporting screen 305  
event categories 226  
event icons 228  
events  
adding reminders for 223,  
storing copies of 127  
email providers 108, 110  
email settings 126–133  
email shortcuts 125  
emergency calls 52, 297  
emoticons 143, 159  
Empty Deleted Items  
command 152  
creating 224, 225  
deleting 227  
Enable Clear Type option 290  
Enable fixed dialing option 79  
Enable local network time  
option 303  
displaying messages for  
filtering 226, 227  
marking as sensitive 225  
sending meeting requests  
and 225  
setting sync schedules for  
I NDE X  
373  
setting up accounts for  
synchronizing with 86, 95,  
troubleshooting 332, 334  
Exclusive Programs list 41  
EXIF formats 342  
expansion card slot 359  
expansion cards  
as storage medium 338  
browsing on 280  
displaying available space  
types supported 276  
external power sources 306  
attaching to messages  
browsing 268  
copying 194  
decompressing 270  
deleting 269, 338  
downloading 167  
renaming 167  
searching for 267, 269  
selecting multiple 269  
transferring to expansion  
viewing information about  
fill series (spreadsheets) 252  
filtering  
information 219, 255  
recent calls list 61  
tasks 230  
finding  
contacts 50, 218, 219,  
email messages 123  
information 256  
F
factory defaults 214  
factory-installed applications  
favorites 87, 143, 166167  
See also web pages  
Favorites application 87  
features (smartphone) 11, 13  
Federal Trade Commission  
website 305  
feedback 339  
encrypting 281  
inserting 277  
fields. See entry fields  
File Explorer 267, 268–269,  
File Explorer icon 268  
file names 167, 243, 267  
file types  
documents 239, 245  
media files 208  
multimedia 142  
pictures 202  
ringtones 72  
videos 203  
files  
installing apps on 272  
moving apps to 279  
moving information to  
opening items on 278  
organizing pictures and  
videos on 205  
removing 277  
renaming 280  
searching on 267, 269  
storing attachments on  
transferring files to 208,  
accessing from corporate  
accounts 310  
I N D E X  
374  
firewalls 325  
saving documents and  
Global Address List Lookup  
feature 267  
first-letter capitalization  
option 297  
5-way navigator 29, 31, 338  
fixed-dialing feature 79  
Flash Player 90  
sending email and 130,  
formatting  
Global Address Lists 96,  
GPRS connections 342  
GPRS networks 57  
GPRS status icons 67  
GPS icon 66  
charts 256  
paragraphs and lists 244  
spreadsheets 247, 253–  
flicker adjustment 202  
flight mode 48  
graphics programs 205  
folder names 245  
folders  
accessing Outlook 329  
adding documents to 243 Formatting toolbar 244  
browsing 268, 280  
creating 167, 245  
moving items to 245, 257, forwarding  
opening items in 269  
organizing pictures and  
videos in 205  
system data 291  
text messages 144  
H
Hands Free check box 325  
hands-free car kits 68, 69, 71  
hands-free devices  
connecting to 69–71  
entering passkeys for 70  
making phone calls and 71  
troubleshooting 324, 325  
turning Keyguard on or off  
for 298  
turning on or off 71  
hard resets 300, 317  
hardware 11  
headset button 68  
forms (web pages) 165  
messages 124, 149  
phone calls 60  
freeing memory 272, 331,  
organizingweb favorites in Freeze Panes option 250  
full-charge indicators 22  
functions (spreadsheets)  
sorting contents 269  
synchronizing info and 92  
forgetting passwords 300  
format settings 291  
formats  
G
games 272  
gestures 296  
Getting Started guide 11  
heat sources 24  
hiding  
losing 240  
calendar items 225  
I NDE X  
375  
images 164  
highlight 31  
highlighting  
applications 39  
email addresses 31  
items in folders 269  
menu items 33, 34  
options in lists 29, 34  
phone numbers 52  
See also specific type  
Identification tab 301  
Ignore softkey 53  
image files 142, 202, 338  
image properties 202  
images  
See also pictures  
dimmed 320  
downloading 208  
embedding in  
information  
backing up 315, 317  
changing 256  
displaying 42  
erasing all 325  
filtering 219, 255  
managing 265  
moving 279  
web links 31, 165  
high-speed data connections  
attachments 120  
hiding web page 164  
incorrect color settings  
and 336  
setting background 205,  
troubleshooting web page  
IMAP email accounts 107,  
protecting 297–301  
removing battery and 318  
restoring 317, 318  
searching for 267268  
sharing 273–274  
sorting 255  
storing 276, 338  
transferring from previous  
devices 90, 315  
updating 85  
Hint tab 301  
hints (passwords) 301  
History list 168, 169  
Hold option 56  
home locations 302  
home page (browser) 165,  
hotspots 174  
inactivity 306  
infrared port. See IR port  
infrared transmissions 101,  
Inbox folders 118, 124  
See also specific folder  
incomingmailserversettings input method 296  
incorrect passwords 300  
indentation 244  
indicator light 22, 47  
HSDPA networks 57  
HSDPA packet data 342  
HSDPA status icons 67  
HTML formats 119, 124  
hypertext links. See links  
Input icon 295  
input options 36, 295  
Input screen 295, 297  
Insert Pause command 121  
Insert Wait command 121  
I
icons  
I N D E X  
376  
inserting  
expansion cards 277  
SIM cards 19–21  
smartphone battery 20  
installation, troubleshooting  
installing  
applications 269–272,  
customizing 168170  
installing from 270  
scrolling in 30  
starting 163  
unsupported elements for  
Internet Sharing icon 187  
IP-based push updating 96  
IR connections 275  
ISP settings 309  
selecting menu items with  
setting key combinations  
for 293  
troubleshooting 338  
keyboard backlight 35, 307  
keyboard icon 36  
Keyguard 298, 299  
Keyguard icon 298  
keypad 51  
sync software 85, 86, 90  
VPN clients 310  
instant messages 155  
instant messaging  
applications 337  
ISPs (Internet Service  
Providers) 107, 309, 333  
Items tab 287  
Keypad softkey 51  
keys (keyboard) 35, 296  
Known Caller option 72  
memory  
J
L
Java applets 163  
language settings 117, 153  
international adapters 21  
Internet 309, 323  
See also web browsing  
Internet Connection Sharing  
Internet Connection Speed  
option 214  
Java applications 272  
lanyards 18  
leading zeros 292  
LED light 22, 47  
Legacy Pocket Word files  
Letter Recognizer 296  
libraries (media) 210, 211  
Library screen 214  
lightning bolt 22  
Li-Ion battery. See battery  
links  
K
keyboard  
accessing alternate  
characters on 37  
dialing from 49, 51  
entering information from  
locking 298  
looking up contacts from  
Internet Explorer Mobile  
browsing with 163–168  
closing 164  
creating 260  
highlighting 31  
resizing keys on 296  
scrolling with 29, 30  
I NDE X  
377  
internal memory and 338  
playing media files and  
selecting 127, 165, 260  
sending 165  
smartphone screen 56,  
smartphone system 300  
spreadsheet rows and  
columns 250  
Manage Folders command  
Manage tab 289  
management tools 265  
MAPI clients 334  
troubleshooting 335  
list separators 291  
lists  
cancelling selection in 35  
closing 35  
the keyboard 298  
logging in to  
corporate servers 310  
networks 304  
maps 335  
margins 244  
Match case option 242, 256  
Match entire cells option 256  
looking up contacts 50, 218, Match whole words only  
formatting 244  
highlighting items in 29,  
scrolling through 30, 165  
selecting items in 34  
battery  
Live Search 155  
locating  
lookup feature 267  
losing  
connections 324  
information 240, 317  
passwords 300  
smartphone 95, 301  
low coverage areas 321  
low light conditions 35  
lowercase letters 36  
option 242  
maximizing battery 23–24,  
measurement units 292  
media file types 208  
media files  
adding to playlists 212–  
copying 194  
playing 210  
email messages 123  
information 256  
location-specific information  
locking  
SIM smartcards 299  
storing 211  
synchronizing 87, 193–  
transferring 208, 212  
troubleshooting 330  
Media Player 87, 330  
Media Player library 210, 211  
Media Player Mobile 87,  
M
magnification. See zoom  
settings  
mail. See email  
mail servers 113, 334  
Main tab 305  
Manageexistingconnections  
I N D E X  
378  
meeting requests  
message preferences 152–  
starting chat sessions and  
meeting requests 122, 134,  
memory  
message templates 145  
messages  
See also email,  
multimedia, and text  
messages  
Messaging icon 139  
Messaging Options screen  
messaging services 324,  
displaying available 280  
low conditions for 305  
running apps and 278  
storing numbers in 283  
memory buttons 283  
Memory icon 280, 305  
memory options (web) 169  
memory requirements 362  
Memory screen 305  
memory usage 305  
memos. See messages;  
notes  
dialing from 52  
displaying notification 290 Metering mode 201  
displaying unread 43, 49  
formatting 144  
receiving system 81  
storing 338  
viewing info about 141,  
viewing voicemail 54  
Messaging application  
See also text messages;  
multimedia messages  
adding contacts and 218  
receiving meeting  
requests and 134  
receiving messages and  
sending email from 107,  
sending messages from  
microphone 56, 65, 339  
microphone icon 295  
microSD cards 276  
software. See ActiveSync  
desktop software;  
Exchange ActiveSync  
servers.See Exchange  
servers  
Media Player; Media  
Player Mobile  
See also spreadsheets  
menu items 32–34  
Menu key 32, 33  
Menus icon 293  
Menus screen 293  
Message Detail command  
Message format option 130  
Message Options screen  
See Outlook  
I NDE X  
379  
Microsoft Windows Mobile  
software 270  
Microsoft Windows Mobile  
website 315  
See documents  
files to expansion cards  
information 279  
pictures or videos 205  
text 242  
sorting 151  
troubleshooting 324  
viewing status of 65  
System. See MMS  
messaging  
workbooks 257  
microUSB connector 92, 320 moving around the screen  
See also media files;  
playlists  
music files 193, 330  
muting phone calls 56  
My Device folder 268  
My Device library 211  
My Documents folder 195,  
My Music folder 193  
My Pictures folder 193, 197,  
My Playlists category 212  
My Text phrases 116, 140  
Missed call option 72  
MMS messaging 139, 342  
MMS video icon 199  
accounts  
multi-line fields 30  
multimedia file types 203  
multimedia files 202, 338  
multimedia messages  
checking for 65  
creating 142145  
dialing from 52, 147  
displaying 43, 49  
Mobile Device component  
mobile devices 90, 274, 315  
mobile features 13  
mobile networks 321, 322  
mobile phone numbers 218  
Mobile to Market certificates  
forwarding 149  
internal memory and 338  
opening 148  
receiving 147, 154  
Modem tab 310  
removing items from 144 My Treo application 26  
Month View 222  
most recently dialed  
numbers list 52  
moving  
documents to folders 245,  
replying to 147, 148, 149  
saving 154  
selecting links in 150  
My Videos folder 193  
N
names  
dialing by contact 50–51  
displaying service provider  
setting preferences for  
I N D E X  
380  
finding contact 50, 218,  
naming  
document files 243, 245  
expansion cards 280  
folders 245  
templates 242, 249  
workbooks 257  
creating 231, 233  
deleting 234, 261  
renaming 233, 261  
Notes application 231234  
Notes icon 231  
Notes list 233  
Notes tab 302  
notification options 289  
number format settings 291  
number sign symbol 292  
numbers  
See also phone numbers  
entering 36  
formatting 247, 252  
pasting into Calculator 283  
O
worksheets 253, 254  
nationalemergencynumbers notification screens. See  
Office files 235, 237  
Office Outlook. See Outlook  
documents  
offline synchronization 329  
on-device components 17,  
notifications  
notifications  
navigation features 29  
navigator buttons 29, 31  
negative numbers 292  
network keys 178  
network protocols 214  
network settings 81  
networks  
changing 81  
connecting to 81, 175,  
disconnecting from 179  
logging in to 304  
troubleshooting 321–325  
New Sound command 289  
note options 234  
notebook 258  
creating events and 73  
enabling or disabling 290  
receiving information and  
receiving messages and  
receiving phone calls and  
receiving voicemail 55  
sending messages and  
setting ringtones for 72  
setting system sounds for  
on-device help 13  
OneNote files 235  
OneNote Mobile 258–261  
online address books 121–  
online support 13, 26  
online travel information 172  
onscreen keypad 51  
opening  
ActiveSync 93, 94  
Adobe Reader 240  
alternate characters list 37  
application menus 32, 33,  
silencing sounds for 288  
troubleshooting 324  
notes  
adding 218, 229, 259, 260 Now Playing playlist 212  
I NDE X  
381  
applications 39, 278, 292  
chat view 150  
Organize Slides command  
paragraph highlight feature  
documents 241  
organizer features 48, 215  
orientation (slides) 246  
outages 323  
partial envelope icon 119  
partially-charged battery icon  
email applications 335  
email attachments 119  
File Explorer 268  
outgoing mail server settings partnerships 183, 186, 325,  
Inbox 43  
items in folders 269  
multimedia messages 148  
notebook 260  
Outlook  
copying addresses to 329 Password type list 301  
passkeys 70, 186  
Password tab 300  
Outlook folders 329  
Quick Menu 43  
Quick Tour 13, 42  
sync software window 93  
text messages 148  
Today screen 42  
downloading 87  
downloading mail and  
synchronizing with 86, 95,  
password types 52  
passwords  
forgetting or losing 300  
locking device and 298,  
Outlook email accounts 115  
web pages 163, 166, 168, overdue tasks 230  
Owner Information icon 301  
Owner Information screen  
setting up email accounts  
specifying call-blocking  
spreadsheets and 248  
storing on smartphone 97  
patches 272  
Pause playback option 213  
PCs. See computers  
PDF files 119, 235, 261  
performance 319, 337  
Personal Address Book 329  
operating system (device)  
operating systems (PCs) 89  
Option Lock icon 36  
Option Lock mode 36  
options  
displaying 226  
highlighting 29, 31, 34  
selecting 34–35  
P
partnerships  
pairing. See partnerships  
Palm online support 13  
Palm OS applications 270  
Palm OS devices 90, 315  
paragraph formatting 244  
Options tab 288, 297, 302  
I N D E X  
382  
computers  
personal events 226  
personal identification  
numbers (PINs) 79, 80,  
personal information 19,  
personal information  
managers 329, 343  
selecting ringtones for 72  
selectingwirelessbandfor  
sending text messages  
and 56  
setting network  
preferences for 81  
silencing ringer for 53  
turning on or off 23, 47,  
opening Today screen  
during 42  
receiving 53–54, 58  
restricting 79  
sending to voicemail 53,  
setting up conference 59–  
switching between 59  
transferring to hands-free  
devices 71  
See also PIM applications phone as modem feature  
personal unblocking key 344  
personalizing smartphone  
phone calls  
See also phone; phone  
numbers  
troubleshooting 324, 338  
viewing info about 55, 61,  
viewing missed 49  
viewing status of 65–67  
phone  
See also phone calls;  
phone numbers;  
smartphone  
adding a second 58  
addingnotesabout 56, 61, phone headsets. See  
headsets  
answering 53–54, 58, 75  
dialing 49–53  
disabling touch-sensitive  
feature for 298  
adjusting volume for 74  
automatically answering  
blocking 76–77  
customizing sounds for 73  
ending 56  
extracting private 59, 60  
forwarding 60  
holding 56  
Phone icon 299  
phone number codes 51  
phone numbers  
See also phone; phone  
calls  
adding to contacts 75  
assigning to speed dial  
driving and 68  
getting started with 24–25  
locking screen and 56  
playing music and 53  
redialing 52  
changing 78  
running applications and  
muting 56  
copying and pasting 51,  
I NDE X  
383  
entering 49–53  
getting device 25  
default resolution settings  
for 336  
presentations 246, 247  
ringtones 73  
getting from address  
highlighting 31  
inserting pauses in 121  
saving 57–58  
selecting 52  
phone off indicators 65, 66  
Phone Off message 48, 343  
phone on indicators 65, 66  
Phone screen 55, 56, 58  
phone settings 72–82  
Phone Settings screen 25,  
deleting 206  
downloading 167  
editing 205  
hiding on web pages 164  
organizing 205  
previewing 336  
renaming 206  
sending 143, 204  
storing 197, 338  
synchronizing 193195  
taking 197–199, 258, 336 ports. See IR port; USB ports  
Power button 19, 48  
Pictures & Videos application Power icon 306  
video clips 208  
voice notes 233, 260  
voicemail messages 54,  
plug-ins 163, 288  
POP email accounts 107,  
pop-up menus 33, 34  
port numbers 311  
phone specifications 359  
phone status icons 65–67  
Phone/Send button 49, 53  
phone-off icon 48  
Power Save Mode 23  
Pictures & Videos icon 206  
PIM applications 341, 343  
Play Slide Show command  
Play Sound list 304  
Play Sound options 73  
playback controls 211, 214  
Power screen 306  
PowerPoint files 235  
PowerPoint Mobile  
application 246–247  
PowerPoint Mobile icon 246  
preferences 285  
See also customizing  
preinstalled applications 272  
presentation playback  
options 246–247  
photo albums 203  
photos. See pictures  
pick lists. See drop-down lists  
piconet 343  
picture file types 142  
picture formats 197, 202  
picture playback settings 206 playback options 213  
pictures  
adding as backgrounds  
Playback screen 213, 214  
playing  
media files 210  
presentations 246  
See also PowerPoint  
Mobile  
I N D E X  
384  
Preview Mode (camera) 336 Quick Tour 13, 42  
reinstalling software or  
applications 315, 317  
Reject call with text message  
option 76  
reminders  
creating 223, 228, 229,  
system alarms and 303  
turning on and off 289  
viewing 66  
remote access servers 309  
Remote Desktop Mobile  
remote files 310  
Remove Programs icon 272  
Remove Programs list 273  
Remove Programs screen  
previewing  
pictures 336  
QuickGPS feature 267  
QuickTime Player 208  
ringtones 73  
sounds 290  
text messages 141  
prioritizing  
email 117  
R
RAS connections 309  
reassigning buttons 293–294  
Receiving Data message 276  
recent calls list 61, 62, 64  
battery  
text messages 146  
private events 226  
processor 359  
recording  
Program Buttons tab 293  
Program Files folder 279  
programs. See applications;  
software  
Prompt if device unused for  
check box 300  
voice notes 232, 234, 297  
recording toolbar 232  
repeating appointments  
recycling 2  
protected spreadsheets 248  
protecting  
removing  
See also deleting  
applications 272, 338  
attachments 144  
battery 318  
certificates 305  
expansion cards 277  
files 338  
items from playlists 213  
partnerships 325  
Quick Menu 41  
redialing phone 52  
information 297–301  
Treo device 297  
proxy servers 310, 311  
PUK (personal unblocking  
key) 344  
redirector (websites) 335  
refreshing web pages 165,  
Region tab 291  
regional settings 291, 302  
Regional Settings icon 291  
Regional Settings screen 291  
registering smartphone 26  
punctuation marks 36  
push technology 96  
Q
Quick Menu 40, 41, 43  
I NDE X  
385  
Quick Tour 13, 42  
smartphone battery 20,  
web pages 165  
resolution (camera) 336  
resolution (screen) 360  
resets  
sending 144  
Roaming option 73  
rotating pictures 206, 207  
running programs icon 40  
renaming  
documents 245  
expansion cards 280  
files 167  
restoring  
backups 318, 331  
S
safety information 2  
items in folders 269  
pictures or videos 206  
workbooks 257  
worksheets 254  
information 317, 318  
sound settings 288  
Resume playback option 214  
reverse type 31  
Save as Template command  
Save password check box  
Save to Contacts prompt 57  
Save to Drafts command 117  
Save to list 279  
saving  
documents 240, 241,  
email messages 117  
passwords 109, 111  
phone numbers 57–58  
Schedule command 99  
scheduled syncs 330, 333  
schedules. See calendar  
scheduling synchronization  
repeating appointments 224 right-click menus. See  
repeating sounds 73, 290  
repeating tasks 229  
replacing  
information 256  
smartphone battery 318–  
shortcut menus  
Ring tone command 74  
ringer  
adjusting volume for 74  
silencing 53  
turning off 74  
Ringer switch 53, 288  
ringtone files 72, 142  
ringtone managers 337  
ringtones  
assigning to caller IDs 74  
assigning to contacts 74,  
downloading 72  
previewing 73  
selecting 72  
Request message delivery  
notification option 140  
Require PIN when phone is  
used check box 300  
reset button 316  
caution for 317  
resizing  
keyboard keys 296  
I N D E X  
386  
screen  
activating items on 32  
activating wrong features  
adjusting brightness 290  
adjusting display 290  
aligning 292  
screen specifications 360  
Screen view 292  
screen-locked icon 65  
screens, returning to  
previous 30  
searching for files 267, 269  
searching for information  
searching for signal 23  
secure networks 176  
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)  
screensavers 207  
scroll arrows 30  
caring for 17  
scroll bar 30  
secure websites 335  
security  
browsing websites and  
changing color themes for Scroll upon reaching the last  
line check box 297  
conserving battery and 23 scrolling  
disabling touch-sensitivity  
fitting web pages to 164  
highlighting items on 29,  
device screen 29–30, 297  
creating passkeys and 71  
protecting info and 297–  
sending email and 127,  
security certificates 304  
security software 297  
Security tab 299  
Send Options command 146  
sending  
spreadsheets 250  
web pages 164, 165  
SD expansion cards 276  
Search dialog box 267  
Search for list 268  
Search icon 267  
search results list 267, 268  
Search softkey 268  
searching  
locking 56, 299  
scrolling in 29–30, 297  
selecting items on 30, 32  
setting backgrounds for  
troubleshooting 292, 320  
turning on or off 47, 48,  
documents 242  
copyrighted items 204  
waking up 48, 56  
screen fonts 290  
email messages 123  
PDF files 263  
meeting requests 122,  
Screen icon 290, 292  
screen resolution 360  
screen saver 49  
spreadsheets 256  
web addresses 43  
web pages 155, 163  
multimedia messages  
I NDE X  
387  
pictures 204  
sounds 289  
text messages 61, 63,  
shortcut menus 33, 34  
Show half hour slots option  
slide show toolbar 203  
slide shows 203, 246, 247  
slide timing option 247  
slider 30  
Show list 203  
videos 204  
voicemail 145  
Show start and due dates  
option 231  
smartcards. See SIM cards  
web links 165  
Show Tasks entry bar option Smartdial softkey 58  
sensitivity settings 226, 229  
Sent folder 127  
server information 154  
servers, troubleshooting  
smartphone  
Show week numbers option  
Side button 17  
signal, searching for 23  
signal strength 65, 321, 339  
freeing space on 272, 338  
getting help with 13  
getting phone number for  
service contracts 12  
service providers 12, 42, 57, signal-strength icon 47, 308  
getting started with 12,  
signatures 125  
See also accounts; ISPs  
Set as Hands-Free command silencing system sounds 288  
Signatures screen 126  
inserting batteries and 21  
locking 300  
silencing the ringer 53  
silent alarm 288, 290  
SIM card lock feature 298  
SIM Manager 221  
losing 95, 301  
Set up my proxy server  
option 310  
setting alarm clock 303  
settings. See options  
setup mode 90, 92  
low light conditions and 35  
moving around on 27  
personalizing 285  
registering 26  
SIM Manager icon 25, 221  
sharing information 273–274 SIM smartcards 299  
sheet list 250  
Shift cells options 257  
Shift key 36  
See SMS messaging  
Simple PIN passwords 52,  
sketching 232  
skins 214  
slide show settings 207  
setting up 15  
storing 17, 18  
troubleshoot tips for 313  
unlocking 300  
unpacking 11  
I N D E X  
388  
updating information on  
tasks 230  
sound clips 142  
spreadsheet templates 247,  
smartphonecomponents 17, sound settings 73, 288, 289 spreadsheet toolbar 250  
sounds  
See also specific types  
changing alarm 304  
customizing 288  
spreadsheets  
See also Excel Mobile;  
workbooks;  
worksheets  
accessing 235  
smartphone features 11, 13  
smartphone icon 92  
SMS messaging 139, 344  
soft resets 316  
previewing 290  
softkeys 32  
software  
See also applications  
accessing 11  
caution for hard resets and  
included with device 360  
installing sync 85, 86, 90  
purchasing 320  
reinstalling 315, 317  
songs, selecting 210  
See also music; playlists  
Sort command 125  
sort order 255  
sorting  
email 124  
folder items 269  
History list items 168  
information 255  
messages 151  
recording 144, 289  
repeating 73  
sending 289  
setting system 289  
silencing 288  
turning off event 290  
Sounds & Notifications  
screen 72, 289  
adding charts to 255, 256  
calculations in 250–252  
changing order of  
worksheets 253  
creating 247  
customizing filters for 255  
deleting elements in 257  
display options for 249–  
entering data in 249, 252  
insertion options for 252  
scrolling 250  
Sounds & Notifications  
Settings icon 289  
Sounds tab 289  
speaker 208  
speakerphone 56, 339  
speakerphone icon 65  
alternate characters;  
symbols  
specifications 359  
speed dial 50, 63–64  
Speed Dial command 64  
spell-checking 117, 140, 244  
searching 256  
sorting in 255  
Sprite Backup application 95  
SSL protocol 344  
Start button 39  
Start menu 39, 292  
starting  
pictures or videos 205  
data connections 310  
I NDE X  
389  
Excel Mobile 249  
Internet Explorer Mobile  
PowerPoint Mobile 246  
Quick Tour 13  
synchronization 86, 93, 94  
Word Mobile 241  
stereo headphones 208  
stopping playback 210  
Strong alphanumeric  
passwords 52, 301  
stylus 29, 31  
hard resets and 317, 318  
initiating manual 99  
initiating over Bluetooth  
devices 100–101  
overview 83, 85  
scheduling 98–99  
sending meeting requests  
and 225  
setting up multiple  
computers for 101  
starting 86, 93, 94  
stopping 103  
transferring media files  
transferring Office files  
troubleshooting 316, 325–  
synchronization in-progress  
icons 66  
synchronizing  
addresses 329  
dates and time 303  
folders 133  
offline 329  
subfolders 133  
through USB hubs 328  
wirelessly 331  
submenus 33  
Suggest words when  
entering text option 296  
support 13  
sync applications 85, 93  
Storage Card folder 280  
storage card symbol 269  
Storage Card tab 306  
storagecards. See expansion sync options 85, 102  
cards  
storage space 305, 331  
storing  
applications 338  
document files 241, 243,  
information 276, 338  
media files 211  
pictures 197  
smartphone 17, 18  
videos 199  
sync errors 195  
sync methods 88  
sync mode 92  
sync schedules 98, 330, 333  
sync settings (Exchange  
servers) 98  
syncsoftware 12, 85, 86, 88,  
sync software window 93  
synchronization  
backing up information  
and 317  
connecting to PCs and 12  
conserving battery and 24  
defined 344  
workbooks 257  
enabling wireless 86, 95–  
Streaming Media icon 170  
getting started with 26  
I N D E X  
390  
with third-party  
applications 317  
system alarms 303  
sending 144  
deleting 32, 50  
finding and replacing 242,  
formatting 243, 259  
highlighting 31, 32, 243  
moving or copying 242  
resizing 290  
spell-checking 117, 140,  
text captions 143  
text files 305  
setting due dates for 229  
setting reminders for 231  
Tasks application 228–231  
Tasks entry bar 230, 231  
Tasks icon 228  
System Center Mobile  
Device Manager 312  
system dates and time 302  
system errors 322  
system locks 298, 300  
system messages 81  
system requirements 89  
system settings 302–308  
system sounds 288, 289  
system warnings 289  
Tasks list 230  
Tasks Over The Air (OTA) 96  
Tasks tab (Connections) 309,  
TDD devices. See TTY/TDD  
devices  
technical support 13  
Text Layout command 145  
telecommunications devices text message services 78  
T
text messages  
tabs 30  
templates  
checking for 65  
taking pictures 197–199,  
documents 241, 245  
converting to multimedia  
creating 139–141  
deleting 147, 152  
displaying 43, 49  
forwarding 149  
messages 145  
spreadsheets 247, 249,  
Templates folder 241, 249  
tentative appointments 223  
text  
tapping sounds 289  
task categories 229, 230  
Task Manager 40  
task settings 230–231  
tasks  
making phone calls and  
adding reminders to 229  
completing 230  
creating 228230  
deleting 230  
filtering and sorting 230  
marking as sensitive 229  
aligning 244  
opening 148  
changing 242  
copying 168  
creating documents and  
previewing 141  
receiving 139, 147, 324  
replying to 147, 148, 149  
selecting links in 150  
I NDE X  
391  
setting preferences for  
troubleshooting 270, 320,  
time format settings 292  
time stamps 200  
time system settings 302  
Time tab 302  
time zones 302  
tips 11  
TKIP encryption 178  
Today screen  
viewing voicemail  
messages on 54  
touchscreen. See screen  
touchscreen lockout 297,  
touch-sensitive feature 297  
transactions 335  
transition effects (slides) 247  
transmission delays 324  
travel information 172  
sorting 151  
troubleshooting 324  
text phrases 116, 140, 143  
Text Size tab 290  
TTY/TDD devices  
fields  
accessing 42  
third-party applications  
5-way navigator and 29,  
accessing Outlook folders  
and 329  
caution for hard resets and  
deleting 338  
getting help with 337  
installing 269, 270, 337,  
previewing pictures and  
changing color themes for troubleshooting 13, 313  
trusted device list 184, 185  
trusted devices 184, 186  
See also partnerships  
partnerships  
connecting to Bluetooth  
devices from 185  
customizing 205, 287  
dialing from 49  
recovering settings for  
removing Quick Menu  
from 41  
removing Quick Tour from  
TTY icon 75  
TTY/TDD devices 74–75  
TTY/TDD mode 74  
Turn Hands-free Off  
command 71  
Turn Hands-free On  
command 71  
selecting running apps  
from 40  
turning on or off  
reinstalling 315, 317  
synchronizing with 87,  
starting web searches  
from 163  
viewing info on 4243  
event sounds 290  
reminders 289  
screen 306  
I N D E X  
392  
Typing mode 234  
USB controllers 329  
USB hubs 91, 328  
USB ports 91, 328  
Use network time zone  
check box 303  
storing 199  
synchronizing 193–195  
transferring to expansion  
cards 208  
viewing 203  
View All Calls command 62,  
U
UDP ports 172  
UMTS networks 57  
UMTS services 345  
UMTS status icons 66, 67  
unauthorized users 297, 304  
unavailable time slots 226  
Unhold option 56  
Unicode language settings  
Unknown Caller option 73  
unlocking  
SIM smartcards 299, 300  
smartphone 300  
spreadsheet rows and  
columns 250  
unread messages 43, 49,  
unretrieved voicemail 54  
untimed events 224  
Update Library command  
User Guide 12, 26  
usernames 345  
viewing  
V
alternate characters 37  
animated images 208  
application menus 32, 33,  
appointments 43, 222,  
vCal attachments 334  
vCalendar attachments 144,  
vCard attachments 144, 334  
Vibrate when… check boxes  
vibrating alarm 288, 290  
video albums 203  
video files 142, 203, 330  
video icon 199  
video ringtones 195  
video settings 199, 214  
videos  
deleting 206  
downloading 208  
organizing 205  
playing 208  
recording 199–200  
renaming 206  
calendar 222  
contact info 141, 149, 220  
current connection 310  
folder contents 268  
memory usage 305  
notifications 290  
on-device help 13  
PDF documents 261  
power settings 306  
service provider 42  
space on expansion cards  
updating information 85  
uppercase letters 36, 297  
See also web links  
USB AC charger 21  
USB cable 22, 91, 94  
sending 143, 204  
setting resolution for 336  
speed dial numbers 64  
I NDE X  
393  
unread messages 43, 49  
videos 203  
voicemail messages 54  
web favorites 166  
wireless settings 307  
changing phone number  
checking for 65  
listening to 54–55  
sending 145  
getting started with 163,  
memory consumption and  
secure sites and 163, 164,  
troubleshooting 335  
wireless connections and  
sendingcallsto 53, 58, 60,  
VPN connections  
voicemail notifications 55  
Vista operating systems. See Voicemail softkey 55  
Windows Vista computers volume  
web favorites. See favorites  
web files 169  
voice calls 65  
phone 74  
web forms 165  
voice captions 144  
Voice Command application  
ringer 74  
tapping sounds 289  
VPN clients 325  
web links  
creating 260  
highlighting 31  
Voice Command button 295 VPN connections 310  
internal memory and 338  
selecting 127, 165, 260  
sending 165  
troubleshooting 335  
web navigation features 29  
web pages  
Voice Command icon 294,  
W
waking up smartphone  
screen 48, 56  
wallpaper 195  
Voice Command settings  
voice commands 24, 295  
Voice mail option 73  
voice notes 232–233, 234,  
Voice recording format list  
warnings 289  
warranty 11  
accessing 335  
adding to favorites 166  
arranging on screen 164  
clearing links to 338  
copying from 168  
dialing from 52, 168  
downloading items from  
weak signals 321, 339  
web addresses 43, 164, 335  
See also web links  
web browsers 163  
See also Internet Explorer  
Mobile  
voice recording formats 297  
voicemail  
web browsing  
I N D E X  
394  
hiding images on 164  
moving around in 165  
playing media files from  
refreshing 165, 335  
resizing 165  
returning to recently  
viewed 168  
scrolling 164, 165  
searching 155, 163  
selecting addresses on  
submitting transactions  
and 335  
Week View 222, 227  
WEP encryption 178  
Wi-Fi button 175  
Wi-Fi feature  
turning on or off 18, 23,  
opening sync application  
for 94  
synchronizing with 85, 95  
Windows XP computers  
enabling Bluetooth  
connections for 100  
enabling phone as modem  
and 187  
opening ActiveSync for 93  
synchronizing with 85, 95,  
viewing status of 42, 66  
Wi-Fi networks 174–179  
Wi-Fi settings 179–183  
Windows Live Mail 156158 wired headsets 68, 71  
Windows Live Messenger  
wireless band setting 80  
wireless connection icons 66  
sending email from 165  
setting as home 165, 168 Windows Live services 155, wireless connections  
synchronizing favorites for  
web-based email 108, 155  
websites  
See also web browsing  
connecting to 163  
ending connections to 311  
redirectors and 335  
searching over 155, 163  
browsing websites and  
conserving battery and 18  
ending 179  
wireless  
synchronization  
Windows Mobile Device  
Windows Mobile devices 90,  
Windows Mobile operating  
Windows Mobile software  
turning on 175  
wireless features 308, 337  
Windows Update application wireless modems 187  
wireless service indicator 42  
wireless service providers  
streaming from 170–172, Windows Vista computers  
enabling Bluetooth  
connections for 100  
wireless services 307  
I NDE X  
395  
wireless synchronization 86,  
Word application 235  
See also documents  
Word Completion tab 296  
word highlight feature 32  
Word Mobile application 30,  
Word Mobile icon 241  
word-processing features  
workbook list 258  
workbooks  
See also Excel Mobile  
application;  
spreadsheets  
creating 249  
deleting 258  
displaying 249–250  
moving around in 250  
naming 257  
replacing information in  
searching 256  
setting default template  
for 258  
worksheet names 248  
worksheets  
See also spreadsheets;  
workbooks  
adding 253  
adjusting column and row  
size for 254  
deleting 258  
entering defined names in  
entering formulas in 251,  
entering functions in 251  
filtering data in 255  
formatting options for  
inserting cells, rows, and  
columns 252  
moving between 250  
naming 253  
removing cells, rows, and  
columns 257  
renaming 254  
WorldMate 172, 173  
WPA networks 178  
Writing mode 234  
Y
Year View 222  
Z
ZIP files 270  
zoom settings  
documents 241  
pictures 260  
presentations 246  
smartphone screen 297  
spreadsheets 248, 250  
web pages 165  
organizing 257  
I N D E X  
396  
Palm, Inc.  
950 W. Maude Ave.  
Sunnyvale, CA 94085-2801  
United States of America  
PN: 406-11437-00  

Sonic Alert msm83c154s User Manual
Seagate ST240HM001 User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA ST3500418AS User Manual
Seagate Barracuda ST3160021AS User Manual
Samsung Spinpiont HM120IC User Manual
Samsung Mobile Phone SGH T401G User Manual
Samsung GH68 0251A User Manual
Sagem myX 1 User Manual
Roberts Radio Gemini 19 CRD 19 User Manual
Oregon RM962 User Manual